WO2020080218A1 - Coloring composition, film, color filter, method for manufacturing color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device - Google Patents

Coloring composition, film, color filter, method for manufacturing color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020080218A1
WO2020080218A1 PCT/JP2019/039780 JP2019039780W WO2020080218A1 WO 2020080218 A1 WO2020080218 A1 WO 2020080218A1 JP 2019039780 W JP2019039780 W JP 2019039780W WO 2020080218 A1 WO2020080218 A1 WO 2020080218A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
coloring composition
mass
resin
compound
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2019/039780
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
宙夢 小泉
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to JP2020553110A priority Critical patent/JP7130055B2/en
Publication of WO2020080218A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020080218A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F2/00Processes of polymerisation
    • C08F2/44Polymerisation in the presence of compounding ingredients, e.g. plasticisers, dyestuffs, fillers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F265/00Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers of unsaturated monocarboxylic acids or derivatives thereof as defined in group C08F20/00
    • C08F265/04Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers of unsaturated monocarboxylic acids or derivatives thereof as defined in group C08F20/00 on to polymers of esters
    • C08F265/06Polymerisation of acrylate or methacrylate esters on to polymers thereof
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F265/00Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers of unsaturated monocarboxylic acids or derivatives thereof as defined in group C08F20/00
    • C08F265/10Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers of unsaturated monocarboxylic acids or derivatives thereof as defined in group C08F20/00 on to polymers of amides or imides
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F290/00Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers modified by introduction of aliphatic unsaturated end or side groups
    • C08F290/08Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers modified by introduction of aliphatic unsaturated end or side groups on to polymers modified by introduction of unsaturated side groups
    • C08F290/12Polymers provided for in subclasses C08C or C08F
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B25/00Quinophthalones
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B47/00Porphines; Azaporphines
    • C09B47/04Phthalocyanines abbreviation: Pc
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09DCOATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
    • C09D201/00Coating compositions based on unspecified macromolecular compounds
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09DCOATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
    • C09D4/00Coating compositions, e.g. paints, varnishes or lacquers, based on organic non-macromolecular compounds having at least one polymerisable carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bond ; Coating compositions, based on monomers of macromolecular compounds of groups C09D183/00 - C09D183/16
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09DCOATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
    • C09D7/00Features of coating compositions, not provided for in group C09D5/00; Processes for incorporating ingredients in coating compositions
    • C09D7/40Additives
    • C09D7/41Organic pigments; Organic dyes
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • G03F7/032Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with binders
    • G03F7/033Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with binders the binders being polymers obtained by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. vinyl polymers
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L27/00Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate
    • H01L27/14Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation
    • H01L27/144Devices controlled by radiation
    • H01L27/146Imager structures

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a coloring composition.
  • the present invention also relates to a film using a coloring composition, a color filter, a method for manufacturing a color filter, a solid-state image sensor, and an image display device.
  • Color filters are used as key devices for displays and optical elements.
  • the color filter usually includes pixels of three primary colors of red, green and blue, and plays a role of separating transmitted light into three primary colors.
  • the color filter is manufactured, for example, by using a coloring composition containing a coloring agent and performing pattern formation by a photolithography method. Further, in performing pattern formation by the photolithography method, the coloring composition further contains a polymerizable monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group, a photopolymerization initiator, and a resin in addition to the colorant. Things are used.
  • Patent Documents 1 to 3 use of a phthalocyanine compound using Al as a central metal (hereinafter, also referred to as an aluminum phthalocyanine compound) as a colorant has been studied (Patent Documents 1 to 3).
  • Patent Document 1 JP-A-2005-063593 JP, 2016-170370, A JP, 2013-171063, A
  • the present inventor diligently studied a coloring composition containing a colorant containing an aluminum phthalocyanine compound, a polymerizable monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group, a photopolymerization initiator, and a resin.
  • the reason why the color unevenness is likely to occur in the film obtained using the composition was considered to be due to insufficient compatibility between the aluminum phthalocyanine compound and the polymerizable monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group. Therefore, while using the compound represented by the formula (1) or the compound represented by the formula (2) described below as the aluminum phthalocyanine compound, the content of the polymerizable monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group is within a predetermined range.
  • a coloring composition comprising a coloring agent, a polymerizable monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group, a photopolymerization initiator, and a resin
  • the colorant contains at least one selected from the compound represented by the following formula (1) and the compound represented by the following formula (2),
  • X 1 to X 4 each independently represent a substituent;
  • Z 1 represents a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, —OP ( ⁇ O) R 1 R 2 , or —O—SiR 3 R 4 R 5 , and R 1 to R 5 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, It represents
  • the colorant contains at least one selected from Color Index Pigment Yellow 138, Color Index Pigment Yellow 139, Color Index Pigment Yellow 150, and Color Index Pigment Yellow 231, and is described in ⁇ 1> or ⁇ 2>. Coloring composition.
  • ⁇ 4> The coloring composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 3>, further containing a compound represented by the following formula (3):
  • Ry 1 to Ry 13 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, a sulfo group, a salt of a sulfo group, a carboxyl group, a salt of a carboxyl group, or phthalimidomethyl.
  • the resin is a colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 6>, which contains a resin containing a repeating unit derived from a compound represented by the following formula (I):
  • Xi 1 represents O or NH
  • Ri 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • Li 1 represents a divalent linking group
  • Ri 10 represents a substituent
  • m represents an integer of 0 to 2
  • p represents an integer of 0 or more.
  • the coloring composition according to ⁇ 7>, wherein the resin containing a repeating unit derived from the compound represented by the formula (I) further contains a repeating unit derived from an alkyl (meth) acrylate.
  • the ratio M 1 / B 1 of the mass M 1 of the polymerizable monomer contained in the coloring composition to the mass B 1 of the resin contained in the coloring composition is 0.03 to 0.15.
  • the polymerizable monomer includes at least one selected from succinic acid-modified dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate and dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, ⁇ 1> to The coloring composition according to any one of ⁇ 9>.
  • ⁇ 11> A film obtained from the coloring composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 10>.
  • ⁇ 12> A color filter having the film according to ⁇ 11>.
  • ⁇ 13> A step of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 10>, and a pattern for the colored composition layer by a photolithography method. Forming a color filter.
  • ⁇ 14> A solid-state image sensor having the film according to ⁇ 11>.
  • ⁇ 15> An image display device having the film according to ⁇ 11>.
  • a coloring composition which is excellent in photolithography and can form a film in which color unevenness is suppressed. Further, it is possible to provide a film using a coloring composition, a color filter, a method for manufacturing a color filter, a solid-state image sensor, and an image display device.
  • substitution and non-substitution are not included as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
  • the notation in which substitution and non-substitution are not included includes a group (atomic group) having no substituent and a group (atomic group) having a substituent.
  • the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • the term "exposure” includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using a particle beam such as an electron beam or an ion beam, unless otherwise specified.
  • Examples of the light used for exposure include a bright line spectrum of a mercury lamp, deep ultraviolet rays represented by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), active rays such as X-rays and electron rays, or radiation.
  • EUV light extreme ultraviolet rays
  • active rays such as X-rays and electron rays
  • radiation or radiation.
  • (meth) acrylate” represents both acrylate and methacrylate, or either
  • “(meth) acrylic” represents both acrylic and methacrylic
  • “Acryloyl” means both acryloyl and methacryloyl, or either.
  • Me in the structural formula represents a methyl group
  • Et represents an ethyl group
  • Bu represents a butyl group
  • Ph represents a phenyl group.
  • the weight average molecular weight and the number average molecular weight are polystyrene equivalent values measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography) method.
  • the total solid content refers to the total mass of the components of the composition excluding the solvent.
  • the pigment means a compound that is difficult to dissolve in a solvent.
  • the term “process” is included in this term as long as the intended action of the process is achieved not only as an independent process but also when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. .
  • the coloring composition of the present invention is a coloring composition containing a coloring agent, a polymerizable monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group, a photopolymerization initiator, and a resin, and the coloring agent has the formula ( At least one selected from the compound represented by 1) and the compound represented by the formula (2) is contained, and 0.1 to 6.0 mass% of the polymerizable monomer is contained in the total solid content of the coloring composition. It is characterized by
  • the content of the polymerizable monomer in the total solid content of the coloring composition of the present invention is 0.1 to 6.0% by mass
  • the compound or formula represented by (1) or the compound represented by the formula (1) is used as the coloring agent.
  • the compound represented by (2) it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of color unevenness in the obtained film while maintaining excellent photolithographic properties.
  • the content of the polymerizable monomer is 0.1 to 6.0% by mass, it is derived from the polymerizable monomer that scatters from the film even if the carbon-carbon bond is broken with time.
  • the amount of the component is small, and it is possible to suppress the film shrinkage of the obtained film over time. In particular, even when the film is exposed to a high humidity environment for a long time, it is possible to effectively suppress the film shrinkage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the generation of voids between the film formed using the coloring composition of the present invention and the member adjacent to the film.
  • a pixel is formed between pixels of another color by using the coloring composition of the present invention, or a pixel of another color is formed between pixels formed by using the composition of the present invention, and a structure such as a color filter is formed. Even when such a structure is exposed for a long period of time in a high humidity environment during the manufacture of, the generation of voids between adjacent pixels can be suppressed. Further, when the colored composition of the present invention is used to manufacture a structure such as a color filter by forming pixels in a region partitioned by partition walls, such a structure is used for a long period of time in a high humidity environment. Even when exposed, it is possible to suppress the generation of voids between the pixels and the partition walls.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can be preferably used as a coloring composition for a color filter. Specifically, it can be preferably used as a coloring composition for forming pixels of a color filter. Further, the coloring composition of the present invention can be preferably used as a coloring composition for a solid-state imaging device, and can be more preferably used as a coloring composition for forming pixels of a color filter used for a solid-state imaging device. The coloring composition of the present invention can also be preferably used as a coloring composition for a display device, and can be more preferably used as a coloring composition for forming pixels of a color filter used for a display device. The coloring composition of the present invention can also be used as a composition for forming color microlenses. Examples of the method for manufacturing a color microlens include the method described in JP-A-2018-010162.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a coloring agent.
  • a colorant containing at least one selected from the compound represented by the formula (1) and the compound represented by the formula (2) is used.
  • the compound represented by the formula (1) is also referred to as the compound (1).
  • the compound represented by the formula (2) is also referred to as the compound (2).
  • X 1 to X 4 each independently represent a substituent.
  • substituent represented by X 1 to X 4 include the substituent T described later.
  • the substituent represented by X 1 to X 4 is preferably a halogen atom, a nitro group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, —ORt 1 , —SRt 1 , or —SO 2 NRt 1 Rt 2 and is a halogen atom or an alkyl group. Is more preferable, and a halogen atom is still more preferable.
  • Rt 1 and Rt 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group.
  • Z 1 represents a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, —OP ( ⁇ O) R 1 R 2 , or —O—SiR 3 R 4 R 5 , and R 1 to R 5 are each independently It represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, or an aryloxy group, and R 1 and R 2 , and R 3 and R 4 may combine with each other to form a ring.
  • Z 1 is preferably a hydroxy group, —OP ( ⁇ O) R 1 R 2 or —O—SiR 3 R 4 R 5, more preferably —OP ( ⁇ O) R 1 R 2 , and R 1 and R 2 are More preferred is —OP ( ⁇ O) R 1 R 2 which is each independently an aryl group.
  • the halogen atom represented by Z 1 include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom.
  • the alkyl group and the alkoxy group represented by R 1 to R 5 preferably have 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably have 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and further preferably have 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group and the alkoxy group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the aryl group and aryloxy group represented by R 1 to R 5 preferably have 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably have 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and further preferably have 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group, aryl group, alkoxy group and aryloxy group represented by R 1 to R 5 may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described later.
  • R 1 and R 2 , and R 3 and R 4 may combine with each other to form a ring. That is, when Z 1 is —OP ( ⁇ O) R 1 R 2 , R 1 and R 2 may combine with each other to form a ring. When Z 1 is —O—SiR 3 R 4 R 5 , R 3 and R 4 may combine with each other to form a ring.
  • the ring formed by combining these groups may be an aliphatic ring, an aromatic ring, or a heterocycle.
  • m1 to m4 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
  • X 1 to X 4 may be the same or different.
  • X 5 to X 12 each independently represent a substituent.
  • substituent represented by X 5 to X 12 include the substituent T described later.
  • the substituent represented by X 5 to X 12 is preferably a halogen atom, a nitro group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, —ORt 1 , —SRt 1 , or —SO 2 NRt 1 Rt 2 and is a halogen atom or an alkyl group. Is more preferable, and a halogen atom is still more preferable.
  • Rt 1 and Rt 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group.
  • R 10 -O-, R 6 to R 10 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, or an aryloxy group.
  • L A is preferably —O—SiR 6 R 7 —O— or —OP ( ⁇ O) R 10 —O—, more preferably —OP ( ⁇ O) R 10 —O—, and R 10 Is more preferably an aryl group, —OP ( ⁇ O) R 10 —O—.
  • the alkyl group and the alkoxy group represented by R 6 to R 10 preferably have 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably have 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and further preferably have 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group and the alkoxy group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the aryl group and the aryloxy group represented by R 6 to R 10 preferably have 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably have 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and further preferably have 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group, aryl group, alkoxy group and aryloxy group represented by R 1 to R 5 may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described later.
  • m5 to m12 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
  • X 5 to X 12 may be the same or different.
  • substituent T examples include a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, -ORt 1 , -CORt 1 , -COORt 1 , -OCORt 1 , -NRt 1 Rt 2 , -NHCORt 1 , -CONRt 1 Rt 2 , -NHCONRt 1 Rt 2 , -NHCOORt 1 , -SRt 1 , -SO 2 Rt 1 , -SO 2 ORt 1 , -NHSO 2 Rt 1 or -SO 2 NRt 1 Rt 2 may be mentioned.
  • Rt 1 and Rt 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group. Rt 1 and Rt 2 may combine to form a ring.
  • halogen atom examples include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and further preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the alkenyl group preferably has 2 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably has 2 to 12 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably has 2 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • the alkenyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the alkynyl group preferably has 2 to 30 carbon atoms, and more preferably has 2 to 25 carbon atoms.
  • the alkynyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and further preferably has 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring.
  • the heterocyclic group is preferably a single ring or a condensed ring having 2 to 4 condensed rings.
  • the number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3.
  • the hetero atom forming the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably 3 to 30, more preferably 3 to 18, and even more preferably 3 to 12.
  • the alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group, aryl group and heterocyclic group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include the substituents described above for the substituent T.
  • the compound (1) and the compound (2) include compounds having the following structures, compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0046 to 0053 of JP-A-2005-063593, paragraphs No. 0151 to JP-A-2013-171063. And the compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0251 to 0258 of JP-A-2016-170370.
  • PG62 is color index pigment green 62
  • PG63 is color index pigment green 63.
  • the total content of the compound (1) and the compound (2) in the colorant is preferably 30% by mass or more, more preferably 40% by mass or more, and 50% by mass or more. Is more preferable.
  • the upper limit can be 100% by mass, 90% by mass or less, and 80% by mass or less.
  • the colorant used in the present invention preferably contains a yellow colorant in addition to the compound (1) and the compound (2) described above. According to this aspect, it is easy to form a film having a spectral characteristic suitable for a green pixel.
  • the content of the yellow colorant in the coloring composition is preferably 5 to 60 parts by mass based on 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the compound (1) and the compound (2) described above.
  • the upper limit is preferably 55 parts by mass or less, more preferably 50 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 45 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, more preferably 15 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 20 parts by mass or more.
  • yellow colorants examples include azo compounds, quinophthalone compounds, isoindolinone compounds, isoindoline compounds, anthraquinone compounds and the like.
  • the yellow colorant may be a pigment or a dye.
  • yellow pigment examples include color index (CI) pigment yellow 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 24, 31. , 32, 34, 35, 35: 1, 36, 36: 1, 37, 37: 1, 40, 42, 43, 53, 55, 60, 61, 62, 63, 65, 73, 74, 77, 81. , 83, 86, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 100, 101, 104, 106, 108, 109, 110, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 123, 125, 126.
  • CI color index
  • the pigment described in JP-A-2017-201003 and the pigment described in JP-A-2017-197719 can be used.
  • the quinophthalone compounds described in paragraphs 0011 to 0034 of JP2013-054339A and the quinophthalone compounds described in paragraphs 0013 to 0058 of JP2014-026228A can be used. .
  • the colorant used in the present invention is selected from Color Index Pigment Yellow 138, Color Index Pigment Yellow 139, Color Index Pigment Yellow 150, and Color Index Pigment Yellow 231 in addition to the above-described compound (1) and compound (2). It is preferable to include at least one of When these colorants are contained, the content is preferably 5 to 60 parts by mass based on 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the compound (1) and the compound (2) described above.
  • the upper limit is preferably 55 parts by mass or less, more preferably 50 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 45 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, more preferably 15 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 20 parts by mass or more.
  • the colorant used in the present invention preferably contains a compound represented by the following formula (3) (hereinafter, also referred to as compound (3)) in addition to the above-described compound (1) and compound (2).
  • the compound (3) can be preferably used as a yellow colorant.
  • Ry 1 to Ry 13 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, a sulfo group, a salt of a sulfo group, a carboxyl group, a salt of a carboxyl group, or phthalimidomethyl.
  • halogen atom examples include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom, a chlorine atom and a bromine atom are preferable, and a chlorine atom is more preferable.
  • the carbon number of the alkyl group and the alkoxy group is preferably 1 to 30, more preferably 1 to 15, and further preferably 1 to 8.
  • the alkyl group and the alkoxy group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and further preferably has 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • an atom or an atomic group constituting the salt is an alkali metal ion (Li + , Na + , K +, etc.), an alkaline earth metal ion (Ca 2+ , Mg 2+). Etc.), ammonium ion, imidazolium ion, pyridinium ion, phosphonium ion and the like.
  • two adjacent groups of Ry 1 to Ry 4 may be bonded to each other to form a ring
  • two adjacent groups of Ry 10 to Ry 13 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • at least one set of two adjacent groups of Ry 1 to Ry 4 and Ry 10 to Ry 13 is preferably bonded to form a ring.
  • the ring formed may be an aliphatic ring, an aromatic ring, or a heterocycle, and is preferably an aromatic ring.
  • the aromatic ring include an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and an aromatic heterocycle, and an aromatic hydrocarbon ring is preferable.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon ring include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, an anthracene ring and a phenanthrene ring, and a benzene ring is preferable.
  • the compound (3) is preferably a compound represented by any of the following formulas (3a) to (3c).
  • Ry 1 to Ry 13 and Ry 101 to Ry 108 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, a sulfo group or a sulfo group. It represents a salt, a carboxyl group, a salt of a carboxyl group, a phthalimidomethyl group, or a sulfamoyl group, and preferably represents a halogen atom.
  • Specific examples of the compound (3) include the compounds described in Examples described later and the compound described in paragraph No. 0073 of International Publication No. 2012/128233.
  • the content thereof is 5 to 60 parts by mass based on 100 parts by mass of the total of the compound (1) and the compound (2) described above. Is preferred.
  • the upper limit is preferably 55 parts by mass or less, more preferably 50 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 45 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, more preferably 15 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 20 parts by mass or more.
  • the colorant used in the present invention may further contain a colorant other than the above-mentioned compounds (hereinafter, also referred to as other colorant).
  • a colorant other than the above-mentioned compounds hereinafter, also referred to as other colorant.
  • other colorants include the following.
  • Red pigment C. I. Pigment Green 7, 10, 36, 37, 58, 59 etc. (above, green pigment), C. I. Pigment Violet 1, 19, 23, 27, 32, 37, 42, 60, 61 etc. (above, purple pigment), C. I. Pigment Blue 1, 2, 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4, 15: 6, 16, 22, 22, 29, 60, 64, 66, 79, 80, 87, 88 etc. , Blue pigment).
  • a halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment having an average number of halogen atoms in one molecule of 10 to 14, an average number of bromine atoms of 8 to 12 and an average number of chlorine atoms of 2 to 5 can also be used. Specific examples include the compounds described in WO 2015/118720. Further, the compound described in CN1069009027A, a phthalocyanine compound having a phosphoric acid ester as a ligand, or the like can be used as a green pigment.
  • red pigment a diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment in which at least one bromine atom is substituted in the structure described in JP-A-2017-201384, a diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment described in paragraph Nos. 0016 to 0022 of Patent No. 6248838.
  • a pigment or the like can also be used.
  • red pigment it is also possible to use a compound having a structure in which an aromatic ring group in which a group having an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or a nitrogen atom bonded to the aromatic ring is introduced is bound to a diketopyrrolopyrrole skeleton. it can.
  • dyes can be used as other colorants.
  • the dye is not particularly limited, and known dyes can be used.
  • pyrazole azo type anilino azo type, triaryl methane type, anthraquinone type, anthrapyridone type, benzylidene type, oxonol type, pyrazolotriazole azo type, pyridone azo type, cyanine type, phenothiazine type, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine type, xanthene type
  • Examples thereof include phthalocyanine-based dyes, benzopyran-based dyes, indigo-based dyes, and pyrromethene-based dyes.
  • the thiazole compound described in JP 2012-158649 A, the azo compound described in JP 2011-18449 A, and the azo compound described in JP 2011-145540 A can also be preferably used.
  • the intramolecular imide type xanthene dye described in JP-A-2018-012863 can also be used.
  • a dye multimer can be used as another colorant.
  • the dye multimer is preferably a dye used by being dissolved in a solvent, but the dye multimer may form particles, and when the dye multimer is particles, it is usually in a state of being dispersed in a solvent. Used.
  • the dye multimer in the form of particles can be obtained, for example, by emulsion polymerization, and specific examples thereof include the compounds and production methods described in JP-A-2015-214682.
  • the dye multimer has two or more dye structures in one molecule, and preferably has three or more dye structures. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but may be 100 or less.
  • the plurality of dye structures contained in one molecule may be the same dye structure or different dye structures.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the dye multimer is preferably 2000 to 50,000.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 3,000 or more, still more preferably 6000 or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 30,000 or less, further preferably 20,000 or less.
  • Dye multimers are described in JP2011-213925A, JP2013-041097A, JP2015-028144A, JP2005-030742A, WO2016 / 031442 and the like. Compounds can also be used.
  • the content of the colorant is preferably 35% by mass or more, more preferably 40% by mass or more, further preferably 45% by mass or more, particularly preferably 50% by mass or more, based on the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the upper limit is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 65% by mass or less.
  • the total content of the compound (1) and the compound (2) is preferably 25% by mass or more, and more preferably 30% by mass or more based on the total solid content of the colored composition. , 35% by mass or more is more preferable, and 40% by mass or more is particularly preferable.
  • the upper limit is preferably 65% by mass or less, and more preferably 60% by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a pigment derivative.
  • the pigment derivative include compounds having a structure in which a part of the chromophore is substituted with an acid group, a basic group or a phthalimidomethyl group.
  • the acid group contained in the pigment derivative is preferably a sulfo group or a carboxyl group, more preferably a sulfo group.
  • an amino group is preferable, and a tertiary amino group is more preferable.
  • a pigment derivative having excellent visible transparency may be contained as the pigment derivative.
  • the maximum value of the molar extinction coefficient in the wavelength region of 400 ⁇ 700 nm of the transparent pigment derivative (.epsilon.max) is that it is preferable, 1000L ⁇ mol -1 ⁇ cm -1 or less is not more than 3000L ⁇ mol -1 ⁇ cm -1 Is more preferable, and 100 L ⁇ mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or less is further preferable.
  • the lower limit of ⁇ max is, for example, 1 L ⁇ mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or more, and may be 10 L ⁇ mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or more.
  • pigment derivative examples include the compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0162 to 0183 of JP 2011-252065 A and the compounds described in JP 2003-081972 A.
  • transparent pigment derivative examples include compounds having the following structures.
  • the content of the pigment derivative is preferably 1 to 30 parts by mass, more preferably 3 to 20 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the compound (1) and the compound (2).
  • the total content of the pigment derivative and the colorant is preferably 35% by mass or more, more preferably 40% by mass or more, further preferably 45% by mass or more, and 50% by mass based on the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • a mass% or more is particularly preferable.
  • the upper limit is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 65% by mass or less.
  • As the pigment derivative only one kind may be used, or two or more kinds may be used in combination.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a resin.
  • the resin is blended, for example, for the purpose of dispersing particles such as a pigment in the composition and for the use of a binder.
  • the resin mainly used to disperse particles and the like in the composition is also referred to as a dispersant.
  • a dispersant such an application of the resin is an example, and the resin may be used for the purpose other than such an application.
  • the resin examples include (meth) acrylic resin, (meth) acrylamide resin, epoxy resin, ene / thiol resin, polycarbonate resin, polyether resin, polyarylate resin, polysulfone resin, polyethersulfone resin, polyphenylene resin, polyarylene.
  • examples thereof include ether phosphine oxide resin, polyimide resin, polyamideimide resin, polyolefin resin, cyclic olefin resin, polyester resin, styrene resin, and siloxane resin.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin is preferably 2000 to 2000000.
  • the upper limit is preferably 1,000,000 or less, more preferably 500000 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 3,000 or more, more preferably 4,000 or more, still more preferably 5,000 or more.
  • a resin having an acid group can be used as the resin.
  • the acid group include a carboxyl group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfo group, a phenolic hydroxy group and the like.
  • the resin having an acid group can be used as an alkali-soluble resin or a dispersant.
  • the acid value of the resin having an acid group is preferably 30 to 500 mgKOH / g.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 50 mgKOH / g or more, further preferably 70 mgKOH / g or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 400 mgKOH / g or less, further preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, particularly preferably 150 mgKOH / g or less, and most preferably 120 mgKOH / g or less.
  • the colored composition of the present invention is a compound represented by the following formula (ED1) and / or a compound represented by the following formula (ED2) as a resin (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as “ether dimer”).
  • ED1 a compound represented by the following formula
  • ED2 a compound represented by the following formula
  • a resin containing a repeating unit derived from can be used.
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms, which may have a substituent.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the description in JP 2010-168539 A can be referred to.
  • a resin having a maleimide structure can be used as the resin.
  • a maleimide structure is a structure derived from a maleimide compound.
  • the maleimide compound include maleimide and N-substituted maleimide.
  • the N-substituted maleimide include cyclohexyl maleimide, phenyl maleimide, methyl maleimide, ethyl maleimide, n-butyl maleimide, lauryl maleimide and the like.
  • the resin having a maleimide structure is preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having a maleimide structure.
  • the maleimide structure may be contained in the main chain of the repeating unit or may be contained in the side chain of the repeating unit.
  • the maleimide structure is preferably contained in the main chain of the repeating unit because it is easy to form a film with suppressed color unevenness.
  • the colored composition of the present invention contains a resin i (hereinafter, also referred to as resin i) containing a repeating unit derived from the compound represented by the formula (I) (hereinafter, also referred to as repeating unit i1-1) as a resin. Is also preferable.
  • resin i a resin i
  • the content of the repeating unit i1-1 in all repeating units of the resin i is preferably 5 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more, still more preferably 15 mol% or more.
  • Xi 1 represents O or NH, and is preferably O.
  • Ri 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • Li 1 represents a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include a hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group, —NH—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —S— and these. And a group formed by combining two or more of the above. Examples of the hydrocarbon group include an alkyl group and an aryl group.
  • the heterocyclic group may be a non-aromatic heterocyclic group or an aromatic heterocyclic group.
  • the heterocyclic group is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
  • Examples of the kind of hetero atom that constitutes the heterocyclic group include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom.
  • the number of heteroatoms constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3.
  • the heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring.
  • the hydrocarbon group and the heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a hydroxy group, a halogen atom and the like.
  • Ri 10 represents a substituent.
  • Examples of the substituent represented by Ri 10 include the following substituent Ti, which is preferably a hydrocarbon group, and more preferably an alkyl group which may have an aryl group as a substituent.
  • m represents an integer of 0 to 2, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
  • p represents an integer of 0 or more, preferably 0 to 4, more preferably 0 to 3, still more preferably 0 to 2, even more preferably 0 or 1, and particularly preferably 1.
  • substituent Ti examples include a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group, —ORti 1 , —CORti 1 , —COORti 1 , —OCORti 1 , —NRti 1 Rti 2 , —NHCORti 1 , — CONRti 1 Rti 2 , —NHCONRti 1 Rti 2 , —NHCOORti 1 , —SRti 1 , —SO 2 Rti 1 , —SO 2 ORti 1 , —NHSO 2 Rti 1 or —SO 2 NRti 1 Rti 2 may be mentioned.
  • Rti 1 and Rti 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a hydrocarbon group or a heterocyclic group.
  • Rti 1 and Rti 2 may combine to form a ring.
  • Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom.
  • Examples of the hydrocarbon group include an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group and an aryl group.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and further preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, and more preferably branched.
  • the alkenyl group preferably has 2 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably has 2 to 12 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably has 2 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • the alkenyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched.
  • the alkynyl group preferably has 2 to 30 carbon atoms, and more preferably has 2 to 25 carbon atoms.
  • the alkynyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and further preferably has 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring.
  • the heterocyclic group is preferably a single ring or a condensed ring having 2 to 4 condensed rings.
  • the number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3.
  • the hetero atom forming the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably 3 to 30, more preferably 3 to 18, and even more preferably 3 to 12.
  • the hydrocarbon group and the heterocyclic group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include the substituents described for the above-mentioned substituent Ti.
  • the compound represented by the formula (I) is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (I-1).
  • Ri 1 represents O or NH, and is preferably O.
  • Ri 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • Ri 2 , Ri 3 and Ri 11 each independently represent a hydrocarbon group.
  • the hydrocarbon group represented by Ri 2 and Ri 3 is preferably an alkylene group or an arylene group, and more preferably an alkylene group.
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 2 or 3 carbon atoms.
  • the hydrocarbon group represented by Ri 11 is preferably an alkyl group which may have an aryl group as a substituent, and more preferably an alkyl group having an aryl group as a substituent.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and further preferably has 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • the carbon number of the alkyl group means the carbon number of the alkyl moiety.
  • Ri 12 represents a substituent. Examples of the substituent represented by Ri 12 include the above-described substituent Ti.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 15, preferably an integer of 0 to 5, more preferably an integer of 0 to 4, and even more preferably an integer of 0 to 3.
  • m represents an integer of 0 to 2, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
  • p1 represents an integer of 0 or more, preferably 0 to 4, more preferably 0 to 3, further preferably 0 to 2, further preferably 0 to 1, and particularly preferably 0.
  • q1 represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably 1 to 4, more preferably 1 to 3, further preferably 1 to 2, and particularly preferably 1.
  • the compound represented by the formula (I) is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (III).
  • Ri 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • Ri 21 and Ri 22 each independently represent an alkylene group
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 15.
  • the alkylene group represented by Ri 21 and Ri 22 preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 2 or 3 carbon atoms.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 15, preferably an integer of 0 to 5, more preferably an integer of 0 to 4, and further preferably an integer of 0 to 3.
  • Examples of the compound represented by the formula (I) include ethylene oxide- or propylene oxide-modified (meth) acrylate of paracumylphenol.
  • Examples of commercially available products include Aronix M-110 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.).
  • the resin i preferably further contains a repeating unit derived from an alkyl (meth) acrylate (hereinafter, also referred to as a repeating unit i1-2).
  • a repeating unit i1-2 derived from an alkyl (meth) acrylate
  • the alkyl moiety of the alkyl (meth) acrylate preferably has 3 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 3 to 8 carbon atoms, and further preferably 3 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • alkyl (meth) acrylate examples include n-butyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, etc., and n-butyl (meth) acrylate is preferable because it is easy to obtain more excellent solvent solubility.
  • Butyl (meth) acrylate is preferred.
  • the content of the repeating unit i1-2 in all the repeating units of the resin i is preferably 5 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more, further preferably 15 mol% or more.
  • the resin i preferably further contains a repeating unit having an acid group. According to this aspect, the effect of improving the developability can be obtained.
  • the content of the repeating unit having an acid group in all the repeating units of the resin i is preferably 5 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more, still more preferably 15 mol% or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 60 mol% or less, and more preferably 50 mol% or less.
  • the resin i preferably further contains a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group.
  • the repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group include a repeating unit represented by the formula (A-1-1) described later.
  • the content of the repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group in all repeating units of the resin i is preferably 5 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more, and 15 mol% or more. Is more preferable.
  • the upper limit is preferably 50 mol% or less, and more preferably 40 mol% or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a resin as a dispersant.
  • the dispersant include an acidic dispersant (acidic resin) and a basic dispersant (basic resin).
  • the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of acid groups is larger than the amount of basic groups.
  • the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a resin in which the amount of acid groups accounts for 70 mol% or more, when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is 100 mol%, A resin consisting only of acid groups is more preferable.
  • the acid group contained in the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a carboxyl group.
  • the acid value of the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably 10 to 105 mgKOH / g.
  • the basic dispersant (basic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of basic groups is larger than the amount of acid groups.
  • the basic dispersant (basic resin) is preferably a resin in which the amount of basic groups exceeds 50 mol% when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is 100 mol%.
  • the basic group contained in the basic dispersant is preferably an amino group.
  • the resin used as the dispersant preferably contains a repeating unit having an acid group.
  • the resin used as the dispersant contains a repeating unit having an acid group, generation of a development residue can be further suppressed when forming a pattern by the photolithography method.
  • the resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a graft resin. Details of the graft resin can be referred to the descriptions in paragraphs 0025 to 0094 of JP-A-2012-255128, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the resin used as the dispersant is a polyimine dispersant containing a nitrogen atom in at least one of the main chain and the side chain.
  • the polyimine-based dispersant has a main chain having a partial structure having a functional group of pKa14 or less and a side chain having 40 to 10,000 atoms, and at least one of the main chain and the side chain has a basic nitrogen atom.
  • the resin having is preferable.
  • the basic nitrogen atom is not particularly limited as long as it is a basic nitrogen atom.
  • the description in paragraph numbers 0102 to 0166 of JP 2012-255128 A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the resin used as the dispersant has a structure in which a plurality of polymer chains are bonded to the core part.
  • resins include dendrimers (including star polymers).
  • specific examples of the dendrimer include polymer compounds C-1 to C-31 described in paragraph numbers 0196 to 0209 of JP-A-2013-043962.
  • the resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group in its side chain.
  • the content of the repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group in its side chain is preferably 10 mol% or more, more preferably 10 to 80 mol%, and more preferably 20 to 70 mol, based on all repeating units of the resin. % Is more preferable.
  • the dispersant is also available as a commercially available product, and specific examples thereof include Disperbyk series manufactured by Big Chemie (for example, Disperbyk-111, 2001) and Sols Perth series manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd. ( For example, Sols Perth 20000, 76500, etc.), Ajinomoto Fine Techno Co., Ltd. Azisper series, etc. are mentioned.
  • Disperbyk series manufactured by Big Chemie for example, Disperbyk-111, 2001
  • Sols Perth series manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd. For example, Sols Perth 20000, 76500, etc.
  • Azisper series, etc. are mentioned.
  • the product described in paragraph No. 0129 of JP2012-137564A and the product described in paragraph No. 0235 of JP2017-194662A can be used as a dispersant.
  • the resin used in the present invention preferably contains a resin having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group (hereinafter, also referred to as a polymerizable resin). According to this aspect, it is possible to more effectively suppress the film shrinkage over time.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 4.0 mmol / g or less, further preferably 3.0 mmol / g or less, even more preferably 2.0 mmol / g or less, and 1.0 mmol / g or less. It is particularly preferable that The lower limit is preferably 0.1 mmol / g or more, more preferably 0.2 mmol / g or more.
  • HPLC high performance liquid chromatography
  • the polymerizable resin preferably contains a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group in its side chain, and more preferably contains a repeating unit represented by the following formula (A-1-1). Further, in the polymerizable resin, the repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group is preferably contained in an amount of 10 mol% or more, more preferably 10 to 80 mol%, based on the total repeating units of the polymerizable resin, 20 It is more preferable that the content is up to 70 mol%.
  • X 1 represents a main chain of a repeating unit
  • L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • Y 1 represents an ethylenically unsaturated bond group.
  • the main chain of the repeating unit represented by X 1 is not particularly limited. There is no particular limitation as long as it is a linking group formed of a known polymerizable monomer.
  • the poly (meth) acrylic linking group and the polyalkyleneimine linking group are preferable, and the poly (meth) acrylic linking group is more preferable, from the viewpoints of availability and production suitability of the raw material.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L 1 is an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an alkyleneoxy group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms).
  • An oxy group an oxyalkylene carbonyl group (preferably an oxyalkylene carbonyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), —NH—, —SO—, —SO 2 — , —CO—, —O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —S— and groups formed by combining two or more of these.
  • the alkylene group, the alkylene group in the alkyleneoxy group, and the alkylene group in the oxyalkylenecarbonyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and are preferably linear or branched. Further, the alkylene group, the alkylene group in the alkyleneoxy group, and the alkylene group in the oxyalkylenecarbonyl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and an alkoxy group, and a hydroxy group is preferable from the viewpoint of production suitability.
  • examples of the ethylenically unsaturated bond group represented by Y 1 include a vinyl group, an allyl group, a methallyl group, a (meth) acryloyl group and a styrene group, and a (meth) acryloyl group, A styrene group is preferable, a (meth) acryloyl group is more preferable, and an acryloyl group is particularly preferable.
  • repeating unit represented by the formula (A-1-1) include repeating units represented by the following formula (A-1-1a) and repeating units represented by the following formula (A-1-1b). Units are included.
  • R a1 to R a3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group
  • Q 1a represents —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —CONH— or phenylene.
  • L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • Y 1 represents an ethylenically unsaturated bond group.
  • the alkyl group represented by R a1 to R a3 preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 3, and still more preferably 1.
  • Q 1a is preferably —COO— or —CONH—, and more preferably —COO—.
  • R a10 and R a11 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group
  • m1 represents an integer of 1 to 5
  • L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linkage.
  • Y 1 represents an ethylenically unsaturated bond group.
  • the alkyl group represented by R a10 and R a11 preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the polymerizable resin preferably further contains a repeating unit having a graft chain.
  • the polymerizable resin contains a repeating unit having a graft chain, it is possible to more effectively suppress aggregation of the compound (1) or the compound (2) due to steric hindrance due to the graft chain.
  • the polymerizable resin may be polymerized in the vicinity of the compound (1) or the compound (2) to firmly hold the compound (1) or the compound (2) in the film, It is also possible to more effectively suppress thermal diffusion of these compounds due to heating and form a cured film having excellent heat resistance.
  • the polymerizable resin preferably contains a repeating unit having a graft chain in an amount of 1.0 to 60 mol%, more preferably 1.5 to 50 mol%, based on all repeating units of the polymerizable resin.
  • a polymerizable resin containing a repeating unit having a graft chain is preferably used as a dispersant.
  • the graft chain means a polymer chain branched and extended from the main chain of the repeating unit.
  • the length of the graft chain is not particularly limited, but the longer the graft chain, the higher the steric repulsion effect, and the higher the dispersibility of the compound (1) or the compound (2).
  • the graft chain preferably has 40 to 10000 atoms excluding hydrogen atoms, more preferably 50 to 2000 atoms excluding hydrogen atoms, and has 60 to 60 atoms excluding hydrogen atoms. It is more preferably 500.
  • the graft chain preferably contains a repeating unit having at least one structure selected from polyester repeating units, polyether repeating units, poly (meth) acrylic repeating units, polyurethane repeating units, polyurea repeating units and polyamide repeating units. It is more preferable to include a repeating unit having at least one structure selected from a repeating unit, a polyether repeating unit and a poly (meth) acrylic repeating unit, and it is further preferable to include a polyester repeating unit.
  • the polyester repeating unit include a repeating unit having a structure represented by the following formula (G-1), formula (G-4) or formula (G-5).
  • examples of the polyether repeating unit include a repeating unit having a structure represented by the following formula (G-2).
  • Examples of the poly (meth) acrylic repeating unit include a repeating unit having a structure represented by the following formula (G-3).
  • R G1 and R G2 each represent an alkylene group.
  • the alkylene group represented by R G1 and R G2 is not particularly limited, but a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, and a linear or branched alkylene group having 2 to 16 carbon atoms. A group is more preferable, and a linear or branched alkylene group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms is further preferable.
  • R G3 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • Q G1 represents —O— or —NH—
  • L G1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group includes an alkylene group (preferably having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an alkyleneoxy group (preferably having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an oxyalkylenecarbonyl group (preferably having 1 carbon atom).
  • arylene groups preferably arylene groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms
  • —, —S— and groups formed by combining two or more of these.
  • R G4 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • substituents include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group and a heteroarylthioether group.
  • the terminal structure of the graft chain is not particularly limited. It may be a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • substituents include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group and a heteroarylthioether group.
  • a group having a steric repulsion effect is preferable, and an alkyl group or an alkoxy group having 5 to 24 carbon atoms is preferable, from the viewpoint of improving dispersibility of the pigment and the like.
  • the alkyl group and the alkoxy group may be linear, branched or cyclic, with linear or branched being preferred.
  • the graft chain has a structure represented by the following formula (G-1a), formula (G-2a), formula (G-3a), formula (G-4a) or formula (G-5a). Preferably there is.
  • R G1 and R G2 each represent an alkylene group
  • R G3 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • Q G1 represents —O— or —NH—
  • L G1 represents a single bond or It represents a divalent linking group
  • R G4 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • W 100 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • n1 to n5 each independently represent an integer of 2 or more.
  • Q G1 , L G1 , Formula (G1) ⁇ (G-5 ) has the same meaning as R G1 ⁇ R G4, Q G1 , L G1 described in, the preferred range is also the same is there.
  • W 100 is preferably a substituent.
  • the substituent include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group and a heteroarylthioether group.
  • a group having a steric repulsion effect is preferable, and an alkyl group or an alkoxy group having 5 to 24 carbon atoms is preferable, from the viewpoint of improving dispersibility of the pigment and the like.
  • the alkyl group and the alkoxy group may be linear, branched or cyclic, with linear or branched being preferred.
  • n1 to n5 are each preferably an integer of 2 to 100, more preferably an integer of 2 to 80, even more preferably an integer of 8 to 60.
  • R G1s in each repeating unit when n1 is 2 or more may be the same or different.
  • the arrangement of each repeating unit is not particularly limited, and may be random, alternating, or block. The same applies to the formulas (G-2a) to (G-5a).
  • repeating unit having a graft chain examples include a repeating unit represented by the following formula (A-1-2).
  • X 2 represents a main chain of a repeating unit
  • L 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • W 1 represents a graft chain.
  • Examples of the main chain of the repeating unit represented by X 2 in formula (A-1-2) include the structures described for X 1 in formula (A-1-1), and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L 2 in formula (A-1-2) includes an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms) and an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms). , —NH—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —O—, —COO—, OCO—, —S— and groups formed by combining two or more of these.
  • Examples of the graft chain represented by W 1 in the formula (A-1-2) include the above-mentioned graft chains.
  • repeating unit represented by the formula (A-1-2) include repeating units represented by the following formula (A-1-2a) and repeating units represented by the following formula (A-1-2b). Units are included.
  • R b1 to R b3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group
  • Q b1 represents —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —CONH— or phenylene.
  • L 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • W 1 represents a graft chain.
  • the alkyl group represented by R b1 to R b3 preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1.
  • Q b1 is preferably —COO— or —CONH—, and more preferably —COO—.
  • R b10 and R b11 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group
  • m2 represents an integer of 1 to 5
  • L 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linkage.
  • W 1 represents a graft chain.
  • the alkyl group represented by R b10 and R b11 preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the repeating unit having a graft chain has a weight average molecular weight (Mw) of preferably 1000 or more, more preferably 1000 to 10000, and more preferably 1000 to 7500. Is more preferable.
  • Mw weight average molecular weight
  • the weight average molecular weight of the repeating unit having a graft chain is a value calculated from the weight average molecular weight of the raw material monomer used for the polymerization of the repeating unit.
  • the repeating unit having a graft chain can be formed by polymerizing a macromonomer.
  • the macromonomer means a polymer compound having a polymerizable group introduced at the polymer end.
  • the polymerizable resin preferably further contains a repeating unit having an acid group.
  • the polymerizable resin further contains a repeating unit having an acid group, the dispersibility of the compound (1) or the compound (2) can be further improved. Furthermore, the developability can be improved.
  • the acid group include a carboxyl group, a sulfo group and a phosphoric acid group.
  • repeating unit having an acid group examples include a repeating unit represented by the following formula (A-1-3).
  • X 3 represents a main chain of a repeating unit
  • L 3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • a 1 represents an acid group.
  • the main chain of the repeating unit represented by X 3 in formula (A-1-3) includes the structure described for X 1 in formula (A-1-1), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L 3 in formula (A-1-3) includes an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms) and an alkenylene group (preferably an alkenylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms).
  • An alkyleneoxy group (preferably an alkyleneoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an oxyalkylenecarbonyl group (preferably an oxyalkylenecarbonyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms) ), —NH—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —O—, —COO—, OCO—, —S— and groups formed by combining two or more of these.
  • the alkylene group, the alkylene group in the alkyleneoxy group, and the alkylene group in the oxyalkylenecarbonyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and are preferably linear or branched.
  • alkylene group, the alkylene group in the alkyleneoxy group, and the alkylene group in the oxyalkylenecarbonyl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted.
  • a hydroxy group etc. are mentioned as a substituent.
  • Examples of the acid group represented by A 1 in the formula (A-1-3) include a carboxyl group, a sulfo group and a phosphoric acid group.
  • repeating unit represented by the formula (A-1-3) include a repeating unit represented by the following formula (A-1-3a) and a repeating unit represented by the following formula (A-1-3b). Units are included.
  • R c1 to R c3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group
  • Q c1 is —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —CONH— or phenylene.
  • L 3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • a 1 represents an acid group.
  • the alkyl group represented by R c1 to R c3 preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and further preferably 1 carbon atoms.
  • Q c1 is preferably —COO— or —CONH—, and more preferably —COO—.
  • R c10 and R c11 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group
  • m3 represents an integer of 1 to 5
  • L 3 represents a single bond or a divalent linkage.
  • a 1 represents an acid group.
  • the alkyl group represented by R c10 and R c11 preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the content of the repeating unit having an acid group is preferably 80 mol% or less in all repeating units of the polymerizable resin, and 10 to 80 mol% is preferable. More preferable.
  • the acid value of the polymerizable resin is preferably 20 to 150 mgKOH / g.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 100 mgKOH / g or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 30 mgKOH / g or more, and more preferably 35 mgKOH / g or more.
  • the polymerizable resin is also preferably a resin containing a repeating unit represented by the formula (b-10).
  • Ar 10 represents a group containing an aromatic carboxyl group
  • L 11 represents —COO— or —CONH—
  • L 12 represents a trivalent linking group
  • P 10 represents ( It represents a polymer chain having a (meth) acryloyl group.
  • Examples of the group containing an aromatic carboxyl group represented by Ar 10 in the formula (b-10) include a structure derived from an aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride and a structure derived from an aromatic tetracarboxylic acid anhydride.
  • Examples of aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydrides and aromatic tetracarboxylic acid anhydrides include compounds having the following structures.
  • Q 1 represents a single bond, —O—, —CO—, —COOCH 2 CH 2 OCO—, —SO 2 —, —C (CF 3 ) 2 —, or a formula (Q-1) shown below. Or a group represented by the following formula (Q-2).
  • aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride examples include benzenetricarboxylic acid anhydride (1,2,3-benzenetricarboxylic acid anhydride, trimellitic acid anhydride [1,2,4-benzenetricarboxylic acid anhydride], etc.) , Naphthalene tricarboxylic acid anhydride (1,2,4-naphthalene tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 1,4,5-naphthalene tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 2,3,6-naphthalene tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 1,2,8-naphthalene Tricarboxylic acid anhydride, etc.), 3,4,4'-benzophenone tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 3,4,4'-biphenyl ether tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 3,4,4'-biphenyl tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 2,3 , 2'-biphenyl tricarboxylic acid an
  • aromatic tetracarboxylic acid anhydrides include pyromellitic dianhydride, ethylene glycol ditrimellitic anhydride ester, propylene glycol ditrimellitic anhydride ester, butylene glycol ditrimellitic anhydride ester, and 3,3.
  • group containing an aromatic carboxyl group represented by Ar 10 include a group represented by the formula (Ar-1), a group represented by the formula (Ar-2), and a group represented by the formula (Ar-3). Group.
  • n1 represents an integer of 1 to 4, preferably an integer of 1 to 2, and more preferably 2.
  • n2 represents an integer of 1 to 8, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, more preferably 1 to 2, and even more preferably 2.
  • n3 and n4 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 1 to 2, and most preferably 1. More preferable. However, at least one of n3 and n4 is an integer of 1 or more.
  • Q 1 represents a single bond, —O—, —CO—, —COOCH 2 CH 2 OCO—, —SO 2 —, —C (CF 3 ) 2 —, or the above formula (Q— It represents a group represented by 1) or a group represented by the above formula (Q-2).
  • L 11 represents —COO— or —CONH—, and preferably —COO—.
  • Examples of the trivalent linking group represented by L 12 in the formula (b-10) include a hydrocarbon group, —O—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —NH—, —S— and 2 of these. Examples thereof include groups in which two or more species are combined.
  • Examples of the hydrocarbon group include an aliphatic hydrocarbon group and an aromatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and further preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and further preferably has 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the hydrocarbon group may have a substituent.
  • a hydroxy group etc. are mentioned as a substituent.
  • the trivalent linking group represented by L 12 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (L12-1), and more preferably a group represented by the formula (L12-2).
  • L 12a and L 12b each represent a trivalent linking group
  • X 1 represents S
  • * 1 represents a bonding position with L 11 in formula (b-10)
  • * 2 represents formula (b-10). Represents the bonding position with P 10 .
  • the trivalent linking group represented by L 12a and L 12b is selected from a hydrocarbon group; a hydrocarbon group and —O—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —NH— and —S—. Examples thereof include groups in which at least one type is combined.
  • P 10 represents a polymer chain having a (meth) acryloyl group.
  • the polymer chain represented by P 10 preferably has at least one repeating unit selected from poly (meth) acrylic repeating units, polyether repeating units, polyester repeating units and polyol repeating units.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the polymer chain P 10 is preferably 500 to 20,000.
  • the lower limit is preferably 600 or more, more preferably 1000 or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 10,000 or less, more preferably 5000 or less, still more preferably 3000 or less.
  • This resin is preferably used as a dispersant.
  • the polymer chain represented by P 10 is preferably a polymer chain containing repeating units represented by the following formulas (P-1) to (P-5), and (P-5) A polymer chain containing a repeating unit represented by is more preferable.
  • R P1 and R P2 each represent an alkylene group.
  • the alkylene group represented by R P1 and R P2 a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, and a linear or branched alkylene group having 2 to 16 carbon atoms is more preferable. Further, a linear or branched alkylene group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable.
  • R P3 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • L P1 represents a single bond or an arylene group
  • L P2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • L P1 is preferably a single bond.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L P2 includes an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), —NH—, —SO—, Examples include —SO 2 —, —CO—, —O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —S—, —NHCO—, —CONH—, and groups formed by combining two or more of these.
  • R P4 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • substituent a hydroxy group, a carboxyl group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group, a heteroarylthioether group, (meth) acryloyl Groups and the like.
  • the polymer chain represented by P 10 is more preferably a polymer chain having a repeating unit containing a (meth) acryloyl group in its side chain.
  • the proportion of repeating units containing a (meth) acryloyl group in the side chain in all repeating units constituting P 10 is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more, It is more preferably 20% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit may be 100% by mass, preferably 90% by mass or less, and more preferably 60% by mass or less.
  • the polymer chain represented by P 10 also preferably has a repeating unit containing an acid group.
  • the acid group include a carboxyl group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfo group and a phenolic hydroxy group.
  • the dispersibility of the pigment in the composition can be further improved.
  • the developability can be further improved.
  • the proportion of the repeating unit containing an acid group is preferably 1 to 30% by mass, more preferably 2 to 20% by mass, and further preferably 3 to 10% by mass.
  • the resin containing a repeating unit represented by the formula (b-10) is obtained by reacting at least one acid anhydride selected from aromatic tetracarboxylic acid anhydrides and aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydrides with a hydroxy group-containing compound.
  • a hydroxy group-containing compound can be manufactured.
  • the aromatic tetracarboxylic acid anhydride and aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride include those mentioned above.
  • the hydroxy group-containing compound is not particularly limited as long as it has a hydroxy group in the molecule, but is preferably a polyol having two or more hydroxy groups in the molecule. It is also preferable to use a compound having two hydroxy groups and one thiol group in the molecule as the hydroxy group-containing compound.
  • Examples of the compound having two hydroxy groups and one thiol group in the molecule include 1-mercapto-1,1-methanediol, 1-mercapto-1,1-ethanediol, 3-mercapto-1,2- Propanediol (thioglycerin), 2-mercapto-1,2-propanediol, 2-mercapto-2-methyl-1,3-propanediol, 2-mercapto-2-ethyl-1,3-propanediol, 1- Examples thereof include mercapto-2,2-propanediol, 2-mercaptoethyl-2-methyl-1,3-propanediol, 2-mercaptoethyl-2-ethyl-1,3-propanediol and the like.
  • Examples of other hydroxy group-containing compounds include the compounds described in JP-A-2018-101039, paragraphs 0084 to 0095, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the molar ratio of the acid anhydride group in the acid anhydride to the hydroxy group in the hydroxy group-containing compound is preferably 0.5 to 1.5.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the resin containing the repeating unit represented by the formula (b-10) is preferably 2000 to 35,000.
  • the upper limit is preferably 25,000 or less, more preferably 20,000 or less, and further preferably 15,000 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 4000 or more, more preferably 6000 or more, and further preferably 7000 or more.
  • the acid value of the resin containing the repeating unit represented by the formula (b-10) is preferably 5 to 200 mgKOH / g.
  • the upper limit is preferably 150 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 100 mgKOH / g or less, and further preferably 80 mgKOH / g or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 10 mgKOH / g or more, more preferably 15 mgKOH / g or more, and further preferably 20 mgKOH / g or more.
  • Rp 4 has a number average molecular weight of 400 to 30000, represents a polyether residue and / or a polyester residue having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group, and y represents a number of 1 to 2.
  • the number average molecular weight of Rp 4 is more preferably 400 to 10000, further preferably 400 to 3000.
  • the dispersibility of the pigment is good, and such a resin is preferably used as a dispersant.
  • Examples of the polyether residue and / or polyester residue having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group represented by Rp 4 include a polyether residue having a styrene group, a (meth) acryloyl group, a cyanoacryloyl group, a vinyl ether group and / or the like. Examples include polyester residues.
  • Rp 4 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (Rp-1). -Rp 12 -O-Rp 13 - ( O-Rp 14) S
  • Rp 12 represents an alkylene group
  • Rp 13 represents a trivalent or higher polyhydric alcohol residue
  • Rp 14 represents a (meth) acryloyl group or a cyanoacryloyl group
  • s represents 2 or more.
  • Rp 12 is preferably an alkylene group having 8 or less carbon atoms. Further, s is preferably 2 or more from the viewpoint of pigment dispersibility. In this case, Rp 14 may use different groups from each other. s is more preferably 2 to 5, and particularly preferably 2.
  • Examples of the trihydric or higher polyhydric alcohol used for Rp 13 include glycerin, propyl alcohol, pentaerythritol, and dipentaerythritol. Particularly, trivalent to hexavalent ones are preferable.
  • the content of the resin in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 25 to 60% by mass.
  • the upper limit is preferably 55% by mass or less, and more preferably 50% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 30% by mass or more, and more preferably 35% by mass or more.
  • the content of the resin having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group in the total amount of the resin contained in the coloring composition of the present invention is preferably 50 to 100% by mass, and 60 to 100% by mass. Is more preferable, and 70 to 100% by mass is further preferable.
  • the mass ratio of the resin having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group and the resin having no ethylenically unsaturated bond group is a resin having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group: a resin having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group.
  • No resin 1: 0.001 to 0.800 is preferable, 1: 0.002 to 0.700 is more preferable, and 1: 0.003 to 0.600 is further preferable.
  • the colored composition of the present invention contains a polymerizable monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group (hereinafter referred to as a polymerizable monomer).
  • a polymerizable monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group
  • examples of the ethylenically unsaturated bond group include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group and a (meth) acryloyl group.
  • the polymerizable monomer is preferably a compound that can be polymerized by radicals (radical polymerizable monomer).
  • the polymerizable monomer is preferably a compound containing three or more ethylenically unsaturated bond groups.
  • the upper limit of the ethylenically unsaturated bond group is preferably 15 or less, more preferably 10 or less, and further preferably 6 or less.
  • the polymerizable monomer is preferably a tri- or higher functional (meth) acrylate compound, more preferably a 3- to 15-functional (meth) acrylate compound, and a 3- to 10-functional (meth) acrylate compound. It is more preferable that the (meth) acrylate compound having a functionality of 3 to 6 is used.
  • the molecular weight of the polymerizable monomer is preferably 100 to 2000.
  • the upper limit is preferably 1500 or less, more preferably 1000 or less, further preferably 450 or less, and particularly preferably 400 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 150 or more.
  • the lower limit is preferably 3 mmol / g or more, more preferably 4 mmol / g or more, and further preferably 5 mmol / g or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 12 mmol / g or less, more preferably 10 mmol / g or less, and further preferably 8 mmol / g or less.
  • the polymerizable monomer used in the present invention is also preferably a compound having 3 or more ethylenically unsaturated bond groups and having a molecular weight of 450 or less, and a compound having 3 ethylenically unsaturated bond groups and having a molecular weight of 450 or less. Is more preferable, and a trifunctional (meth) acrylate compound having a molecular weight of 450 or less is further preferable. According to this aspect, the solvent resistance of the obtained film can be further improved. Although the detailed reason why such an effect is obtained is not clear, it is presumed that it is because a highly dense network structure could be formed by exposure. Examples of the polymerizable monomer having three ethylenically unsaturated bond groups and having a molecular weight of 450 or less include trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate.
  • the polymerizable monomer used in the present invention is also preferably a compound having an isocyanurate skeleton.
  • Specific examples of the polymerizable monomer having an isocyanurate skeleton include tris (2-acryloyloxyethyl) isocyanurate and ⁇ -caprolactone-modified tris- (2-acryloxyethyl) isocyanurate.
  • Commercially available products include Fancryl FA-731A (manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.), NK ester A9300, A9300-1CL, A9300-3CL (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), Aronix M-315 (Toagosei Co., Ltd.). ) And the like.
  • dipentaerythritol triacrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D-330; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D-320; Japanized) Yakuhin Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D-310; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (commercially available KAYARAD DPHA; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., NK Ester A-DPH-12E; Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., and these (meth) acryloyl groups bound to each other via ethylene glycol and / or propylene glycol residues.
  • a compound with a structure such as a sartomer Commercially available from, may SR454, SR499) be used. It is also preferable to use Aronix M-402 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd., a mixture of dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate and dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate) as the polymerizable monomer.
  • a polymerizable monomer having an acid group As the polymerizable monomer, it is also preferable to use a polymerizable monomer having an acid group as the polymerizable monomer.
  • the polymerizable monomer having an acid group By using the polymerizable monomer having an acid group, the coloring composition layer in the unexposed area can be easily removed during development, and the development residue can be suppressed.
  • the acid group include a carboxyl group, a sulfo group and a phosphoric acid group, and a carboxyl group is preferable.
  • the polymerizable monomer having an acid group include succinic acid-modified dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate.
  • Examples of commercially available polymerizable monomers having an acid group include Aronix M-510, M-520, Aronix TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • the acid value of the polymerizable monomer having an acid group is preferably 0.1 to 40 mgKOH / g, more preferably 5 to 30 mgKOH / g.
  • the solubility in the developing solution is good, and when it is 40 mgKOH / g or less, it is advantageous in production and handling.
  • a compound having a caprolactone structure is also preferable to use as the polymerizable monomer.
  • the polymerizable monomer having a caprolactone structure is commercially available from Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. as KAYARAD DPCA series, and examples thereof include DPCA-20, DPCA-30, DPCA-60, and DPCA-120.
  • the polymerizable monomer is a compound described in JP-A-2017-048367, JP-A-6057891, JP-A-6031807, a compound described in JP-A-2017-194662, 8UH-1006, 8UH. It is also preferable to use -1012 (all manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemicals Co., Ltd.) and light acrylate POB-A0 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • the polymerizable monomer used in the present invention contains at least one selected from succinic acid-modified dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate and dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate. preferable. According to this aspect, more excellent photolithographic property can be easily obtained.
  • the content of the polymerizable monomer in the total solid content of the coloring composition is 0.1 to 6.0% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1.0% by mass or more, and further preferably 1.5% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 5.5% by mass or less, more preferably 5.0% by mass or less, and further preferably 4.5% by mass or less.
  • the total content of the resin and the polymerizable monomer in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 25.5 to 65.5 mass%.
  • the upper limit is preferably 60.0 mass% or less, more preferably 54.5 mass% or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 31.0 mass% or more, and more preferably 36.5 mass% or more.
  • the total content of the photopolymerization initiator and the polymerizable monomer in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1.4 to 12.5% by mass.
  • the upper limit is preferably 11.0% by mass or less, and more preferably 9.5% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2.2% by mass or more, and more preferably 3.0% by mass or more.
  • the ratio (M 1 / B 1 ) of the mass M 1 of the polymerizable monomer contained in the coloring composition to the mass B 1 of the resin contained in the coloring composition is 0.03 to 0.15.
  • the lower limit of the ratio value is preferably 0.035 or more, more preferably 0.040 or more, and further preferably 0.045 or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 0.13 or less, more preferably 0.11 or less, and further preferably 0.9 or less. If the above-mentioned ratio is 0.03 or more, the pattern formability by the photolithography method is good, and if it is 0.15 or less, the generation of residues during the pattern formation by the photolithography method can be suppressed more effectively. .
  • the ratio (M 1 / I 1 ) of the mass M 1 of the polymerizable monomer contained in the coloring composition and the mass I 1 of the photopolymerization initiator contained in the coloring composition is 0.013 to 12,000. Is preferred.
  • the lower limit of the ratio value is preferably 0.071 or more, more preferably 0.167 or more, still more preferably 0.300 or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 6.111 or less, more preferably 4.167 or less, still more preferably 3,000 or less. If the above-mentioned ratio is 0.013 or more, the line width sensitivity is good, and if it is 12.000 or less, the pattern formability by the photolithography method is good.
  • the polymerizable monomer may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Moreover, when two or more polymerizable monomers are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof be within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, compounds having photosensitivity to light rays in the ultraviolet region to the visible region are preferable.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator.
  • the photopolymerization initiator examples include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thiols.
  • halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives for example, compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.
  • acylphosphine compounds examples include hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thiols.
  • examples thereof include compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds and phenylglyoxylate compounds.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is more preferably a compound selected from an oxime compound, an ⁇ -hydroxyketone compound, an ⁇ -aminoketone compound, and an acylphosphine compound, and further preferably an oxime compound.
  • the descriptions in paragraphs 0065 to 0111 and JP 6301489 of JP-A-2014-130173 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • Examples of commercially available ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds include IRGACURE-184, DAROCUR-1173, IRGACURE-500, IRGACURE-2959, and IRGACURE-127 (all manufactured by BASF).
  • Commercially available ⁇ -aminoketone compounds include IRGACURE-907, IRGACURE-369, IRGACURE-379, and IRGACURE-379EG (all manufactured by BASF).
  • Examples of commercially available acylphosphine compounds include IRGACURE-819 and DAROCUR-TPO (above, manufactured by BASF).
  • Examples of the oxime compound include the compounds described in JP 2001-233842 A, the compounds described in JP 2000-080068 A, the compounds described in JP 2006-342166 A, the compounds described in J. C. S. Perkin II (1979, pp. 1653-1660), the compound described in J. C. S. Compounds described in Perkin II (1979, pp.156-162), Compounds described in Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995, pp.202-232), compounds described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No.
  • oxime compound examples include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentan-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3- (4-toluenesulfonyloxy) iminobutan-2-one, and 2-ethoxycarbonyloxy Examples thereof include imino-1-phenylpropan-1-one.
  • IRGACURE-OXE01 IRGACURE-OXE02, IRGACURE-OXE03, IRGACURE-OXE04 (all manufactured by BASF), TR-PBG-304 (manufactured by Changzhou Tengden Electronic New Materials Co., Ltd.), and ADEKA OPTOMER N-1919.
  • Photopolymerization initiator 2 described in JP 2012-014052, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation can be used.
  • the oxime compound it is also preferable to use a compound having no coloring property or a compound having high transparency and being resistant to discoloration. Examples of commercially available products include ADEKA ARKUL'S NCI-730, NCI-831, NCI-930 (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation).
  • an oxime compound having a fluorene ring can be used as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorene ring include the compounds described in JP-A-2014-137466. This content is incorporated herein.
  • an oxime compound having a fluorine atom can be used as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorine atom are described in JP 2010-262028 A, compounds 24, 36 to 40 described in JP-A-2014-500852, and JP 2013-164471 A. Compound (C-3) and the like. These contents are incorporated herein.
  • an oxime compound having a nitro group can be used as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • the oxime compound having a nitro group is also preferably dimerized.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound having a nitro group include compounds described in paragraphs 0031 to 0047 of JP2013-114249A, paragraphs 0008 to 0012 and 0070 to 0079 of JP2014-137466A, The compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0007 to 0025 of Japanese Patent No. 4223071 are ADEKA ARCRUZ NCI-831 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation).
  • an oxime compound having a benzofuran skeleton can be used as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • Specific examples thereof include OE-01 to OE-75 described in WO 2015/036910.
  • a bifunctional or trifunctional or higher functional photoradical polymerization initiator may be used as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • a photo-radical polymerization initiator two or more radicals are generated from one molecule of the photo-radical polymerization initiator, so that good sensitivity can be obtained.
  • the crystallinity is lowered, the solubility in a solvent or the like is improved, it becomes difficult to deposit over time, and the stability over time of the coloring composition can be improved.
  • Specific examples of the bifunctional or trifunctional or more photoradical polymerization initiators include those disclosed in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2010-527339, Japanese Patent Publication No.
  • the photopolymerization initiator 1 having an absorption coefficient at a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol of 1.0 ⁇ 10 4 mL / gcm or more, and the absorption coefficient at a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol of 1. It is also preferable to use together with the photopolymerization initiator 2 having a light absorption coefficient of 0 ⁇ 10 2 mL / gcm or less and a wavelength of 254 nm of 1.0 ⁇ 10 3 mL / gcm or more. According to this aspect, it is easy to sufficiently cure the coloring composition by exposure, and it is easy to obtain more excellent photolithographic property. As the photopolymerization initiator 1 and the photopolymerization initiator 2, it is preferable to select and use a compound having the above extinction coefficient from the above compounds.
  • the light absorption coefficient in the said wavelength of a photoinitiator is the value measured as follows. That is, it was calculated by dissolving the photopolymerization initiator in methanol to prepare a measurement solution and measuring the absorbance of the above-mentioned measurement solution. Specifically, the above-mentioned measurement solution was placed in a glass cell having a width of 1 cm, and the absorbance was measured using a UV-Vis-NIR spectrometer (Cary5000) manufactured by Agilent Technologies, and the absorbance was applied to the following formula to obtain a wavelength of 365 nm and a wavelength. The extinction coefficient (mL / gcm) at 254 nm was calculated. In the above equation, ⁇ is the extinction coefficient (mL / gcm), A is the absorbance, c is the concentration of the photopolymerization initiator (g / mL), and 1 is the optical path length (cm).
  • the extinction coefficient of the photopolymerization initiator 1 in methanol at a wavelength of 365 nm is preferably 1.1 ⁇ 10 4 mL / gcm or more, and 1.2 ⁇ 10 4 to 1.0 ⁇ 10 5 mL / gcm. It is more preferable that it is 1.3 ⁇ 10 4 to 5.0 ⁇ 10 4 mL / gcm, and it is still more preferable that it is 1.5 ⁇ 10 4 to 3.0 ⁇ 10 4 mL / gcm. Particularly preferred.
  • the absorption coefficient of light having a wavelength of 254 nm in the photopolymerization initiator 1 in methanol is preferably 1.0 ⁇ 10 4 to 1.0 ⁇ 10 5 mL / gcm, and 1.5 ⁇ 10 4 to It is more preferably 9.5 ⁇ 10 4 mL / gcm, further preferably 3.0 ⁇ 10 4 to 8.0 ⁇ 10 4 mL / gcm.
  • an oxime compound, an ⁇ -aminoketone compound and an acylphosphine compound are preferable, an oxime compound and an acylphosphine compound are more preferable, an oxime compound is further preferable, an oxime compound containing a fluorine atom and an oxime having a benzofuran skeleton.
  • Compounds are particularly preferred.
  • Specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator 1 include (C-13) and (C-15) shown in the above specific examples of the oxime compound.
  • the absorption coefficient of light having a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol of the photopolymerization initiator 2 is preferably 10 to 1.0 ⁇ 10 2 mL / gcm, and 20 to 1.0 ⁇ 10 2 mL / gcm. Is more preferable. Further, the absorption coefficient of light having a wavelength of 254 nm in methanol of the photopolymerization initiator 2 is preferably 1.0 ⁇ 10 3 to 1.0 ⁇ 10 6 mL / gcm, and 5.0 ⁇ 10 3 to It is more preferably 1.0 ⁇ 10 5 mL / gcm.
  • the photopolymerization initiator 2 is preferably an ⁇ -hydroxyketone compound, an ⁇ -aminoketone compound, an acylphosphine compound or a phenylglyoxylate compound, more preferably an ⁇ -hydroxyketone compound or a phenylglyoxylate compound, and a hydroxyalkylphenone compound. Is more preferable.
  • Specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator 2 include 1-hydroxy-cyclohexyl-phenyl-ketone (commercially available products are, for example, IRGACURE-184, manufactured by BASF), 1- [4- (2-hydroxyethoxy) -phenyl. ] -2-Hydroxy-2-methyl-1-propan-1-one (commercially available products include, for example, IRGACURE-2959, manufactured by BASF).
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.5 to 8.0% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.9% by mass or more, more preferably 1.2% by mass or more, still more preferably 1.5% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 7.0 mass% or less, more preferably 6.0 mass% or less, and further preferably 5.0 mass% or less.
  • the photopolymerization initiator may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more kinds are used, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the colored composition of the present invention can contain a compound having an epoxy group (hereinafter, also referred to as an epoxy compound).
  • the epoxy compound include compounds having one or more epoxy groups in one molecule, and compounds having two or more epoxy groups are preferable.
  • the epoxy compound preferably has 1 to 100 epoxy groups in one molecule.
  • the upper limit of the number of epoxy groups may be, for example, 10 or less, or 5 or less.
  • the lower limit of the number of epoxy groups is preferably 2 or more.
  • Epoxy compounds are described in paragraph numbers 0034 to 0036 of JP2013-011869A, paragraphs 0147 to 0156 of JP2014043556A, and paragraphs 0085 to 0092 of JP2014-0889408A.
  • Compounds, compounds described in JP-A-2017-179172 can also be used. These contents are incorporated herein.
  • the epoxy compound may be a low molecular weight compound (for example, a molecular weight of less than 2,000, further less than 1,000), or a macromolecular compound (for example, a molecular weight of 1,000 or more, and in the case of a polymer, a weight average molecular weight of 1,000 or more). Any of The weight average molecular weight of the epoxy compound is preferably 200 to 100,000, more preferably 500 to 50,000. The upper limit of the weight average molecular weight is preferably 10,000 or less, more preferably 5000 or less, still more preferably 3000 or less.
  • Examples of commercially available epoxy compounds include EHPE3150 (manufactured by Daicel Corporation), EPICLON N-695 (manufactured by DIC Corporation), and the like.
  • the content of the epoxy compound in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass.
  • the lower limit is, for example, preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 1% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is, for example, preferably 15% by mass or less, and more preferably 10% by mass or less.
  • the epoxy compound contained in the coloring composition may be only one kind or two or more kinds. When two or more kinds are used, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a silane coupling agent.
  • the silane coupling agent means a silane compound having a hydrolyzable group and a functional group other than that.
  • the hydrolyzable group means a substituent which is directly bonded to a silicon atom and can form a siloxane bond by at least one of a hydrolysis reaction and a condensation reaction. Examples of the hydrolyzable group include a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group and the like, and an alkoxy group is preferable.
  • the silane coupling agent is preferably a compound having an alkoxysilyl group.
  • functional groups other than hydrolyzable groups include vinyl group, (meth) allyl group, (meth) acryloyl group, mercapto group, epoxy group, oxetanyl group, amino group, ureido group, sulfide group, and isocyanate group.
  • a phenyl group and the like, and an amino group, a (meth) acryloyl group and an epoxy group are preferable.
  • silane coupling agent examples include the compounds described in JP-A 2009-288703, paragraphs 0018 to 0036, and the compounds described in JP-A 2009-242604, paragraphs 0056 to 0066. Are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the content of the silane coupling agent in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass.
  • the upper limit is preferably 3% by mass or less, more preferably 2% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 1% by mass or more.
  • the silane coupling agent may be only one kind or two or more kinds. When two or more kinds are used, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains an organic solvent.
  • the organic solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as the solubility of each component and the coating property of the coloring composition are satisfied.
  • the organic solvent include ester solvents, ketone solvents, alcohol solvents, amide solvents, ether solvents, hydrocarbon solvents and the like. For details of these, reference can be made to paragraph No. 0223 of WO 2015/166779, the content of which is incorporated herein. Further, an ester solvent substituted with a cyclic alkyl group and a ketone solvent substituted with a cyclic alkyl group can also be preferably used.
  • organic solvent examples include polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, dichloromethane, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, and 2 -Heptanone, cyclohexanone, cyclohexyl acetate, cyclopentanone, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxy-N, N-dimethylpropanamide, 3-butoxy-N , N-dimethylpropanamide and the like.
  • aromatic hydrocarbons benzene, toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, etc.
  • organic solvent due to environmental reasons (for example, 50 mass ppm (parts relative to the total amount of the organic solvent). per million) or less, 10 mass ppm or less, or 1 mass ppm or less).
  • an organic solvent having a low metal content it is preferable to use an organic solvent having a low metal content, and the metal content of the organic solvent is preferably, for example, 10 mass ppb (parts per billion) or less. If necessary, an organic solvent having a mass ppt (parts per trilion) level may be used, and such an organic solvent is provided by, for example, Toyo Gosei Co., Ltd. (Chemical Industry Daily, November 13, 2015). Examples of methods for removing impurities such as metals from the organic solvent include distillation (molecular distillation, thin film distillation, etc.) and filtration using a filter.
  • the filter pore size of the filter used for filtration is preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 5 ⁇ m or less, still more preferably 3 ⁇ m or less.
  • the material of the filter is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene or nylon.
  • the content of the organic solvent in the coloring composition is preferably 10 to 95% by mass, more preferably 20 to 90% by mass, and further preferably 30 to 90% by mass.
  • a curing accelerator may be added to the colored composition of the present invention for the purpose of promoting the reaction of the polymerizable compound or lowering the curing temperature.
  • the curing accelerator is a methylol compound (for example, a compound exemplified as a cross-linking agent in paragraph No. 0246 of JP-A-2005-034963), amines, phosphonium salts, amidine salts, amide compounds (above, for example, JP-A- Curing agent described in paragraph No. 0186 of 2013-041165, base generator (for example, ionic compound described in JP-A-2014-055114), cyanate compound (for example, JP-A-2012-150180) Paragraph No.
  • an alkoxysilane compound for example, an alkoxysilane compound having an epoxy group described in JP 2011-253054 A
  • an onium salt compound for example, Paragraph Nos. JP 2005-034963 A.
  • Compounds exemplified as acid generators in 0216 , Compounds described in JP-A-2009-180949) or the like can be used.
  • the content of the curing accelerator is preferably 0.3 to 8.9% by mass based on the total solid content of the coloring composition, and 0.8 to 6.4. Mass% is more preferable.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a polymerization inhibitor.
  • a polymerization inhibitor hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4′-thiobis (3-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine salt (ammonium salt, cerous salt, etc.) can be mentioned. Of these, p-methoxyphenol is preferable.
  • the content of the polymerization inhibitor in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.0001 to 5% by mass.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a surfactant.
  • a surfactant various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicon-based surfactant can be used.
  • paragraph numbers 0238 to 0245 of WO 2015/166779 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
  • the surfactant is preferably a fluorinated surfactant.
  • a fluorinated surfactant By including a fluorine-based surfactant in the coloring composition, liquid characteristics (particularly fluidity) can be further improved, and liquid saving can be further improved. It is also possible to form a film having a small thickness unevenness.
  • the fluorine content in the fluorine-based surfactant is preferably 3 to 40% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7 to 25% by mass.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of the thickness of the coating film and liquid saving, and also has good solubility in the coloring composition.
  • fluorinated surfactant examples include surfactants described in paragraphs 0060 to 0064 of JP-A-04041318 (corresponding paragraphs 0060 to 0064 of WO 2014/017669) and JP-A-2011-2011. Examples thereof include the surfactants described in paragraph Nos. 0117 to 0132 of Japanese Patent No. 132503, the contents of which are incorporated herein. Examples of commercially available fluorine-based surfactants include Megafac F171, F172, F173, F176, F177, F141, F142, F143, F144, R30, F437, F475, F479, F482, F554, F780, EXP, MFS.
  • the fluorine-based surfactant it is also preferable to use a polymer of a fluorine atom-containing vinyl ether compound having a fluorinated alkyl group or a fluorinated alkylene ether group and a hydrophilic vinyl ether compound.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant the description in JP-A-2016-216602 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • a block polymer can also be used as the fluorine-based surfactant.
  • the fluorine-based surfactant has a repeating unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and 2 or more (preferably 5 or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy groups and propyleneoxy groups) (meth).
  • a fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from an acrylate compound can also be preferably used.
  • the following compounds are also exemplified as the fluorine-based surfactant used in the present invention.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the above compound is preferably 3,000 to 50,000, for example, 14,000. In the above compounds,% indicating the ratio of repeating units is mol%.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant a fluorine-containing polymer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group in its side chain can be used.
  • the compounds described in JP-A-2010-164965, paragraph numbers 0050 to 0090 and paragraph numbers 0289 to 0295 such as Megafac RS-101, RS-102, and RS-718K manufactured by DIC Corporation. , RS-72-K and the like.
  • the fluorine-based surfactant the compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0015 to 0158 of JP-A-2005-117327 can be used.
  • the content of the surfactant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005% by mass to 3.0% by mass.
  • the surfactant may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more kinds are used, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain an ultraviolet absorber.
  • an ultraviolet absorber a conjugated diene compound, an aminodiene compound, a salicylate compound, a benzophenone compound, a benzotriazole compound, an acrylonitrile compound, a hydroxyphenyltriazine compound, an indole compound, a triazine compound or the like can be used.
  • a conjugated diene compound an aminodiene compound, a salicylate compound, a benzophenone compound, a benzotriazole compound, an acrylonitrile compound, a hydroxyphenyltriazine compound, an indole compound, a triazine compound or the like
  • paragraphs 0052 to 0072 of JP2012-208374A paragraphs 0317 to 0334 of JP2013-068814A
  • paragraphs 0061 to 0080 of JP2016-162946A Reference may be made to these contents, which are incorporated herein.
  • Examples of commercially available ultraviolet absorbers include UV-503 (manufactured by Daito Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • examples of the benzotriazole compound include MYUA series manufactured by Miyoshi Oil & Fats (Chemical Industry Daily, February 1, 2016).
  • the ultraviolet absorber compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0049 to 0059 of Japanese Patent No. 6268967 can also be used.
  • the content of the ultraviolet absorber in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass.
  • the ultraviolet absorber may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more kinds are used, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain an antioxidant.
  • antioxidants include phenol compounds, phosphite ester compounds, and thioether compounds.
  • the phenol compound any phenol compound known as a phenolic antioxidant can be used.
  • Preferable phenol compounds include hindered phenol compounds.
  • a compound having a substituent at the site (ortho position) adjacent to the phenolic hydroxy group is preferred.
  • a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 22 carbon atoms is preferable.
  • the antioxidant is also preferably a compound having a phenol group and a phosphite group in the same molecule. Further, as the antioxidant, a phosphorus-based antioxidant can also be preferably used.
  • the content of the antioxidant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, and more preferably 0.3 to 15% by mass.
  • the antioxidant only one kind may be used, or two or more kinds may be used. When two or more kinds are used, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention if necessary, a sensitizer, a curing accelerator, a filler, a thermal curing accelerator, a plasticizer and other auxiliaries (for example, conductive particles, a filler, a defoaming agent, Flame retardant, leveling agent, peeling accelerator, perfume, surface tension adjusting agent, chain transfer agent, etc.) may be contained. Properties such as film physical properties can be adjusted by appropriately incorporating these components. These components are described, for example, in paragraph No. 0183 or later (corresponding U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2013/0034812, paragraph No. 0237) of JP 2012-003225 A, or paragraphs of JP 2008-250074 A.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a latent antioxidant, if necessary.
  • the latent antioxidant is a compound in which the site functioning as an antioxidant is protected by a protecting group, and the compound is heated at 100 to 250 ° C or heated at 80 to 200 ° C in the presence of an acid / base catalyst.
  • Examples of the latent antioxidant include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2014/021023, International Publication No. 2017/030005, and JP-A-2017-008219.
  • Examples of commercially available products include ADEKA ARCRUZ GPA-5001 (manufactured by ADEKA).
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a light resistance improver.
  • the water content of the coloring composition of the present invention is usually 3% by mass or less, preferably 0.01 to 1.5% by mass, and more preferably 0.1 to 1.0% by mass.
  • the water content can be measured by the Karl Fischer method.
  • the viscosity of the colored composition of the present invention can be adjusted for the purpose of adjusting the film surface condition (flatness, etc.) and adjusting the film thickness.
  • the value of the viscosity can be appropriately selected as necessary, but for example, at 25 ° C., 0.3 mPa ⁇ s to 50 mPa ⁇ s is preferable, and 0.5 mPa ⁇ s to 20 mPa ⁇ s is more preferable.
  • a method for measuring the viscosity for example, a Toki Sangyo viscometer RE85L (rotor: 1 ° 34 ′ ⁇ R24, measuring range: 0.6 to 1200 mPa ⁇ s) is used, and the temperature is adjusted to 25 ° C. Can be measured.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can be preferably used as a coloring composition for forming colored pixels in a color filter.
  • the colored pixel include a green pixel and a blue pixel, which can be more preferably used as a coloring composition for forming a green pixel or a blue pixel, and are more preferably used as a coloring composition for forming a green pixel. it can.
  • the voltage holding ratio of the liquid crystal display device provided with the color filter is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 90% or more.
  • Known means for obtaining a high voltage holding ratio can be incorporated as appropriate, and typical means include the use of highly pure materials (for example, reduction of ionic impurities) and the control of the amount of acidic functional groups in the composition. Is mentioned.
  • the voltage holding ratio can be measured by, for example, the method described in paragraph 0243 of JP 2011-008004 A, paragraphs 0123 to 0129 of JP 2012-224847 A, or the like.
  • the container for the colored composition of the present invention is not particularly limited, and a known container can be used.
  • a container for the purpose of suppressing the mixing of impurities into the raw materials and the composition, a multi-layer bottle in which the inner wall of the container is composed of 6 types of 6 layers of resin or a bottle of 6 types of resin having 7 layers structure is used. It is also preferable to use.
  • the container described in JP-A-2015-123351 can be mentioned.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention and the composition used for producing the image sensor are contained for the purpose of preventing metal elution from the inner wall of the container, enhancing the storage stability of the composition, and suppressing the component deterioration.
  • the inner wall of the container is made of glass or stainless steel.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the above components.
  • all the components may be dissolved and / or dispersed in an organic solvent at the same time to prepare the coloring composition. If necessary, each component may be appropriately used in two or more solutions or dispersions. Alternatively, the coloring composition may be prepared by mixing these at the time of use (at the time of application).
  • the mechanical force used to disperse the pigment includes compression, squeezing, impact, shearing, cavitation and the like.
  • Specific examples of these processes include a bead mill, a sand mill, a roll mill, a ball mill, a paint shaker, a microfluidizer, a high speed impeller, a sand grinder, a flow jet mixer, a high pressure wet atomization, and an ultrasonic dispersion.
  • the pulverization of the pigment in the sand mill (bead mill) it is preferable to use the beads having a small diameter, and to increase the filling rate of the beads to perform the treatment under the condition that the pulverization efficiency is increased. Further, it is preferable to remove coarse particles by filtration, centrifugation, or the like after the pulverization treatment.
  • the process and disperser for dispersing the pigments are described in "Dispersion Technology Taizen, Information Technology Co., Ltd., July 15, 2005” and "Dispersion technology centering on suspension (solid / liquid dispersion system) and industrial application. In fact, the process and disperser described in Paragraph No.
  • JP-A-2015-157893 "Comprehensive reference materials, published by the Management Development Center Publishing Department, October 10, 1978" can be suitably used.
  • the particles may be refined in the salt milling step.
  • the materials, equipment, processing conditions, etc. used in the salt milling process can be referred to, for example, the descriptions in JP-A-2015-194521 and JP-A-2012-046629.
  • the filter can be used without particular limitation as long as it is a filter that has been conventionally used for filtration and the like.
  • fluororesins such as polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), polyamide resins such as nylon (eg nylon-6, nylon-6,6), polyolefin resins such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) (high density, ultra high molecular weight). (Including the polyolefin resin), and the like.
  • PTFE polytetrafluoroethylene
  • nylon eg nylon-6, nylon-6,6)
  • polyolefin resins such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) (high density, ultra high molecular weight).
  • PP polypropylene
  • nylon high-density polypropylene
  • nylon are preferable.
  • the pore size of the filter is preferably 0.01 to 7.0 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.01 to 3.0 ⁇ m, still more preferably 0.05 to 0.5 ⁇ m. If the pore size of the filter is within the above range, fine foreign matter can be removed more reliably.
  • the nominal value of the filter manufacturer can be referred to.
  • various filters provided by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd. (DFA4201NIEY, etc.), Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Japan Entegris Co., Ltd. (formerly Japan Microlith Co., Ltd.), Kitz Micro Filter Co., Ltd., etc. can be used.
  • a fibrous filter medium as the filter.
  • the fibrous filter medium include polypropylene fiber, nylon fiber, glass fiber and the like.
  • examples of commercially available products include SBP type series (SBP008 etc.), TPR type series (TPR002, TPR005 etc.) and SHPX type series (SHPX003 etc.) manufactured by Loki Techno.
  • filters When using filters, different filters (eg, first filter and second filter) may be combined. At that time, the filtration with each filter may be performed only once, or may be performed twice or more. Further, filters having different pore sizes within the above range may be combined. Further, the filtration with the first filter may be performed only on the dispersion liquid, and after the other components are mixed, the filtration with the second filter may be performed.
  • the film of the present invention is a film obtained from the coloring composition of the present invention described above.
  • the film of the present invention can be preferably used as a colored pixel of a color filter. Examples of the colored pixel include a green pixel and a blue pixel, and a green pixel is more preferable.
  • the film thickness of the film of the present invention can be appropriately adjusted according to the purpose. For example, the film thickness is preferably 20 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, still more preferably 5 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit of the film thickness is preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 0.2 ⁇ m or more, still more preferably 0.3 ⁇ m or more.
  • the color filter of the present invention has the above-mentioned film of the present invention. More preferably, the pixel of the color filter has the film of the present invention.
  • the color filter of the present invention can be used for a solid-state imaging device such as CCD (charge coupled device) or CMOS (complementary metal oxide semiconductor), an image display device, or the like.
  • the film thickness of the film of the present invention can be appropriately adjusted according to the purpose.
  • the film thickness is preferably 20 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, still more preferably 5 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit of the film thickness is preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 0.2 ⁇ m or more, still more preferably 0.3 ⁇ m or more.
  • the pixel width of the color filter of the present invention is preferably 0.5 to 20.0 ⁇ m.
  • the lower limit is preferably 1.0 ⁇ m or more, and more preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 15.0 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 10.0 ⁇ m or less.
  • the Young's modulus of the pixel is preferably 0.5 to 20 GPa, more preferably 2.5 to 15 GPa.
  • Each pixel included in the color filter of the present invention preferably has high flatness.
  • the surface roughness Ra of the pixel is preferably 100 nm or less, more preferably 40 nm or less, and further preferably 15 nm or less. Although the lower limit is not specified, it is preferably 0.1 nm or more, for example.
  • the surface roughness of a pixel can be measured using, for example, AFM (atomic force microscope) Dimension 3100 manufactured by Veeco.
  • the contact angle of water on the pixel can be set to a suitable value as appropriate, but is typically in the range of 50 to 110 °.
  • the contact angle can be measured using, for example, a contact angle meter CV-DT • A type (manufactured by Kyowa Interface Science Co., Ltd.).
  • the volume resistance value of the pixel is high.
  • the volume resistance value of the pixel is preferably 10 9 ⁇ ⁇ cm or more, and more preferably 10 11 ⁇ ⁇ cm or more.
  • the upper limit is not specified, but it is preferably 10 14 ⁇ ⁇ cm or less, for example.
  • the volume resistance value of the pixel can be measured using, for example, an ultra-high resistance meter 5410 (manufactured by Advantest).
  • the color filter of the present invention may be provided with a protective layer on the surface of the film of the present invention.
  • Providing the protective layer can impart various functions such as oxygen blocking, low reflection, hydrophilicity / hydrophobicity, and blocking of light of a specific wavelength (ultraviolet rays, near infrared rays, etc.).
  • the thickness of the protective layer is preferably 0.01 to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.1 to 5 ⁇ m.
  • Examples of the method of forming the protective layer include a method of applying a resin composition dissolved in an organic solvent to form the protective layer, a chemical vapor deposition method, and a method of attaching a molded resin with an adhesive.
  • the protective layer for the purpose of blocking oxygen, it is preferable that the protective layer contains a polyol resin, SiO 2 , and Si 2 N 4 . Further, in the case of the protective layer aiming at low reflection, the protective layer preferably contains a (meth) acrylic resin or a fluororesin.
  • the resin composition When the resin composition is applied to form the protective layer, known methods such as a spin coating method, a casting method, a screen printing method, and an inkjet method can be used as a method for applying the resin composition.
  • a known organic solvent eg, propylene glycol 1-monomethyl ether 2-acetate, cyclopentanone, ethyl lactate, etc.
  • the protective layer is formed by the chemical vapor deposition method, known chemical vapor deposition methods (thermochemical vapor deposition method, plasma chemical vapor deposition method, photochemical vapor deposition method) are known as the chemical vapor deposition method. Can be used.
  • the protective layer is an additive such as organic / inorganic fine particles, an absorber of light of a specific wavelength (for example, ultraviolet rays, near infrared rays, etc.), a refractive index adjusting agent, an antioxidant, an adhesive agent, a surfactant, etc., if necessary. May be included.
  • organic / inorganic particles include polymer particles (eg, silicone resin particles, polystyrene particles, melamine resin particles), titanium oxide, zinc oxide, zirconium oxide, indium oxide, aluminum oxide, titanium nitride, titanium oxynitride. , Magnesium fluoride, hollow silica, silica, calcium carbonate, barium sulfate and the like.
  • a known absorber can be used as the absorber having a specific wavelength.
  • the ultraviolet absorber and the near infrared absorber include the materials described above.
  • the content of these additives can be adjusted appropriately, but is preferably 0.1 to 70% by mass, more preferably 1 to 60% by mass, based on the total weight of the protective layer.
  • the protective layer described in paragraph Nos. 0073 to 0092 of JP-A-2017-151176 may be used.
  • the color filter may have a structure in which each colored pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by partition walls, for example, in a grid pattern.
  • the partition wall preferably has a lower refractive index than each colored pixel.
  • the partition wall may be formed with the configuration described in US2018 / 0040656.
  • the color filter of the present invention comprises a step of forming a coloring composition layer on a support using the coloring composition of the present invention described above, and a step of forming a pattern on the coloring composition layer by a photolithography method, Can be manufactured through.
  • Pattern formation by a photolithography method includes a step of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition of the present invention, a step of exposing the colored composition layer to a pattern, and a step of forming the colored composition layer. And a step of developing and removing the exposed portion to form a pattern (pixel). If necessary, a step of baking the colored composition layer (pre-bake step) and a step of baking the developed pattern (pixel) may be provided (post-bake step).
  • the coloring composition layer of the present invention is used to form a coloring composition layer on a support.
  • the support is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected depending on the application.
  • a glass substrate, a silicon substrate, etc. are mentioned, and a silicon substrate is preferable.
  • a charge coupled device (CCD), a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS), a transparent conductive film and the like may be formed on the silicon substrate.
  • CMOS complementary metal oxide semiconductor
  • a black matrix that isolates each pixel may be formed on the silicon substrate.
  • the silicon substrate may be provided with an undercoat layer for the purpose of improving the adhesion with the upper layer, preventing the diffusion of substances, or flattening the substrate surface.
  • a known method can be used as a method for applying the coloring composition.
  • a dropping method drop casting
  • a slit coating method for example, a spraying method; a roll coating method; a spin coating method (spin coating); a cast coating method; a slit and spin method; a pre-wet method (for example, JP 2009-145395A).
  • Methods described in the publication inkjet (for example, on-demand method, piezo method, thermal method), ejection-type printing such as nozzle jet, flexographic printing, screen printing, gravure printing, reverse offset printing, metal mask printing method, etc. Examples include various printing methods; transfer methods using molds and the like; nanoimprint methods and the like.
  • the method for applying the inkjet method is not particularly limited, and for example, the method described in “Expanding and Usable Inkjet-Infinite Possibilities Seen in Patents”, issued by Sumi Betechno Research, February 2005 (especially from page 115) (See page 133), Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-262716, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-185831, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-261827, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-126830, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-169325, and the like. Can be mentioned.
  • the descriptions in International Publication No. 2017/030174 and International Publication No. 2017/018419 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the colored composition layer formed on the support may be dried (prebaked). If the film is produced by a low temperature process, prebaking may not be performed.
  • the prebaking temperature is preferably 150 ° C or lower, more preferably 120 ° C or lower, and further preferably 110 ° C or lower.
  • the lower limit may be, for example, 50 ° C. or higher, and may be 80 ° C. or higher.
  • the prebake time is preferably 10 to 3000 seconds, more preferably 40 to 2500 seconds, and even more preferably 80 to 2200 seconds. Prebaking can be performed with a hot plate, an oven, or the like.
  • the colored composition layer is exposed in a pattern (exposure step).
  • the colored composition layer can be exposed in a pattern by using a stepper exposure device, a scanner exposure device, or the like through a mask having a predetermined mask pattern. Thereby, the exposed portion can be cured.
  • Radiation (light) that can be used at the time of exposure includes g rays, i rays, and the like. Further, light having a wavelength of 300 nm or less (preferably light having a wavelength of 180 to 300 nm) can also be used. Examples of light having a wavelength of 300 nm or less include KrF rays (wavelength 248 nm) and ArF rays (wavelength 193 nm), and KrF rays (wavelength 248 nm) are preferable. Also, a long-wavelength light source of 300 nm or more can be used.
  • Irradiation dose for example, preferably 0.03 ⁇ 2.5J / cm 2, more preferably 0.05 ⁇ 1.0J / cm 2.
  • the oxygen concentration at the time of exposure can be appropriately selected.
  • the exposure may be carried out under oxygen-free conditions or under a high oxygen atmosphere in which the oxygen concentration exceeds 21% by volume (for example, 22% by volume, 30% by volume or 50% by volume).
  • the exposure intensity is can be set appropriately, usually 1000W / m 2 ⁇ 100000W / m 2 ( e.g., 5000W / m 2, 15000W / m 2, or, 35000W / m 2) selected from the range of You can Oxygen concentration and exposure illuminance may appropriately combined conditions, for example, illuminance 10000 W / m 2 at an oxygen concentration of 10 vol%, oxygen concentration of 35 vol% can be such illuminance 20000W / m 2.
  • the unexposed portion of the colored composition layer is developed and removed to form a pattern (pixel).
  • the development removal of the unexposed part of the coloring composition layer can be performed using a developing solution.
  • the unexposed portion of the colored composition layer in the exposure step is eluted into the developing solution, and only the photocured portion remains.
  • As the developing solution an organic alkaline developing solution that does not damage the underlying device or circuit is desirable.
  • the temperature of the developer is preferably 20 to 30 ° C., for example.
  • the development time is preferably 20 to 180 seconds. Further, in order to improve the residue removability, the process of shaking off the developing solution every 60 seconds and further supplying a new developing solution may be repeated several times.
  • the developer is preferably an alkaline aqueous solution (alkali developer) obtained by diluting an alkaline agent with pure water.
  • alkaline agent include ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, diglycolamine, diethanolamine, hydroxyamine, ethylenediamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide.
  • Organic compounds such as, ethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, dimethylbis (2-hydroxyethyl) ammonium hydroxide, choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.4.0] -7-undecene
  • Alkaline compounds sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, sodium silicate Um, and inorganic alkaline compound such as sodium metasilicate.
  • the alkaline agent a compound having a large molecular weight is preferable in terms of environment and safety.
  • the concentration of the alkaline agent in the alkaline aqueous solution is preferably 0.001 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 1% by mass.
  • the developing solution may further contain a surfactant.
  • the surfactant include the above-mentioned surfactants, and nonionic surfactants are preferable.
  • the developer may be produced once as a concentrated solution and diluted to a required concentration at the time of use, from the viewpoint of convenience of transportation and storage. Although the dilution ratio is not particularly limited, it can be set, for example, in the range of 1.5 to 100 times. Further, it is also preferable to wash (rinse) with pure water after the development.
  • the rinsing is preferably performed by supplying a rinse liquid to the colored composition layer after development while rotating the support on which the colored composition layer after development is formed. It is also preferable that the nozzle for discharging the rinse liquid is moved from the central portion of the support to the peripheral portion of the support. At this time, when moving from the central portion of the support body of the nozzle to the peripheral edge portion, the movement speed of the nozzle may be gradually reduced. By performing the rinse in this manner, it is possible to suppress the in-plane variation of the rinse. Further, the same effect can be obtained by gradually decreasing the rotation speed of the support while moving the nozzle from the center of the support to the peripheral portion.
  • the additional exposure process and the post-baking are curing processes after development to complete the curing.
  • the heating temperature in the post-baking is preferably 100 to 240 ° C, more preferably 200 to 240 ° C.
  • Post-baking can be performed in a continuous or batch manner by using a heating means such as a hot plate, a convection oven (hot air circulation dryer), or a high-frequency heater so that the film after development can meet the above conditions.
  • the additional exposure process is performed, the light used for the exposure is preferably light having a wavelength of 400 nm or less. Further, the additional exposure process may be performed by the method described in KR1020170122130A.
  • the solid-state image sensor of the present invention has the above-mentioned film of the present invention.
  • the configuration of the solid-state imaging device of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it includes the film of the present invention and functions as a solid-state imaging device, but examples thereof include the following configurations.
  • a plurality of photodiodes forming a light receiving area of a solid-state image pickup device (CCD (charge coupled device) image sensor, CMOS (complementary metal oxide semiconductor) image sensor, etc.) and transfer electrodes made of polysilicon or the like.
  • CCD charge coupled device
  • CMOS complementary metal oxide semiconductor
  • a device protection film made of silicon nitride or the like which has a light-shielding film that is opened only on the photodiode and the light-receiving portion of the photodiode on the transfer electrode and covers the entire light-shielding film and the photodiode light-receiving portion on the light-shielding film. And has a color filter on the device protective film.
  • the color filter may have a structure in which each colored pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by a partition wall, for example, in a grid pattern.
  • the partition wall preferably has a low refractive index for each colored pixel.
  • Examples of the imaging device having such a structure include the devices described in JP2012-227478A, JP2014-179577A, and International Publication No. 2018/043654.
  • the image pickup apparatus provided with the solid-state image pickup element of the present invention can be used not only for digital cameras and electronic devices (such as mobile phones) having an image pickup function, but also for vehicle-mounted cameras and surveillance cameras.
  • the image display device of the present invention has the above-mentioned film of the present invention.
  • the image display device include a liquid crystal display device and an organic electroluminescence display device.
  • the liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, “Next-generation liquid crystal display technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Industrial Research Institute Co., Ltd., published in 1994)”.
  • the liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied is not particularly limited, and can be applied to, for example, liquid crystal display devices of various systems described in the above-mentioned “next-generation liquid crystal display technology”.
  • A 56.11 ⁇ Vs ⁇ 0.5 ⁇ f / w
  • Vs Amount of 0.1 mol / L sodium hydroxide aqueous solution used for titration (mL)
  • f titer of 0.1 mol / L sodium hydroxide aqueous solution
  • w measured sample mass (g) (solid content conversion)
  • ⁇ Preparation of dispersion> After mixing the raw materials described in the table below, and mixing and dispersing for 3 hours using a bead mill (zirconia beads 0.1 mm diameter), a high pressure disperser with a pressure reducing mechanism NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) ) was used to perform a dispersion treatment under a pressure of 2000 kg / cm 3 and a flow rate of 500 g / min. This dispersion treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain a dispersion liquid.
  • the numerical value described in the column of the mass part of the dispersant is a value in terms of solid content.
  • the numerical value described in the column of the mass part of the solvent is a value including the amount of the solvent contained in the dispersant.
  • Colorant A1 C.I. I. Pigment Green 62 (aluminum phthalocyanine compound, a compound represented by the formula (1))
  • Colorants A2 to A4 Compounds of the following structures
  • Colorant A5 C.I. I. Pigment Green 63 (aluminum phthalocyanine compound, which is a compound represented by the formula (1))
  • Colorant B1 C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 138
  • Colorant B2 C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 139
  • Colorant B3 C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 150
  • Colorant B4 C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 231
  • Colorants B5 to B7 compounds having the following structures Colorant C1: C.I. I. Pigment Red 254
  • Dispersant D1 Dispersant (phosphate ester) produced by the following method A reaction vessel equipped with an air inlet tube, a condenser, and a stirrer was charged with 300 g of 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 1315 g of ⁇ -caprolactone monomer, 0.33 g of methylhydroquinone, and 0.01 g of monobutyltin oxide, and heated to 120 ° C while flowing dry air. The temperature was raised and maintained for 2 hours. After confirming the disappearance of the caprolactone monomer, the mixture was cooled to 40 ° C.
  • the acid value of the obtained phosphoric acid ester was 100 mgKOH / g.
  • Dispersant D2 Dispersant produced by the following method In a reaction vessel equipped with a gas introduction tube, thermometer, condenser, and stirrer, 108 parts by mass of 1-thioglycerol, 174 parts by mass of pyromellitic dianhydride, propylene glycol monomethyl. 650 parts by mass of ether acetate (PGMEA) and 0.2 parts by mass of monobutyltin oxide as a catalyst were charged, and after substituting with nitrogen gas, they were reacted at 120 ° C. for 5 hours (first step). It was confirmed by measuring the acid value that 95% or more of the acid anhydride was half-esterified.
  • PGMEA ether acetate
  • monobutyltin oxide monobutyltin oxide
  • Dispersant D4 Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio of repeating units, the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units, Mw: 20000, acid value: 75 mgKOH / g)
  • solvent solvent
  • solvent J1 Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA)
  • solvent J2 Cyclohexanone
  • solvent J3 Cyclohexyl acetate
  • ⁇ Preparation of coloring composition> The raw materials shown in the following table are mixed, stirred, and then filtered through a nylon filter (manufactured by Nippon Pall Co., Ltd.) having a pore size of 0.45 ⁇ m to prepare G compositions 1 to 25, P compositions 1, 2 and R compositions. No. 1 coloring composition was prepared.
  • the R composition 1 is a coloring composition for reliability evaluation.
  • Dispersions K1 to K9, L1 to L8, M1 Dispersions K1 to K9, L1 to L8, M1 described above
  • Resin E1 Resin having the following structure (the numbers attached to the main chain are the molar ratios of repeating units, and the numbers attached to the side chains are the number of repeating units, Mw: 10000).
  • Resin E2 Resin having the following structure (the numbers attached to the main chain are molar ratios of repeating units, Mw: 14000, acid value: 78 mgKOH / g)
  • Resin E3 50 parts by mass of methyl methacrylate, 50 parts by mass of n-butyl methacrylate, and 45.4 parts by mass of PGMEA (propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate) were charged into a reaction vessel, and the atmosphere gas was replaced with nitrogen gas.
  • PGMEA propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate
  • the inside of the reaction vessel is heated to 70 ° C., 6 parts by mass of 3-mercapto-1,2-propanediol is added, 0.12 parts by mass of AIBN (azobisisobutyronitrile) is further added, and the reaction is performed for 12 hours. Let Solid content measurement confirmed that 95% had reacted. Next, 9.7 parts by mass of pyromellitic dianhydride, 70.3 parts by mass of PGMEA, and 0.20 parts by mass of DBU (1,8-diazabicyclo- [5.4.0] -7-undecene) as a catalyst were added. And reacted at 120 ° C. for 7 hours.
  • Resin E4 Resin having the following structure (the numbers attached to the main chain are molar ratios of repeating units, Mw: 30,000, acid value: 110 mgKOH / g)
  • Resin E5 Resin having the following structure (numerals attached to the main chain are molar ratios of repeating units, Mw: 11,000, acid value: 30 mgKOH / g)
  • Polymerizable monomer F1 a mixture of compounds having the following structures (containing 30 to 40 mol% of the right side compound)
  • Polymerizable monomer F2 compound having the following structure
  • Polymerizable monomer F3 succinic acid-modified dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate
  • Initiators G1 to G3 compounds having the following structures
  • Initiator G4 IRGACURE OXE01 (manufactured by BASF)
  • Surfactant H1 BYK-379 (manufactured by BYK Chemie)
  • CT-4000 manufactured by FUJIFILM Electronic Materials Co., Ltd.
  • FUJIFILM Electronic Materials Co., Ltd. was applied on a glass substrate by spin coating to a film thickness of 0.1 ⁇ m, and heated at 220 ° C. for 1 hour using a hot plate. The formation was formed.
  • Each colored composition (G composition or P composition) was applied onto this glass substrate with an underlayer by a spin coating method, and then heated at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes using a hot plate to a thickness of 0.
  • a composition layer of 5 ⁇ m was obtained. This composition layer was irradiated with light having a wavelength of 365 nm and exposed at an exposure amount of 500 mJ / cm 2 . Then, post baking was performed at 220 ° C.
  • the luminance distribution was analyzed by the following method, and color unevenness was evaluated based on the number of pixels whose deviation from the average was ⁇ 10% or more.
  • a method of measuring the brightness distribution will be described.
  • An evaluation substrate is installed between the observation lens and the light source of the optical microscope to irradiate the observation lens with light, and the transmitted light state is measured with an optical microscope MX-50 (manufactured by Olympus). And observed.
  • the film surface was photographed for five arbitrarily selected regions. The brightness of the photographed image was digitized and stored as a density distribution of 256 gradations from 0 to 255.
  • the luminance distribution was analyzed from this image, and the color unevenness was evaluated by the number of pixels whose deviation from the average exceeds ⁇ 10%.
  • the evaluation criteria are as follows. 5: The number of pixels whose deviation from the average exceeds ⁇ 10% is 1000 or less. 4: The number of pixels whose deviation from the average exceeds ⁇ 10% is more than 1000 and 3000 or less. 3: The number of pixels whose deviation from the average exceeds ⁇ 10% exceeds 3000 and is 5000 or less. 2: The number of pixels whose deviation from the average exceeds ⁇ 10% exceeds 5000 and is 15000 or less. 1: The number of pixels whose deviation from the average exceeds ⁇ 10% exceeds 15,000.
  • CT-4000 manufactured by FUJIFILM Electronic Materials Co., Ltd.
  • FUJIFILM Electronic Materials Co., Ltd. was applied on a silicon wafer by a spin coating method to a film thickness of 0.1 ⁇ m, and heated at 220 ° C. for 1 hour using a hot plate. The formation was formed.
  • Each colored composition (G composition or P composition) was applied onto this silicon wafer with an underlayer by a spin coating method, and then heated at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes using a hot plate to a thickness of 0. A composition layer of 5 ⁇ m was obtained.
  • Light having a wavelength of 365 nm was irradiated through the pattern to perform exposure with an exposure amount of 500 mJ / cm 2 .
  • the composition layer after exposure was subjected to paddle development at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using a 0.3% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide. After that, a spin shower was used to rinse with water, and then pure water was used for washing.
  • CT-4000 manufactured by FUJIFILM Electronic Materials Co., Ltd.
  • CT-4000 was applied onto a silicon wafer by a spin coating method so that the film thickness was 0.1 ⁇ m. Then, it heated at 100 degreeC for 2 minutes using the hot plate. Furthermore, it heated at 230 degreeC for 2 minutes using the hot plate, and formed the base layer.
  • Each colored composition (G composition or P composition) was applied onto this silicon wafer with an underlayer by a spin coating method, and then heated at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes using a hot plate to a thickness of 0. A composition layer of 5 ⁇ m was obtained.
  • This composition layer was irradiated with light having a wavelength of 365 nm through an i-line stepper exposure device (FPA-3000i5 +, manufactured by Canon Inc.) through a mask having a Bayer pattern of 1.0 ⁇ m on each side. , 150 mJ / cm 2 exposure amount.
  • the composition layer after exposure was subjected to paddle development at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using a 0.3% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide. After that, a spin shower was used to rinse with water, and then pure water was used for washing. After that, water droplets were blown off with high-pressure air to naturally dry the silicon wafer, and then post baking was performed at 220 ° C.
  • the manufactured structure was incorporated into a solid-state image sensor, and a constant temperature and constant humidity test was performed for 2000 hours in a constant temperature and constant humidity chamber at a temperature of 85 ° C. and a humidity of 85%.
  • the above structure is taken out from the solid-state image sensor after the constant temperature and humidity test, and the cross section (20 places) of the structure is observed using a transmission electron microscope (magnification: 40,000 times) to check for the presence of voids (voids) between pixels.
  • Observation was performed to check the occurrence rate of voids (voids) between pixels, and the reliability was judged according to the following criteria.
  • the occurrence rate of voids (voids) was calculated by the following formula for each combination of pixels in contact with each other.
  • Occurrence rate of voids (gap) [number of boundaries with voids (voids) among observed boundaries] / [number of boundaries observed]
  • Occurrence rate of voids (gap) [number of boundaries with voids (voids) among observed boundaries] / [number of boundaries observed]
  • Occurrence rate of voids (voids) 0 4: 0 ⁇ Void (Void) Occurrence Rate ⁇ 0.1 3: 0.1 ⁇ occurrence rate of voids (voids) ⁇ 0.2 2: 0.2 ⁇ occurrence rate of voids (voids) ⁇ 0.5 1: 0.5 ⁇ occurrence rate of voids (voids) ⁇ 1.0
  • the numerical value of the content of the polymerizable monomer in the above table is the value of the content of the polymerizable monomer in the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the M / B ratio is the ratio of the mass M of the polymerizable monomer contained in the coloring composition to the mass B of the resin contained in the coloring composition.
  • the mass M of the polymerizable monomer is the total mass of the polymerizable monomers F1 to F3 contained in the coloring composition.
  • the mass B of the resin is the total mass of the dispersants D1 to D4 and the resins E1 to E5 contained in the coloring composition.
  • Example 100 The Green composition was applied onto a silicon wafer by spin coating so that the film thickness after film formation was 1.0 ⁇ m. Then, using a hot plate, it heated at 100 degreeC for 2 minutes. Then, using an i-line stepper exposure device FPA-3000i5 + (manufactured by Canon Inc.), exposure was performed through a mask having a dot pattern of 2 ⁇ m square with an exposure amount of 1000 mJ / cm 2 . Next, paddle development was performed at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using a 0.3% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH). Then, it rinsed with a spin shower and further washed with pure water.
  • TMAH tetramethylammonium hydroxide
  • the Green composition was patterned by heating at 200 ° C. for 5 minutes using a hot plate.
  • the Red composition and the Blue composition were sequentially patterned to form green, red, and blue coloring patterns (Bayer patterns).
  • the coloring composition of G composition 1 was used as the Green composition.
  • the Red composition and the Blue composition will be described later.
  • the Bayer pattern is, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,971,065, one red element, two green elements, and one blue element. ) Element and a 2 ⁇ 2 array of color filter elements are repeated.
  • the obtained color filter was incorporated into a solid-state image sensor according to a known method. This solid-state image sensor had a suitable image recognition ability.
  • Red pigment dispersion 51.7 parts by mass
  • Resin 101 0.6 parts by mass
  • Polymerizable compound 102 0.6 parts by mass
  • Photopolymerization initiator 101 0.3 parts by mass
  • Surfactant 101 4.2 parts by mass PGMEA : 42.6 parts by mass
  • Blue pigment dispersion 44.9 parts by mass 40% by mass PGMEA solution of resin 101: 2.1 parts by mass Polymerizable compound 101: 1.5 parts by mass Polymerizable compound 102: 0.7 parts by mass Photopolymerization initiator 101: 0.8 parts by mass Surfactant 101: 4.2 parts by mass PGMEA: 45.8 parts by mass
  • the raw materials used for the Red composition and the Blue composition are as follows.
  • Red pigment dispersion C.I. I. Pigment Red 254, 9.6 parts by mass, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 139 (4.3 parts by mass), a dispersant (Disperbyk-161, manufactured by BYK Chemie) 6.8 parts by mass, and PGMEA (79.3 parts by mass) were mixed with a bead mill (zirconia beads 0.3 mm diameter). ), And mixed and dispersed for 3 hours. Thereafter, a high-pressure disperser NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) equipped with a decompression mechanism was further used to perform dispersion treatment under a pressure of 2000 kg / cm 3 at a flow rate of 500 g / min. This dispersion treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain a Red pigment dispersion liquid.
  • Blue pigment dispersion C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6, 9.7 parts by mass, C.I. I. Pigment Violet 23 (2.4 parts by mass), Dispersant (Disperbyk-161, manufactured by BYK Chemie) 5.5 parts by mass, PGMEA (82.4 parts by mass) was mixed with a beads mill (zirconia beads 0.3 mm diameter). And mixed and dispersed for 3 hours. Thereafter, a high-pressure disperser NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) equipped with a decompression mechanism was further used to perform dispersion treatment under a pressure of 2000 kg / cm 3 at a flow rate of 500 g / min. This dispersion treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain a Blue pigment dispersion liquid.
  • a high-pressure disperser NANO-3000-10 manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.
  • Polymerizable compound 101 KAYARAD DPHA (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.)
  • Polymerizable compound 102 compound having the following structure
  • Photopolymerization initiator 101 IRGACURE OXE02 (manufactured by BASF)

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Materials Engineering (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Power Engineering (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
  • Electromagnetism (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
  • Optical Filters (AREA)
  • Polymerisation Methods In General (AREA)
  • Addition Polymer Or Copolymer, Post-Treatments, Or Chemical Modifications (AREA)
  • Solid State Image Pick-Up Elements (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a coloring composition comprising: a coloring agent containing a compound represented by formula (1); a polymerizable monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bonding group; a photopolymerization initiator; and a resin, wherein the polymerizable monomer in the total solid content of the coloring composition is 0.1-6.0 mass%. Provided are: a film using a coloring composition; a color filter; a method for manufacturing a color filter; a solid-state imaging element; and an image display device.

Description

着色組成物、膜、カラーフィルタ、カラーフィルタの製造方法、固体撮像素子及び画像表示装置Coloring composition, film, color filter, method for manufacturing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
 本発明は、着色組成物に関する。また、本発明は、着色組成物を用いた膜、カラーフィルタ、カラーフィルタの製造方法、固体撮像素子および画像表示装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a coloring composition. The present invention also relates to a film using a coloring composition, a color filter, a method for manufacturing a color filter, a solid-state image sensor, and an image display device.
 近年、デジタルカメラ、カメラ付き携帯電話等の普及から、電荷結合素子(CCD)イメージセンサなどの固体撮像素子の需要が大きく伸びている。ディスプレイや光学素子のキーデバイスとしてカラーフィルタが使用されている。カラーフィルタは、通常、赤、緑及び青の3原色の画素を備えており、透過光を3原色へ分解する役割を果たしている。 Demand for solid-state imaging devices such as charge-coupled device (CCD) image sensors has grown significantly with the recent spread of digital cameras and camera-equipped mobile phones. Color filters are used as key devices for displays and optical elements. The color filter usually includes pixels of three primary colors of red, green and blue, and plays a role of separating transmitted light into three primary colors.
 カラーフィルタは、例えば、着色剤を含む着色組成物を用い、フォトリソグラフィ法にてパターン形成を行って製造されている。また、フォトリソグラフィ法にてパターン形成を行うにあたり、着色組成物としては、着色剤の他に、更に、エチレン性不飽和結合基を有する重合性モノマーと、光重合開始剤と、樹脂とを含むものが用いられている。 The color filter is manufactured, for example, by using a coloring composition containing a coloring agent and performing pattern formation by a photolithography method. Further, in performing pattern formation by the photolithography method, the coloring composition further contains a polymerizable monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group, a photopolymerization initiator, and a resin in addition to the colorant. Things are used.
 また、近年では、着色剤として、中心金属にAlを用いたフタロシアニン化合物(以下、アルミニウムフタロシアニン化合物ともいう)の使用が検討されている(特許文献1~3)。 Also, in recent years, use of a phthalocyanine compound using Al as a central metal (hereinafter, also referred to as an aluminum phthalocyanine compound) as a colorant has been studied (Patent Documents 1 to 3).
特開2015-063593号公報[Patent Document 1] JP-A-2005-063593 特開2016-170370号公報JP, 2016-170370, A 特開2013-171063号公報JP, 2013-171063, A
 本発明者がアルミニウムフタロシアニン化合物を含む着色剤を含む着色組成物について鋭意検討したところ、この着色組成物を用いて得られる膜に関し、色ムラが生じやすいことが分かった。特に、アルミニウムフタロシアニン化合物として、後述する式(1)で表される化合物や式(2)で表される化合物を用いた場合については、色ムラが生じやすい傾向にあることが分かった。 When the present inventor diligently studied a coloring composition containing a coloring agent containing an aluminum phthalocyanine compound, it was found that color unevenness is likely to occur in a film obtained using this coloring composition. In particular, when the compound represented by the formula (1) or the compound represented by the formula (2) described below was used as the aluminum phthalocyanine compound, it was found that color unevenness was likely to occur.
 よって、本発明の目的は、フォトリソグラフィ性に優れ、かつ、色ムラが抑制された膜を形成できる着色組成物を提供することにある。また、本発明は、着色組成物を用いた膜、カラーフィルタ、カラーフィルタの製造方法、固体撮像素子及び画像表示装置を提供することにある。 Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a coloring composition which is excellent in photolithography and can form a film in which color unevenness is suppressed. Another object of the present invention is to provide a film using a coloring composition, a color filter, a method for manufacturing a color filter, a solid-state image sensor, and an image display device.
 本発明者が、アルミニウムフタロシアニン化合物を含む着色剤と、エチレン性不飽和結合基を有する重合性モノマーと、光重合開始剤と、樹脂とを含む着色組成物について鋭意検討したところ、このような着色組成物を用いて得られる膜に関して色ムラが生じやすい理由は、アルミニウムフタロシアニン化合物とエチレン性不飽和結合基を有する重合性モノマーとの相溶性が不十分であるためであると考えた。そこで、アルミニウムフタロシアニン化合物として、後述する式(1)で表される化合物や式(2)で表される化合物を用いつつ、エチレン性不飽和結合基を有する重合性モノマーの含有量を所定の範囲に調整することで、優れたフォトリソグラフィ性を有しつつ、色ムラが抑制された膜を形成できることを見出し、本発明を完成するに至った。よって、本発明は以下を提供する。
 <1> 着色剤と、エチレン性不飽和結合基を有する重合性モノマーと、光重合開始剤と、樹脂とを含む着色組成物であって、
 着色剤は、下記式(1)で表される化合物および下記式(2)で表される化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含み、
 着色組成物の全固形分中に重合性モノマーを0.1~6.0質量%含有する、着色組成物;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
 式(1)中、X~Xはそれぞれ独立して、置換基を表す;
 Zはヒドロキシ基、ハロゲン原子、-OP(=O)R、または-O-SiRを表し、R~Rはそれぞれ独立して、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、またはアリールオキシ基を表し、RとR、RとRは互いに結合して環を形成しても良い;
 m1~m4は、それぞれ独立して0~4の整数を表し、m1~m4が2以上のとき、X~Xはそれぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 式(2)中、X~X12はそれぞれ独立して、置換基を表す;
 Lは、-O-SiR-O-、-O-SiR-O-SiR-O-、または-O-P(=O)R10-O-を表し、R~R10はそれぞれ独立して、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、またはアリールオキシ基を表す;
 m5~m12は、それぞれ独立して0~4の整数を表し、m5~m12が2以上のとき、X~X12はそれぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 <2> 着色剤は、カラーインデックスピグメントグリーン62および、カラーインデックスピグメントグリーン63から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む、<1>に記載の着色組成物。
 <3> 着色剤は、カラーインデックスピグメントイエロー138、カラーインデックスピグメントイエロー139、カラーインデックスピグメントイエロー150及びカラーインデックスピグメントイエロー231から選択される少なくとも1種を含む、<1>または<2>に記載の着色組成物。
 <4> 着色剤は、更に下記式(3)で表される化合物を含む、<1>~<3>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 式(3)中、Ry~Ry13は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、スルホ基、スルホ基の塩、カルボキシル基、カルボキシル基の塩、フタルイミドメチル基、またはスルファモイル基を表す;
 Ry~Ryのうち隣接した2つの基同士は結合して環を形成していてもよく、Ry10~Ry13のうち隣接した2つの基同士は結合して環を形成していてもよい。
 <5> 着色剤中における、式(1)で表される化合物と式(2)で表される化合物との合計の含有量が30質量%以上である、<1>~<4>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
 <6> 樹脂は、エチレン性不飽和結合基を有する樹脂を含む、<1>~<5>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
 <7> 樹脂は、下記式(I)で表される化合物由来の繰り返し単位を含む樹脂を含有する、<1>~<6>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 式中、Xiは、OまたはNHを表し、
 Riは水素原子またはメチル基を表し、
 Liは2価の連結基を表し、
 Ri10は置換基を表し、
 mは0~2の整数を表し、
 pは0以上の整数を表す。
 <8> 式(I)で表される化合物由来の繰り返し単位を含む樹脂は、更に、アルキル(メタ)アクリレート由来の繰り返し単位を含む、<7>に記載の着色組成物。
 <9> 着色組成物に含まれる重合性モノマーの質量Mと、着色組成物に含まれる樹脂の質量Bとの比であるM/Bが0.03~0.15である、<1>~<8>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
 <10> 重合性モノマーは、コハク酸変性ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレートおよびジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレートから選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む、<1>~<9>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
 <11> <1>~<10>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物から得られる膜。
 <12> <11>に記載の膜を有するカラーフィルタ。
 <13> <1>~<10>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物を用いて支持体上に着色組成物層を形成する工程と、フォトリソグラフィ法により着色組成物層に対してパターンを形成する工程と、を有するカラーフィルタの製造方法。
 <14> <11>に記載の膜を有する固体撮像素子。
 <15> <11>に記載の膜を有する画像表示装置。
The present inventor diligently studied a coloring composition containing a colorant containing an aluminum phthalocyanine compound, a polymerizable monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group, a photopolymerization initiator, and a resin. The reason why the color unevenness is likely to occur in the film obtained using the composition was considered to be due to insufficient compatibility between the aluminum phthalocyanine compound and the polymerizable monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group. Therefore, while using the compound represented by the formula (1) or the compound represented by the formula (2) described below as the aluminum phthalocyanine compound, the content of the polymerizable monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group is within a predetermined range. It was found that a film in which color unevenness is suppressed while having excellent photolithographic properties can be formed by adjusting the amount to be adjusted to, and the present invention has been completed. Therefore, the present invention provides the following.
<1> A coloring composition comprising a coloring agent, a polymerizable monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group, a photopolymerization initiator, and a resin,
The colorant contains at least one selected from the compound represented by the following formula (1) and the compound represented by the following formula (2),
A coloring composition containing a polymerizable monomer in an amount of 0.1 to 6.0% by mass based on the total solid content of the coloring composition;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
In formula (1), X 1 to X 4 each independently represent a substituent;
Z 1 represents a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, —OP (═O) R 1 R 2 , or —O—SiR 3 R 4 R 5 , and R 1 to R 5 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, It represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, or an aryloxy group, and R 1 and R 2 , and R 3 and R 4 may combine with each other to form a ring;
m1 to m4 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, and when m1 to m4 are 2 or more, X 1 to X 4 may be the same or different;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
In formula (2), X 5 to X 12 each independently represent a substituent;
L A represents -O-SiR 6 R 7 -O-, -O-SiR 6 R 7 -O-SiR 8 R 9 -O-, or -OP (= O) R 10 -O-, R 6 to R 10 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, or an aryloxy group;
m5 to m12 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, and when m5 to m12 are 2 or more, X 5 to X 12 may be the same or different.
<2> The coloring composition according to <1>, wherein the coloring agent contains at least one selected from color index pigment green 62 and color index pigment green 63.
<3> The colorant contains at least one selected from Color Index Pigment Yellow 138, Color Index Pigment Yellow 139, Color Index Pigment Yellow 150, and Color Index Pigment Yellow 231, and is described in <1> or <2>. Coloring composition.
<4> The coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <3>, further containing a compound represented by the following formula (3):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
In formula (3), Ry 1 to Ry 13 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, a sulfo group, a salt of a sulfo group, a carboxyl group, a salt of a carboxyl group, or phthalimidomethyl. Represents a group or a sulfamoyl group;
Two adjacent groups of Ry 1 to Ry 4 may be bonded to each other to form a ring, and two adjacent groups of Ry 10 to Ry 13 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. Good.
<5> Any of <1> to <4>, wherein the total content of the compound represented by formula (1) and the compound represented by formula (2) in the colorant is 30% by mass or more. The coloring composition as described in 1 above.
<6> The coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <5>, in which the resin includes a resin having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group.
<7> The resin is a colored composition according to any one of <1> to <6>, which contains a resin containing a repeating unit derived from a compound represented by the following formula (I):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
In the formula, Xi 1 represents O or NH,
Ri 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group,
Li 1 represents a divalent linking group,
Ri 10 represents a substituent,
m represents an integer of 0 to 2,
p represents an integer of 0 or more.
<8> The coloring composition according to <7>, wherein the resin containing a repeating unit derived from the compound represented by the formula (I) further contains a repeating unit derived from an alkyl (meth) acrylate.
<9> The ratio M 1 / B 1 of the mass M 1 of the polymerizable monomer contained in the coloring composition to the mass B 1 of the resin contained in the coloring composition is 0.03 to 0.15. The coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <8>.
<10> The polymerizable monomer includes at least one selected from succinic acid-modified dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate and dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, <1> to The coloring composition according to any one of <9>.
<11> A film obtained from the coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <10>.
<12> A color filter having the film according to <11>.
<13> A step of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition according to any one of <1> to <10>, and a pattern for the colored composition layer by a photolithography method. Forming a color filter.
<14> A solid-state image sensor having the film according to <11>.
<15> An image display device having the film according to <11>.
 本発明によれば、フォトリソグラフィ性に優れ、かつ、色ムラが抑制された膜を形成できる着色組成物を提供することができる。また、着色組成物を用いた膜、カラーフィルタ、カラーフィルタの製造方法、固体撮像素子及び画像表示装置を提供することができる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a coloring composition which is excellent in photolithography and can form a film in which color unevenness is suppressed. Further, it is possible to provide a film using a coloring composition, a color filter, a method for manufacturing a color filter, a solid-state image sensor, and an image display device.
 以下において、本発明の内容について詳細に説明する。
 本明細書において、「~」とはその前後に記載される数値を下限値および上限値として含む意味で使用される。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換および無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さない基(原子団)と共に置換基を有する基(原子団)をも包含する。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含する。
 本明細書において「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、光を用いた露光のみならず、電子線、イオンビーム等の粒子線を用いた描画も露光に含める。また、露光に用いられる光としては、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光)、X線、電子線等の活性光線または放射線が挙げられる。
 本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリレート」は、アクリレートおよびメタクリレートの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリル」は、アクリルおよびメタクリルの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリロイル」は、アクリロイルおよびメタクリロイルの双方、または、いずれかを表す。
 本明細書において、構造式中のMeはメチル基を表し、Etはエチル基を表し、Buはブチル基を表し、Phはフェニル基を表す。
 本明細書において、重量平均分子量および数平均分子量は、GPC(ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ)法により測定したポリスチレン換算値である。
 本明細書において、全固形分とは、組成物の全成分から溶剤を除いた成分の総質量をいう。
 本明細書において、顔料とは、溶剤に対して溶解しにくい化合物を意味する。
 本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけではなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であってもその工程の所期の作用が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
Hereinafter, the content of the present invention will be described in detail.
In the present specification, “to” is used to mean that numerical values described before and after the “to” are included as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
In the description of the group (atomic group) in the present specification, the notation in which substitution and non-substitution are not included includes a group (atomic group) having no substituent and a group (atomic group) having a substituent. For example, the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
In the present specification, the term "exposure" includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using a particle beam such as an electron beam or an ion beam, unless otherwise specified. Examples of the light used for exposure include a bright line spectrum of a mercury lamp, deep ultraviolet rays represented by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), active rays such as X-rays and electron rays, or radiation.
In the present specification, "(meth) acrylate" represents both acrylate and methacrylate, or either, "(meth) acrylic" represents both acrylic and methacrylic, or "(meth ) "Acryloyl" means both acryloyl and methacryloyl, or either.
In the present specification, Me in the structural formula represents a methyl group, Et represents an ethyl group, Bu represents a butyl group, and Ph represents a phenyl group.
In the present specification, the weight average molecular weight and the number average molecular weight are polystyrene equivalent values measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography) method.
In the present specification, the total solid content refers to the total mass of the components of the composition excluding the solvent.
In the present specification, the pigment means a compound that is difficult to dissolve in a solvent.
In the present specification, the term “process” is included in this term as long as the intended action of the process is achieved not only as an independent process but also when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. .
<着色組成物>
 本発明の着色組成物は、着色剤と、エチレン性不飽和結合基を有する重合性モノマーと、光重合開始剤と、樹脂とを含む着色組成物であって、着色剤は、後述する式(1)で表される化合物および式(2)で表される化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含み、着色組成物の全固形分中に重合性モノマーを0.1~6.0質量%含有することを特徴とする。
<Coloring composition>
The coloring composition of the present invention is a coloring composition containing a coloring agent, a polymerizable monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group, a photopolymerization initiator, and a resin, and the coloring agent has the formula ( At least one selected from the compound represented by 1) and the compound represented by the formula (2) is contained, and 0.1 to 6.0 mass% of the polymerizable monomer is contained in the total solid content of the coloring composition. It is characterized by
 本発明の着色組成物は、着色組成物の全固形分中における重合性モノマーの含有量が0.1~6.0質量%であるので、着色剤として(1)で表される化合物や式(2)で表される化合物を用いているにもかかわらず、優れたフォトリソグラフィ性を維持しつつ、得られる膜に関して、色ムラの発生を効果的に抑制することができる。 Since the content of the polymerizable monomer in the total solid content of the coloring composition of the present invention is 0.1 to 6.0% by mass, the compound or formula represented by (1) or the compound represented by the formula (1) is used as the coloring agent. Despite the use of the compound represented by (2), it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of color unevenness in the obtained film while maintaining excellent photolithographic properties.
 また、本発明の着色組成物によれば、重合性モノマーの含有量が0.1~6.0質量%であるので、経時で炭素―炭素結合が切れても膜から飛散する重合性モノマー由来の成分が少なく、得られる膜についての経時での膜収縮を抑制することもできる。特に、湿度の高い環境下に膜を長期間曝した場合であっても、膜収縮を効果的に抑制することもできる。このため、本発明の着色組成物を用いて形成した膜と、この膜に隣接する部材との間でのボイドの発生を抑制することもできる。例えば、他色の画素間に本発明の着色組成物を用いて画素を形成したり、本発明の組成物を用いて形成した画素間に他色の画素を形成してカラーフィルタなどの構造体を製造した際において、このような構造体を湿度の高い環境下で長期間曝した場合であっても、隣接する画素間におけるボイドの発生を抑制することもできる。また、本発明の着色組成物を用いて、隔壁で区画された領域に画素を形成してカラーフィルタなどの構造体を製造した際において、このような構造体を湿度の高い環境下で長期間曝した場合であっても、画素と隔壁との間におけるボイドの発生を抑制することもできる。 Further, according to the coloring composition of the present invention, since the content of the polymerizable monomer is 0.1 to 6.0% by mass, it is derived from the polymerizable monomer that scatters from the film even if the carbon-carbon bond is broken with time. The amount of the component is small, and it is possible to suppress the film shrinkage of the obtained film over time. In particular, even when the film is exposed to a high humidity environment for a long time, it is possible to effectively suppress the film shrinkage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the generation of voids between the film formed using the coloring composition of the present invention and the member adjacent to the film. For example, a pixel is formed between pixels of another color by using the coloring composition of the present invention, or a pixel of another color is formed between pixels formed by using the composition of the present invention, and a structure such as a color filter is formed. Even when such a structure is exposed for a long period of time in a high humidity environment during the manufacture of, the generation of voids between adjacent pixels can be suppressed. Further, when the colored composition of the present invention is used to manufacture a structure such as a color filter by forming pixels in a region partitioned by partition walls, such a structure is used for a long period of time in a high humidity environment. Even when exposed, it is possible to suppress the generation of voids between the pixels and the partition walls.
 本発明の着色組成物は、カラーフィルタ用の着色組成物として好ましく用いることができる。具体的には、カラーフィルタの画素形成用の着色組成物として好ましく用いることができる。また、本発明の着色組成物は、固体撮像素子用の着色組成物として好ましく用いることができ、固体撮像素子に用いられるカラーフィルタの画素形成用の着色組成物としてより好ましく用いることができる。また、本発明の着色組成物は、表示装置用の着色組成物として好ましく用いることもでき、表示装置に用いられるカラーフィルタの画素形成用の着色組成物としてより好ましく用いることができる。また、本発明の着色組成物は、カラーマイクロレンズの形成用の組成物として用いることもできる。カラーマイクロレンズの製造方法としては、特開2018-010162号公報に記載された方法などが挙げられる。 The coloring composition of the present invention can be preferably used as a coloring composition for a color filter. Specifically, it can be preferably used as a coloring composition for forming pixels of a color filter. Further, the coloring composition of the present invention can be preferably used as a coloring composition for a solid-state imaging device, and can be more preferably used as a coloring composition for forming pixels of a color filter used for a solid-state imaging device. The coloring composition of the present invention can also be preferably used as a coloring composition for a display device, and can be more preferably used as a coloring composition for forming pixels of a color filter used for a display device. The coloring composition of the present invention can also be used as a composition for forming color microlenses. Examples of the method for manufacturing a color microlens include the method described in JP-A-2018-010162.
 以下、本発明の着色組成物について詳細に説明する。 Hereinafter, the coloring composition of the present invention will be described in detail.
<<着色剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は着色剤を含有する。本発明では、着色剤として、式(1)で表される化合物および式(2)で表される化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含むものが用いられる。以下、式(1)で表される化合物を化合物(1)ともいう。また、式(2)で表される化合物を化合物(2)ともいう。
<< colorant >>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a coloring agent. In the present invention, a colorant containing at least one selected from the compound represented by the formula (1) and the compound represented by the formula (2) is used. Hereinafter, the compound represented by the formula (1) is also referred to as the compound (1). The compound represented by the formula (2) is also referred to as the compound (2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 式(1)中、X~Xはそれぞれ独立して、置換基を表す。X~Xが表す置換基としては、後述する置換基Tが挙げられる。X~Xが表す置換基は、ハロゲン原子、ニトロ基、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環基、-ORt、-SRt、-SONRtRtが好ましく、ハロゲン原子またはアルキル基がより好ましく、ハロゲン原子が更に好ましい。RtおよびRtは、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基または複素環基を表し、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基または複素環基が好ましい。 In formula (1), X 1 to X 4 each independently represent a substituent. Examples of the substituent represented by X 1 to X 4 include the substituent T described later. The substituent represented by X 1 to X 4 is preferably a halogen atom, a nitro group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, —ORt 1 , —SRt 1 , or —SO 2 NRt 1 Rt 2 and is a halogen atom or an alkyl group. Is more preferable, and a halogen atom is still more preferable. Rt 1 and Rt 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group.
 式(1)中、Zはヒドロキシ基、ハロゲン原子、-OP(=O)R、または-O-SiRを表し、R~Rはそれぞれ独立して、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、またはアリールオキシ基を表し、RとR、RとRは互いに結合して環を形成しても良い。 In the formula (1), Z 1 represents a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, —OP (═O) R 1 R 2 , or —O—SiR 3 R 4 R 5 , and R 1 to R 5 are each independently It represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, or an aryloxy group, and R 1 and R 2 , and R 3 and R 4 may combine with each other to form a ring.
 Zは、ヒドロキシ基、-OP(=O)Rまたは-O-SiRが好ましく、-OP(=O)Rがより好ましく、RおよびRはそれぞれ独立してアリール基である-OP(=O)Rが更に好ましい。Zが表すハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子が挙げられる。 Z 1 is preferably a hydroxy group, —OP (═O) R 1 R 2 or —O—SiR 3 R 4 R 5, more preferably —OP (═O) R 1 R 2 , and R 1 and R 2 are More preferred is —OP (═O) R 1 R 2 which is each independently an aryl group. Examples of the halogen atom represented by Z 1 include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom.
 R~Rが表すアルキル基およびアルコキシ基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~8が更に好ましい。アルキル基およびアルコキシ基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖または分岐が好ましく、直鎖がより好ましい。R~Rが表すアリール基およびアリールオキシ基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~12が更に好ましい。R~Rが表すアルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基およびアリールオキシ基はさらに置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては後述する置換基Tが挙げられる。 The alkyl group and the alkoxy group represented by R 1 to R 5 preferably have 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably have 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and further preferably have 1 to 8 carbon atoms. The alkyl group and the alkoxy group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear. The aryl group and aryloxy group represented by R 1 to R 5 preferably have 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably have 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and further preferably have 6 to 12 carbon atoms. The alkyl group, aryl group, alkoxy group and aryloxy group represented by R 1 to R 5 may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described later.
 RとR、RとRは互いに結合して環を形成しても良い。すなわち、Zが-OP(=O)Rである場合、RとRは互いに結合して環を形成しても良い。また、Zが-O-SiRである場合、RとRは互いに結合して環を形成しても良い。これらの基同士が結合して形成される環は、脂肪族環、芳香族環、複素環のいずれであってもよい。 R 1 and R 2 , and R 3 and R 4 may combine with each other to form a ring. That is, when Z 1 is —OP (═O) R 1 R 2 , R 1 and R 2 may combine with each other to form a ring. When Z 1 is —O—SiR 3 R 4 R 5 , R 3 and R 4 may combine with each other to form a ring. The ring formed by combining these groups may be an aliphatic ring, an aromatic ring, or a heterocycle.
 式(1)中、m1~m4は、それぞれ独立して0~4の整数を表し、0または1が好ましく、0がより好ましい。m1~m4が2以上のとき、X~Xはそれぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In formula (1), m1 to m4 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0. When m1 to m4 are 2 or more, X 1 to X 4 may be the same or different.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 式(2)中、X~X12はそれぞれ独立して、置換基を表す。X~X12が表す置換基としては、後述する置換基Tが挙げられる。X~X12が表す置換基は、ハロゲン原子、ニトロ基、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環基、-ORt、-SRt、-SONRtRtが好ましく、ハロゲン原子またはアルキル基がより好ましく、ハロゲン原子が更に好ましい。RtおよびRtは、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基または複素環基を表し、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基または複素環基が好ましい。 In formula (2), X 5 to X 12 each independently represent a substituent. Examples of the substituent represented by X 5 to X 12 include the substituent T described later. The substituent represented by X 5 to X 12 is preferably a halogen atom, a nitro group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, —ORt 1 , —SRt 1 , or —SO 2 NRt 1 Rt 2 and is a halogen atom or an alkyl group. Is more preferable, and a halogen atom is still more preferable. Rt 1 and Rt 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group.
 Lは、-O-SiR-O-、-O-SiR-O-SiR-O-、または-O-P(=O)R10-O-を表し、R~R10はそれぞれ独立して、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、またはアリールオキシ基を表す。 L A represents -O-SiR 6 R 7 -O-, -O-SiR 6 R 7 -O-SiR 8 R 9 -O-, or -OP (= O) R 10 -O-, R 6 to R 10 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, or an aryloxy group.
 Lは、-O-SiR-O-または-O-P(=O)R10-O-が好ましく、-O-P(=O)R10-O-がより好ましく、R10がアリール基である-O-P(=O)R10-O-が更に好ましい。 L A is preferably —O—SiR 6 R 7 —O— or —OP (═O) R 10 —O—, more preferably —OP (═O) R 10 —O—, and R 10 Is more preferably an aryl group, —OP (═O) R 10 —O—.
 R~R10が表すアルキル基およびアルコキシ基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~8が更に好ましい。アルキル基およびアルコキシ基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖または分岐が好ましく、直鎖がより好ましい。R~R10が表すアリール基およびアリールオキシ基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~12が更に好ましい。R~Rが表すアルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基およびアリールオキシ基はさらに置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては後述する置換基Tが挙げられる。 The alkyl group and the alkoxy group represented by R 6 to R 10 preferably have 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably have 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and further preferably have 1 to 8 carbon atoms. The alkyl group and the alkoxy group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear. The aryl group and the aryloxy group represented by R 6 to R 10 preferably have 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably have 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and further preferably have 6 to 12 carbon atoms. The alkyl group, aryl group, alkoxy group and aryloxy group represented by R 1 to R 5 may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described later.
 式(2)中、m5~m12は、それぞれ独立して0~4の整数を表し、0または1が好ましく、0がより好ましい。m5~m12が2以上のとき、X~X12はそれぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In formula (2), m5 to m12 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0. When m5 to m12 are 2 or more, X 5 to X 12 may be the same or different.
(置換基T)
 置換基Tとしては、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、複素環基、-ORt、-CORt、-COORt、-OCORt、-NRtRt、-NHCORt、-CONRtRt、-NHCONRtRt、-NHCOORt、-SRt、-SORt、-SOORt、-NHSORtまたは-SONRtRtが挙げられる。RtおよびRtは、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基または複素環基を表す。RtとRtが結合して環を形成してもよい。
(Substituent T)
Examples of the substituent T include a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, -ORt 1 , -CORt 1 , -COORt 1 , -OCORt 1 , -NRt 1 Rt 2 , -NHCORt 1 , -CONRt 1 Rt 2 , -NHCONRt 1 Rt 2 , -NHCOORt 1 , -SRt 1 , -SO 2 Rt 1 , -SO 2 ORt 1 , -NHSO 2 Rt 1 or -SO 2 NRt 1 Rt 2 may be mentioned. Rt 1 and Rt 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group. Rt 1 and Rt 2 may combine to form a ring.
 ハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子が挙げられる。
 アルキル基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~8が更に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖または分岐が好ましく、直鎖がより好ましい。
 アルケニル基の炭素数は、2~30が好ましく、2~12がより好ましく、2~8が特に好ましい。アルケニル基は直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖または分岐が好ましく、直鎖がより好ましい。
 アルキニル基の炭素数は、2~30が好ましく、2~25がより好ましい。アルキニル基は直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖または分岐が好ましく、直鎖がより好ましい。
 アリール基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~12が更に好ましい。
 複素環基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。複素環基は、単環または縮合数が2~4の縮合環が好ましい。複素環基の環を構成するヘテロ原子の数は1~3が好ましい。複素環基の環を構成するヘテロ原子は、窒素原子、酸素原子または硫黄原子が好ましい。複素環基の環を構成する炭素原子の数は3~30が好ましく、3~18がより好ましく、3~12がより好ましい。
 アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基および複素環基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、上述した置換基Tで説明した置換基が挙げられる。
Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom.
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and further preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
The alkenyl group preferably has 2 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably has 2 to 12 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably has 2 to 8 carbon atoms. The alkenyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
The alkynyl group preferably has 2 to 30 carbon atoms, and more preferably has 2 to 25 carbon atoms. The alkynyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
The aryl group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and further preferably has 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
The heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring. The heterocyclic group is preferably a single ring or a condensed ring having 2 to 4 condensed rings. The number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3. The hetero atom forming the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom. The number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably 3 to 30, more preferably 3 to 18, and even more preferably 3 to 12.
The alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group, aryl group and heterocyclic group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include the substituents described above for the substituent T.
 化合物(1)、化合物(2)の具体例としては、下記構造の化合物、特開2015-063593号公報の段落番号0046~0053に記載の化合物、特開2013-171063号公報の段落番号0151~0169に記載の化合物、特開2016-170370号公報の段落番号0251~0258に記載の化合物が挙げられる。なお、以下の構造の化合物のうちPG62はカラーインデックスピグメントグリーン62であり、PG63はカラーインデックスピグメントグリーン63である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Specific examples of the compound (1) and the compound (2) include compounds having the following structures, compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0046 to 0053 of JP-A-2005-063593, paragraphs No. 0151 to JP-A-2013-171063. And the compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0251 to 0258 of JP-A-2016-170370. In the compounds having the following structures, PG62 is color index pigment green 62, and PG63 is color index pigment green 63.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 着色剤中における、化合物(1)と化合物(2)との合計の含有量は、30質量%以上であることが好ましく、40質量%以上であることがより好ましく、50質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は、100質量%とすることができ、90質量%以下とすることもでき、80質量%以下とすることもできる。 The total content of the compound (1) and the compound (2) in the colorant is preferably 30% by mass or more, more preferably 40% by mass or more, and 50% by mass or more. Is more preferable. The upper limit can be 100% by mass, 90% by mass or less, and 80% by mass or less.
 本発明で用いられる着色剤は、上述した化合物(1)および化合物(2)の他に、黄色着色剤を含むことが好ましい。この態様によれば、緑色の画素に適した分光特性を有する膜を形成しやすい。また、着色組成物中における黄色着色剤の含有量は、上述した化合物(1)と化合物(2)との合計100質量部に対して5~60質量部であることが好ましい。上限は、55質量部以下であることが好ましく、50質量部以下であることがより好ましく、45質量部以下であることが更に好ましい。下限は、10質量部以上であることが好ましく、15質量部以上であることがより好ましく、20質量部以上であることが更に好ましい。 The colorant used in the present invention preferably contains a yellow colorant in addition to the compound (1) and the compound (2) described above. According to this aspect, it is easy to form a film having a spectral characteristic suitable for a green pixel. Further, the content of the yellow colorant in the coloring composition is preferably 5 to 60 parts by mass based on 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the compound (1) and the compound (2) described above. The upper limit is preferably 55 parts by mass or less, more preferably 50 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 45 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, more preferably 15 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 20 parts by mass or more.
 黄色着色剤としては、アゾ化合物、キノフタロン化合物、イソインドリノン化合物、イソインドリン化合物、アントラキノン化合物等が挙げられる。黄色着色剤は、顔料であってもよく、染料であってもよい。 Examples of yellow colorants include azo compounds, quinophthalone compounds, isoindolinone compounds, isoindoline compounds, anthraquinone compounds and the like. The yellow colorant may be a pigment or a dye.
 黄色顔料としては、カラーインデックス(C.I.)ピグメントイエロー1,2,3,4,5,6,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,20,24,31,32,34,35,35:1,36,36:1,37,37:1,40,42,43,53,55,60,61,62,63,65,73,74,77,81,83,86,93,94,95,97,98,100,101,104,106,108,109,110,113,114,115,116,117,118,119,120,123,125,126,127,128,129,137,138,139,147,148,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,161,162,164,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214,231,232等が挙げられる。 Examples of the yellow pigment include color index (CI) pigment yellow 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 24, 31. , 32, 34, 35, 35: 1, 36, 36: 1, 37, 37: 1, 40, 42, 43, 53, 55, 60, 61, 62, 63, 65, 73, 74, 77, 81. , 83, 86, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 100, 101, 104, 106, 108, 109, 110, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 123, 125, 126. , 127, 128, 129, 137, 138, 139, 147, 148, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 155, 156, 161, 162, 164, 166, 167, 168, 16 , And the like 170,171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214,231,232.
 また、黄色顔料として、特開2017-201003号公報に記載されている顔料、特開2017-197719号公報に記載されている顔料を用いることができる。 As the yellow pigment, the pigment described in JP-A-2017-201003 and the pigment described in JP-A-2017-197719 can be used.
 また、黄色着色剤として、特開2013-054339号公報の段落番号0011~0034に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2014-026228号公報の段落番号0013~0058に記載のキノフタロン化合物などを用いることもできる。 As the yellow colorant, the quinophthalone compounds described in paragraphs 0011 to 0034 of JP2013-054339A and the quinophthalone compounds described in paragraphs 0013 to 0058 of JP2014-026228A can be used. .
 本発明で用いられる着色剤は、上述した化合物(1)および化合物(2)の他に、カラーインデックスピグメントイエロー138、カラーインデックスピグメントイエロー139、カラーインデックスピグメントイエロー150及びカラーインデックスピグメントイエロー231から選択される少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましい。また、これらの着色剤を含有する場合、その含有量は、上述した化合物(1)と化合物(2)との合計100質量部に対して5~60質量部であることが好ましい。上限は、55質量部以下であることが好ましく、50質量部以下であることがより好ましく、45質量部以下であることが更に好ましい。下限は、10質量部以上であることが好ましく、15質量部以上であることがより好ましく、20質量部以上であることが更に好ましい。 The colorant used in the present invention is selected from Color Index Pigment Yellow 138, Color Index Pigment Yellow 139, Color Index Pigment Yellow 150, and Color Index Pigment Yellow 231 in addition to the above-described compound (1) and compound (2). It is preferable to include at least one of When these colorants are contained, the content is preferably 5 to 60 parts by mass based on 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the compound (1) and the compound (2) described above. The upper limit is preferably 55 parts by mass or less, more preferably 50 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 45 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, more preferably 15 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 20 parts by mass or more.
 本発明で用いられる着色剤は、上述した化合物(1)および化合物(2)の他に、下記式(3)で表される化合物(以下、化合物(3)ともいう)を含むことも好ましい。化合物(3)は黄色着色剤として好ましく用いることができる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
The colorant used in the present invention preferably contains a compound represented by the following formula (3) (hereinafter, also referred to as compound (3)) in addition to the above-described compound (1) and compound (2). The compound (3) can be preferably used as a yellow colorant.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 式(3)中、Ry~Ry13は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、スルホ基、スルホ基の塩、カルボキシル基、カルボキシル基の塩、フタルイミドメチル基、またはスルファモイル基を表し、ハロゲン原子を表すことが好ましい。 In formula (3), Ry 1 to Ry 13 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, a sulfo group, a salt of a sulfo group, a carboxyl group, a salt of a carboxyl group, or phthalimidomethyl. Group or sulfamoyl group, and preferably a halogen atom.
 ハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子が挙げられ、塩素原子、臭素原子が好ましく、塩素原子がより好ましい。アルキル基およびアルコキシ基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~8が更に好ましい。アルキル基およびアルコキシ基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖または分岐が好ましく、直鎖がより好ましい。アリール基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~12が更に好ましい。スルホ基の塩、および、カルボキシル基の塩について、塩を構成する原子または原子団としては、アルカリ金属イオン(Li、Na、Kなど)、アルカリ土類金属イオン(Ca2+、Mg2+など)、アンモニウムイオン、イミダゾリウムイオン、ピリジニウムイオン、ホスホニウムイオンなどが挙げられる。 Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom, a chlorine atom and a bromine atom are preferable, and a chlorine atom is more preferable. The carbon number of the alkyl group and the alkoxy group is preferably 1 to 30, more preferably 1 to 15, and further preferably 1 to 8. The alkyl group and the alkoxy group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and further preferably has 6 to 12 carbon atoms. Regarding the salt of a sulfo group and the salt of a carboxyl group, an atom or an atomic group constituting the salt is an alkali metal ion (Li + , Na + , K +, etc.), an alkaline earth metal ion (Ca 2+ , Mg 2+). Etc.), ammonium ion, imidazolium ion, pyridinium ion, phosphonium ion and the like.
 式(3)中、Ry~Ryのうち隣接した2つの基同士は結合して環を形成していてもよく、Ry10~Ry13のうち隣接した2つの基同士は結合して環を形成していてもよい。なかでも、Ry~Ry、および、Ry10~Ry13のうち隣接した2つの基の少なくとも一組は結合して環を形成していることが好ましい。形成される環は、脂肪族環、芳香族環、複素環のいずれであってもよく、芳香族環であることが好ましい。芳香族環としては、芳香族炭化水素環および芳香族複素環が挙げられ、芳香族炭化水素環が好ましい。芳香族炭化水素環としては、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環、アントラセン環、フェナントレン環等が挙げられ、ベンゼン環が好ましい。 In formula (3), two adjacent groups of Ry 1 to Ry 4 may be bonded to each other to form a ring, and two adjacent groups of Ry 10 to Ry 13 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. May be formed. Among them, at least one set of two adjacent groups of Ry 1 to Ry 4 and Ry 10 to Ry 13 is preferably bonded to form a ring. The ring formed may be an aliphatic ring, an aromatic ring, or a heterocycle, and is preferably an aromatic ring. Examples of the aromatic ring include an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and an aromatic heterocycle, and an aromatic hydrocarbon ring is preferable. Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, an anthracene ring and a phenanthrene ring, and a benzene ring is preferable.
 化合物(3)は、下記式(3a)~(3c)のいずれかで表される化合物であることが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
The compound (3) is preferably a compound represented by any of the following formulas (3a) to (3c).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 式(3a)~(3c)において、Ry~Ry13、および、Ry101~Ry108は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、スルホ基、スルホ基の塩、カルボキシル基、カルボキシル基の塩、フタルイミドメチル基、またはスルファモイル基を表し、ハロゲン原子を表すことが好ましい。 In formulas (3a) to (3c), Ry 1 to Ry 13 and Ry 101 to Ry 108 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, a sulfo group or a sulfo group. It represents a salt, a carboxyl group, a salt of a carboxyl group, a phthalimidomethyl group, or a sulfamoyl group, and preferably represents a halogen atom.
 化合物(3)の具体例としては、後述の実施例に記載の化合物および、国際公開第2012/128233号の段落番号0073に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the compound (3) include the compounds described in Examples described later and the compound described in paragraph No. 0073 of International Publication No. 2012/128233.
 本発明で用いられる着色剤が化合物(3)を更に含む場合、その含有量は、上述した化合物(1)と化合物(2)との合計100質量部に対して5~60質量部であることが好ましい。上限は、55質量部以下であることが好ましく、50質量部以下であることがより好ましく、45質量部以下であることが更に好ましい。下限は、10質量部以上であることが好ましく、15質量部以上であることがより好ましく、20質量部以上であることが更に好ましい。 When the colorant used in the present invention further contains the compound (3), the content thereof is 5 to 60 parts by mass based on 100 parts by mass of the total of the compound (1) and the compound (2) described above. Is preferred. The upper limit is preferably 55 parts by mass or less, more preferably 50 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 45 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, more preferably 15 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 20 parts by mass or more.
 本発明で用いられる着色剤は、上述した化合物以外の着色剤(以下、他の着色剤ともいう)を更に含有することができる。他の着色剤としては、例えば、以下が挙げられる。 The colorant used in the present invention may further contain a colorant other than the above-mentioned compounds (hereinafter, also referred to as other colorant). Examples of other colorants include the following.
 C.I.ピグメントオレンジ2,5,13,16,17:1,31,34,36,38,43,46,48,49,51,52,55,59,60,61,62,64,71,73等(以上、オレンジ色顔料)、
 C.I.ピグメントレッド1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10,14,17,22,23,31,38,41,48:1,48:2,48:3,48:4,49,49:1,49:2,52:1,52:2,53:1,57:1,60:1,63:1,66,67,81:1,81:2,81:3,83,88,90,105,112,119,122,123,144,146,149,150,155,166,168,169,170,171,172,175,176,177,178,179,184,185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,270,272,279,294等(以上、赤色顔料)、
 C.I.ピグメントグリーン7,10,36,37,58,59等(以上、緑色顔料)、
 C.I.ピグメントバイオレット1,19,23,27,32,37,42,60,61等(以上、紫色顔料)、
 C.I.ピグメントブルー1,2,15,15:1,15:2,15:3,15:4,15:6,16,22,29,60,64,66,79,80,87,88等(以上、青色顔料)。
C. I. Pigment Orange 2, 5, 13, 16, 17, 17: 1, 31, 34, 36, 38, 43, 46, 48, 49, 51, 52, 55, 59, 60, 61, 62, 64, 71, 73, etc. (Above, orange pigment),
C. I. Pigment Red 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10,14,17,22,23,31,38,41,48: 1,48: 2,48: 3,48: 4 49,49: 1,49: 2,52: 1,52: 2,53: 1,57: 1,60: 1,63: 1,66,67,81: 1,81: 2,81: 3 83, 88, 90, 105, 112, 119, 122, 123, 144, 146, 149, 150, 155, 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 184. 185, 187, 188, 190, 200, 202, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 216, 220, 224, 226, 242, 246, 254, 255, 264, 270, 272, 279, 294, etc. , Red pigment ,
C. I. Pigment Green 7, 10, 36, 37, 58, 59 etc. (above, green pigment),
C. I. Pigment Violet 1, 19, 23, 27, 32, 37, 42, 60, 61 etc. (above, purple pigment),
C. I. Pigment Blue 1, 2, 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4, 15: 6, 16, 22, 22, 29, 60, 64, 66, 79, 80, 87, 88 etc. , Blue pigment).
 また、緑色顔料として、1分子中のハロゲン原子数が平均10~14個であり、臭素原子数が平均8~12個であり、塩素原子数が平均2~5個であるハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料を用いることもできる。具体例としては、国際公開第2015/118720号に記載の化合物が挙げられる。また、緑色顔料としてCN106909027Aに記載の化合物、リン酸エステルを配位子として有するフタロシアニン化合物などを用いることもできる。 Further, as a green pigment, a halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment having an average number of halogen atoms in one molecule of 10 to 14, an average number of bromine atoms of 8 to 12 and an average number of chlorine atoms of 2 to 5 Can also be used. Specific examples include the compounds described in WO 2015/118720. Further, the compound described in CN1069009027A, a phthalocyanine compound having a phosphoric acid ester as a ligand, or the like can be used as a green pigment.
 赤色顔料として、特開2017-201384号公報に記載の構造中に少なくとも1つ臭素原子が置換したジケトピロロピロール系顔料、特許第6248838号の段落番号0016~0022に記載のジケトピロロピロール系顔料などを用いることもできる。また、赤色顔料として、芳香族環に対して、酸素原子、硫黄原子または窒素原子が結合した基が導入された芳香族環基がジケトピロロピロール骨格に結合した構造を有する化合物を用いることもできる。 As the red pigment, a diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment in which at least one bromine atom is substituted in the structure described in JP-A-2017-201384, a diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment described in paragraph Nos. 0016 to 0022 of Patent No. 6248838. A pigment or the like can also be used. As the red pigment, it is also possible to use a compound having a structure in which an aromatic ring group in which a group having an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or a nitrogen atom bonded to the aromatic ring is introduced is bound to a diketopyrrolopyrrole skeleton. it can.
 また、他の着色剤として、染料を用いることもできる。染料としては特に制限はなく、公知の染料が使用できる。例えば、ピラゾールアゾ系、アニリノアゾ系、トリアリールメタン系、アントラキノン系、アントラピリドン系、ベンジリデン系、オキソノール系、ピラゾロトリアゾールアゾ系、ピリドンアゾ系、シアニン系、フェノチアジン系、ピロロピラゾールアゾメチン系、キサンテン系、フタロシアニン系、ベンゾピラン系、インジゴ系、ピロメテン系等の染料が挙げられる。また、特開2012-158649号公報に記載のチアゾール化合物、特開2011-184493号公報に記載のアゾ化合物、特開2011-145540号公報に記載のアゾ化合物も好ましく用いることができる。また、特開2018-012863号公報に記載の分子内イミド型のキサンテン染料などを用いることもできる。 Also, dyes can be used as other colorants. The dye is not particularly limited, and known dyes can be used. For example, pyrazole azo type, anilino azo type, triaryl methane type, anthraquinone type, anthrapyridone type, benzylidene type, oxonol type, pyrazolotriazole azo type, pyridone azo type, cyanine type, phenothiazine type, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine type, xanthene type, Examples thereof include phthalocyanine-based dyes, benzopyran-based dyes, indigo-based dyes, and pyrromethene-based dyes. Further, the thiazole compound described in JP 2012-158649 A, the azo compound described in JP 2011-18449 A, and the azo compound described in JP 2011-145540 A can also be preferably used. Further, the intramolecular imide type xanthene dye described in JP-A-2018-012863 can also be used.
 また、他の着色剤として色素多量体を用いることもできる。色素多量体は、溶剤に溶解して用いられる染料であることが好ましいが、色素多量体は、粒子を形成していてもよく、色素多量体が粒子である場合は通常溶剤に分散した状態で用いられる。粒子状態の色素多量体は、例えば乳化重合によって得ることができ、特開2015-214682号公報に記載されている化合物および製造方法が具体例として挙げられる。色素多量体は、一分子中に、色素構造を2以上有するものであり、色素構造を3以上有することが好ましい。上限は、特に限定はないが、100以下とすることもできる。一分子中に有する複数の色素構造は、同一の色素構造であってもよく、異なる色素構造であってもよい。色素多量体の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、2000~50000が好ましい。下限は、3000以上がより好ましく、6000以上がさらに好ましい。上限は、30000以下がより好ましく、20000以下がさらに好ましい。色素多量体は、特開2011-213925号公報、特開2013-041097号公報、特開2015-028144号公報、特開2015-030742号公報、国際公開第2016/031442号等に記載されている化合物を用いることもできる。 Also, a dye multimer can be used as another colorant. The dye multimer is preferably a dye used by being dissolved in a solvent, but the dye multimer may form particles, and when the dye multimer is particles, it is usually in a state of being dispersed in a solvent. Used. The dye multimer in the form of particles can be obtained, for example, by emulsion polymerization, and specific examples thereof include the compounds and production methods described in JP-A-2015-214682. The dye multimer has two or more dye structures in one molecule, and preferably has three or more dye structures. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but may be 100 or less. The plurality of dye structures contained in one molecule may be the same dye structure or different dye structures. The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the dye multimer is preferably 2000 to 50,000. The lower limit is more preferably 3,000 or more, still more preferably 6000 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 30,000 or less, further preferably 20,000 or less. Dye multimers are described in JP2011-213925A, JP2013-041097A, JP2015-028144A, JP2005-030742A, WO2016 / 031442 and the like. Compounds can also be used.
 着色剤の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中35質量%以上であることが好ましく、40質量%以上がより好ましく、45質量%以上が更に好ましく、50質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限は、70質量%以下が好ましく、65質量%以下がより好ましい。 The content of the colorant is preferably 35% by mass or more, more preferably 40% by mass or more, further preferably 45% by mass or more, particularly preferably 50% by mass or more, based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. The upper limit is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 65% by mass or less.
 本発明の着色組成物において、化合物(1)と化合物(2)との合計の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中25質量%以上であることが好ましく、30質量%以上がより好ましく、35質量%以上が更に好ましく、40質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限は、65質量%以下が好ましく、60質量%以下がより好ましい。 In the colored composition of the present invention, the total content of the compound (1) and the compound (2) is preferably 25% by mass or more, and more preferably 30% by mass or more based on the total solid content of the colored composition. , 35% by mass or more is more preferable, and 40% by mass or more is particularly preferable. The upper limit is preferably 65% by mass or less, and more preferably 60% by mass or less.
<<顔料誘導体>>
 本発明の着色組成物は顔料誘導体を含有することができる。顔料誘導体としては、発色団の一部分を、酸基、塩基性基またはフタルイミドメチル基で置換した構造を有する化合物が挙げられる。顔料誘導体を構成する発色団としては、キノリン骨格、ベンゾイミダゾロン骨格、ジケトピロロピロール骨格、アゾ骨格、フタロシアニン骨格、アンスラキノン骨格、キナクリドン骨格、ジオキサジン骨格、ペリノン骨格、ペリレン骨格、チオインジゴ骨格、イソインドリン骨格、イソインドリノン骨格、キノフタロン骨格、スレン骨格、金属錯体系骨格等が挙げられ、キノリン骨格、ベンゾイミダゾロン骨格、ジケトピロロピロール骨格、アゾ骨格、キノフタロン骨格、イソインドリン骨格およびフタロシアニン骨格が好ましく、アゾ骨格およびベンゾイミダゾロン骨格がより好ましい。顔料誘導体が有する酸基としては、スルホ基、カルボキシル基が好ましく、スルホ基がより好ましい。顔料誘導体が有する塩基性基としては、アミノ基が好ましく、三級アミノ基がより好ましい。
<< Pigment derivative >>
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain a pigment derivative. Examples of the pigment derivative include compounds having a structure in which a part of the chromophore is substituted with an acid group, a basic group or a phthalimidomethyl group. The chromophore constituting the pigment derivative, quinoline skeleton, benzimidazolone skeleton, diketopyrrolopyrrole skeleton, azo skeleton, phthalocyanine skeleton, anthraquinone skeleton, quinacridone skeleton, dioxazine skeleton, perinone skeleton, perylene skeleton, thioindigo skeleton, iso Indoline skeleton, isoindolinone skeleton, quinophthalone skeleton, slene skeleton, metal complex-based skeleton, etc. are mentioned, and quinoline skeleton, benzimidazolone skeleton, diketopyrrolopyrrole skeleton, azo skeleton, quinophthalone skeleton, isoindoline skeleton and phthalocyanine skeleton are included. The azo skeleton and the benzimidazolone skeleton are more preferable. The acid group contained in the pigment derivative is preferably a sulfo group or a carboxyl group, more preferably a sulfo group. As the basic group contained in the pigment derivative, an amino group is preferable, and a tertiary amino group is more preferable.
 本発明において、顔料誘導体として可視透明性に優れた顔料誘導体(以下、透明顔料誘導体ともいう)を含有することもできる。透明顔料誘導体の400~700nmの波長領域におけるモル吸光係数の最大値(εmax)は3000L・mol-1・cm-1以下であることが好ましく、1000L・mol-1・cm-1以下であることがより好ましく、100L・mol-1・cm-1以下であることがさらに好ましい。εmaxの下限は、例えば1L・mol-1・cm-1以上であり、10L・mol-1・cm-1以上でもよい。 In the present invention, a pigment derivative having excellent visible transparency (hereinafter, also referred to as a transparent pigment derivative) may be contained as the pigment derivative. The maximum value of the molar extinction coefficient in the wavelength region of 400 ~ 700 nm of the transparent pigment derivative (.epsilon.max) is that it is preferable, 1000L · mol -1 · cm -1 or less is not more than 3000L · mol -1 · cm -1 Is more preferable, and 100 L · mol −1 · cm −1 or less is further preferable. The lower limit of εmax is, for example, 1 L · mol −1 · cm −1 or more, and may be 10 L · mol −1 · cm −1 or more.
 顔料誘導体の具体例としては、特開2011-252065号公報の段落番号0162~0183に記載された化合物や、特開2003-081972号公報に記載された化合物が挙げられる。また、透明顔料誘導体の具体例としては、下記構造の化合物などが挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Specific examples of the pigment derivative include the compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0162 to 0183 of JP 2011-252065 A and the compounds described in JP 2003-081972 A. In addition, specific examples of the transparent pigment derivative include compounds having the following structures.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 顔料誘導体の含有量は、化合物(1)と化合物(2)との合計100質量部に対して1~30質量部が好ましく、3~20質量部が更に好ましい。また、顔料誘導体と着色剤との合計の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中35質量%以上であることが好ましく、40質量%以上がより好ましく、45質量%以上が更に好ましく、50質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限は、70質量%以下が好ましく、65質量%以下がより好ましい。顔料誘導体は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。 The content of the pigment derivative is preferably 1 to 30 parts by mass, more preferably 3 to 20 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the compound (1) and the compound (2). The total content of the pigment derivative and the colorant is preferably 35% by mass or more, more preferably 40% by mass or more, further preferably 45% by mass or more, and 50% by mass based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. A mass% or more is particularly preferable. The upper limit is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 65% by mass or less. As the pigment derivative, only one kind may be used, or two or more kinds may be used in combination.
<<樹脂>>
 本発明の着色組成物は樹脂を含む。樹脂は、例えば、顔料などの粒子を組成物中で分散させる用途や、バインダーの用途で配合される。なお、主に粒子等を組成物中で分散させるために用いられる樹脂を分散剤ともいう。ただし、樹脂のこのような用途は一例であって、このような用途以外を目的として樹脂を使用することもできる。
<< resin >>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a resin. The resin is blended, for example, for the purpose of dispersing particles such as a pigment in the composition and for the use of a binder. The resin mainly used to disperse particles and the like in the composition is also referred to as a dispersant. However, such an application of the resin is an example, and the resin may be used for the purpose other than such an application.
 樹脂としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、(メタ)アクリルアミド樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、エン・チオール樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリアリレート樹脂、ポリスルホン樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン樹脂、ポリフェニレン樹脂、ポリアリーレンエーテルホスフィンオキシド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、ポリオレフィン樹脂、環状オレフィン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、スチレン樹脂、シロキサン樹脂などが挙げられる。 Examples of the resin include (meth) acrylic resin, (meth) acrylamide resin, epoxy resin, ene / thiol resin, polycarbonate resin, polyether resin, polyarylate resin, polysulfone resin, polyethersulfone resin, polyphenylene resin, polyarylene. Examples thereof include ether phosphine oxide resin, polyimide resin, polyamideimide resin, polyolefin resin, cyclic olefin resin, polyester resin, styrene resin, and siloxane resin.
 樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、2000~2000000が好ましい。上限は、1000000以下が好ましく、500000以下がより好ましい。下限は、3000以上が好ましく、4000以上がより好ましく、5000以上が更に好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin is preferably 2000 to 2000000. The upper limit is preferably 1,000,000 or less, more preferably 500000 or less. The lower limit is preferably 3,000 or more, more preferably 4,000 or more, still more preferably 5,000 or more.
 本発明の着色組成物は、樹脂として酸基を有する樹脂を用いることができる。酸基としては、例えば、カルボキシル基、リン酸基、スルホ基、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。酸基を有する樹脂はアルカリ可溶性樹脂や、分散剤として用いることもできる。酸基を有する樹脂の酸価は、30~500mgKOH/gが好ましい。下限は、50mgKOH/g以上がより好ましく、70mgKOH/g以上が更に好ましい。上限は、400mgKOH/g以下がより好ましく、200mgKOH/g以下がさらに好ましく、150mgKOH/g以下が特に好ましく、120mgKOH/g以下が最も好ましい。 In the colored composition of the present invention, a resin having an acid group can be used as the resin. Examples of the acid group include a carboxyl group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfo group, a phenolic hydroxy group and the like. The resin having an acid group can be used as an alkali-soluble resin or a dispersant. The acid value of the resin having an acid group is preferably 30 to 500 mgKOH / g. The lower limit is more preferably 50 mgKOH / g or more, further preferably 70 mgKOH / g or more. The upper limit is more preferably 400 mgKOH / g or less, further preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, particularly preferably 150 mgKOH / g or less, and most preferably 120 mgKOH / g or less.
 本発明の着色組成物は、樹脂として下記式(ED1)で示される化合物および/または下記式(ED2)で表される化合物(以下、これらの化合物を「エーテルダイマー」と称することもある。)由来の繰り返し単位を含む樹脂を用いることができる。 The colored composition of the present invention is a compound represented by the following formula (ED1) and / or a compound represented by the following formula (ED2) as a resin (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as “ether dimer”). A resin containing a repeating unit derived from can be used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 式(ED1)中、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立して、水素原子または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~25の炭化水素基を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
 式(ED2)中、Rは、水素原子または炭素数1~30の有機基を表す。式(ED2)の具体例としては、特開2010-168539号公報の記載を参酌できる。
In formula (ED1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms, which may have a substituent.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
In formula (ED2), R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. As a specific example of the formula (ED2), the description in JP 2010-168539 A can be referred to.
 エーテルダイマーの具体例については、特開2013-029760号公報の段落番号0317を参酌することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 For specific examples of ether dimers, reference can be made to paragraph number 0317 of JP2013-029760A, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 本発明の着色組成物は、樹脂としてマレイミド構造を有する樹脂を用いることもできる。なお、本明細書において、マレイミド構造とは、マレイミド化合物に由来する構造のことである。マレイミド化合物としては、マレイミドおよび、N-置換マレイミドが挙げられる。N-置換マレイミドとしては、シクロヘキシルマレイミド、フェニルマレイミド、メチルマレイミド、エチルマレイミド、n-ブチルマレイミド、ラウリルマレイミド等が挙げられる。 In the colored composition of the present invention, a resin having a maleimide structure can be used as the resin. In addition, in this specification, a maleimide structure is a structure derived from a maleimide compound. Examples of the maleimide compound include maleimide and N-substituted maleimide. Examples of the N-substituted maleimide include cyclohexyl maleimide, phenyl maleimide, methyl maleimide, ethyl maleimide, n-butyl maleimide, lauryl maleimide and the like.
 マレイミド構造を有する樹脂は、マレイミド構造を有する繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることが好ましい。マレイミド構造は繰り返し単位の主鎖に含まれていてもよく、繰り返し単位の側鎖に含まれていてもよい。色ムラの抑制された膜を形成しやすいという理由から、マレイミド構造は繰り返し単位の主鎖に含まれていることが好ましい。 The resin having a maleimide structure is preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having a maleimide structure. The maleimide structure may be contained in the main chain of the repeating unit or may be contained in the side chain of the repeating unit. The maleimide structure is preferably contained in the main chain of the repeating unit because it is easy to form a film with suppressed color unevenness.
 本発明の着色組成物は、樹脂として式(I)で表される化合物由来の繰り返し単位(以下、繰り返し単位i1-1ともいう)を含む樹脂i(以下、樹脂iともいう)を含有することも好ましい。本発明の着色組成物が樹脂iを含むことで、色ムラの抑制された膜が得られやすい。樹脂iの全繰り返し単位中における繰り返し単位i1-1の含有量は5モル%以上であることが好ましく、10モル%以上であることがより好ましく、15モル%以上であることが更に好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
The colored composition of the present invention contains a resin i (hereinafter, also referred to as resin i) containing a repeating unit derived from the compound represented by the formula (I) (hereinafter, also referred to as repeating unit i1-1) as a resin. Is also preferable. When the coloring composition of the present invention contains the resin i, it is easy to obtain a film in which color unevenness is suppressed. The content of the repeating unit i1-1 in all repeating units of the resin i is preferably 5 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more, still more preferably 15 mol% or more.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 式中、Xiは、OまたはNHを表し、Oであることが好ましい。
 Riは水素原子またはメチル基を表す。
 Liは2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基としては、炭化水素基、複素環基、-NH-、-SO-、-SO-、-CO-、-O-、-COO-、-OCO-、-S-およびこれらの2以上を組み合わせてなる基が挙げられる。炭化水素基としては、アルキル基、アリール基などが挙げられる。複素環基は、非芳香族の複素環基であってもよく、芳香族複素環基であってもよい。複素環基は、5員環または6員環が好ましい。複素環基を構成するヘテロ原子の種類は窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子などが挙げられる。複素環基を構成するヘテロ原子の数は1~3が好ましい。複素環基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。炭化水素基および複素環基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、アルキル基、アリール基、ヒドロキシ基、ハロゲン原子などが挙げられる。
 Ri10は置換基を表す。Ri10が表す置換基としては、以下に示す置換基Tiが挙げられ、炭化水素基であることが好ましく、アリール基を置換基として有していてもよいアルキル基であることがより好ましい。
 mは0~2の整数を表し、0または1が好ましく、0がより好ましい。
 pは0以上の整数を表し、0~4が好ましく、0~3がより好ましく、0~2が更に好ましく、0または1がより一層好ましく、1が特に好ましい。
In the formula, Xi 1 represents O or NH, and is preferably O.
Ri 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
Li 1 represents a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include a hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group, —NH—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —S— and these. And a group formed by combining two or more of the above. Examples of the hydrocarbon group include an alkyl group and an aryl group. The heterocyclic group may be a non-aromatic heterocyclic group or an aromatic heterocyclic group. The heterocyclic group is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. Examples of the kind of hetero atom that constitutes the heterocyclic group include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom. The number of heteroatoms constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3. The heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring. The hydrocarbon group and the heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a hydroxy group, a halogen atom and the like.
Ri 10 represents a substituent. Examples of the substituent represented by Ri 10 include the following substituent Ti, which is preferably a hydrocarbon group, and more preferably an alkyl group which may have an aryl group as a substituent.
m represents an integer of 0 to 2, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
p represents an integer of 0 or more, preferably 0 to 4, more preferably 0 to 3, still more preferably 0 to 2, even more preferably 0 or 1, and particularly preferably 1.
(置換基Ti)
 置換基Tiとしては、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、炭化水素基、複素環基、-ORti、-CORti、-COORti、-OCORti、-NRtiRti、-NHCORti、-CONRtiRti、-NHCONRtiRti、-NHCOORti、-SRti、-SORti、-SOORti、-NHSORtiまたは-SONRtiRtiが挙げられる。RtiおよびRtiは、それぞれ独立して水素原子、炭化水素基または複素環基を表す。RtiとRtiが結合して環を形成してもよい。
(Substituent Ti)
Examples of the substituent Ti include a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group, —ORti 1 , —CORti 1 , —COORti 1 , —OCORti 1 , —NRti 1 Rti 2 , —NHCORti 1 , — CONRti 1 Rti 2 , —NHCONRti 1 Rti 2 , —NHCOORti 1 , —SRti 1 , —SO 2 Rti 1 , —SO 2 ORti 1 , —NHSO 2 Rti 1 or —SO 2 NRti 1 Rti 2 may be mentioned. Rti 1 and Rti 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a hydrocarbon group or a heterocyclic group. Rti 1 and Rti 2 may combine to form a ring.
 ハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子が挙げられる。
 炭化水素基としては、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基が挙げられる。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~8が更に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖または分岐が好ましく、分岐がより好ましい。
 アルケニル基の炭素数は、2~30が好ましく、2~12がより好ましく、2~8が特に好ましい。アルケニル基は直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。
 アルキニル基の炭素数は、2~30が好ましく、2~25がより好ましい。アルキニル基は直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。
 アリール基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~12が更に好ましい。
 複素環基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。複素環基は、単環または縮合数が2~4の縮合環が好ましい。複素環基の環を構成するヘテロ原子の数は1~3が好ましい。複素環基の環を構成するヘテロ原子は、窒素原子、酸素原子または硫黄原子が好ましい。複素環基の環を構成する炭素原子の数は3~30が好ましく、3~18がより好ましく、3~12がより好ましい。
 炭化水素基および複素環基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、上述した置換基Tiで説明した置換基が挙げられる。
Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom.
Examples of the hydrocarbon group include an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group and an aryl group. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and further preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, and more preferably branched.
The alkenyl group preferably has 2 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably has 2 to 12 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably has 2 to 8 carbon atoms. The alkenyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched.
The alkynyl group preferably has 2 to 30 carbon atoms, and more preferably has 2 to 25 carbon atoms. The alkynyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched.
The aryl group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and further preferably has 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
The heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring. The heterocyclic group is preferably a single ring or a condensed ring having 2 to 4 condensed rings. The number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3. The hetero atom forming the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom. The number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably 3 to 30, more preferably 3 to 18, and even more preferably 3 to 12.
The hydrocarbon group and the heterocyclic group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include the substituents described for the above-mentioned substituent Ti.
 式(I)で表される化合物は、下記式(I-1)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
The compound represented by the formula (I) is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (I-1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 Xiは、OまたはNHを表し、Oであることが好ましい。
 Riは水素原子またはメチル基を表す。
 Ri、RiおよびRi11はそれぞれ独立して炭化水素基を表す。
 RiおよびRiが表す炭化水素基は、アルキレン基またはアリーレン基であることが好ましく、アルキレン基であることがより好ましい。アルキレン基の炭素数は1~10であることが好ましく、1~5であることがより好ましく、1~3であることが更に好ましく、2または3であることが特に好ましい。Ri11が表す炭化水素基は、アリール基を置換基として有していてもよいアルキル基であることが好ましく、アリール基を置換基として有するアルキル基であることがより好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~10がより好ましく、1~5が更に好ましい。なお、アルキル基が置換基としてアリール基を有する場合におけるアルキル基の炭素数は、アルキル部位の炭素数のことを意味する。
 Ri12は置換基を表す。Ri12が表す置換基としては、上述した置換基Tiが挙げられる。
 nは0~15の整数を表し、0~5の整数であることが好ましく0~4の整数であることがより好ましく、0~3の整数であることが更に好ましい。
 mは0~2の整数を表し、0または1であることが好ましく、0であることがより好ましい。
 p1は0以上の整数を表し、0~4が好ましく、0~3がより好ましく、0~2が更に好ましく、0~1がより一層好ましく、0が特に好ましい。
 q1は1以上の整数を表し、1~4が好ましく、1~3がより好ましく、1~2が更に好ましく、1が特に好ましい。
Xi 1 represents O or NH, and is preferably O.
Ri 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
Ri 2 , Ri 3 and Ri 11 each independently represent a hydrocarbon group.
The hydrocarbon group represented by Ri 2 and Ri 3 is preferably an alkylene group or an arylene group, and more preferably an alkylene group. The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 2 or 3 carbon atoms. The hydrocarbon group represented by Ri 11 is preferably an alkyl group which may have an aryl group as a substituent, and more preferably an alkyl group having an aryl group as a substituent. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and further preferably has 1 to 5 carbon atoms. When the alkyl group has an aryl group as a substituent, the carbon number of the alkyl group means the carbon number of the alkyl moiety.
Ri 12 represents a substituent. Examples of the substituent represented by Ri 12 include the above-described substituent Ti.
n represents an integer of 0 to 15, preferably an integer of 0 to 5, more preferably an integer of 0 to 4, and even more preferably an integer of 0 to 3.
m represents an integer of 0 to 2, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
p1 represents an integer of 0 or more, preferably 0 to 4, more preferably 0 to 3, further preferably 0 to 2, further preferably 0 to 1, and particularly preferably 0.
q1 represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably 1 to 4, more preferably 1 to 3, further preferably 1 to 2, and particularly preferably 1.
 式(I)で表される化合物は、下記式(III)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 式中、Riは水素原子またはメチル基を表し、Ri21およびRi22はそれぞれ独立してアルキレン基を表し、nは0~15の整数を表す。Ri21およびRi22が表すアルキレン基の炭素数は1~10であることが好ましく、1~5であることがより好ましく、1~3であることが更に好ましく、2または3であることが特に好ましい。nは0~15の整数を表し、0~5の整数であることが好ましく、0~4の整数であることがより好ましく、0~3の整数であることが更に好ましい。
The compound represented by the formula (I) is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (III).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
In the formula, Ri 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, Ri 21 and Ri 22 each independently represent an alkylene group, and n represents an integer of 0 to 15. The alkylene group represented by Ri 21 and Ri 22 preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 2 or 3 carbon atoms. preferable. n represents an integer of 0 to 15, preferably an integer of 0 to 5, more preferably an integer of 0 to 4, and further preferably an integer of 0 to 3.
 式(I)で表される化合物としては、パラクミルフェノールのエチレンオキサイドまたはプロピレンオキサイド変性(メタ)アクリレートなどが挙げられる。市販品としては、アロニックスM-110(東亞合成(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the compound represented by the formula (I) include ethylene oxide- or propylene oxide-modified (meth) acrylate of paracumylphenol. Examples of commercially available products include Aronix M-110 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.).
 樹脂iは、更に、アルキル(メタ)アクリレート由来の繰り返し単位(以下、繰り返し単位i1-2ともいう)を含むことが好ましい。樹脂iが更に繰り返し単位i1-2を有する場合においては、溶剤溶解性を向上させる効果が得られる。アルキル(メタ)アクリレートのアルキル部位の炭素数は、3~10であることが好ましく、3~8であることがより好ましく、3~6であることが更に好ましい。アルキル(メタ)アクリレートの好ましい具体例としては、n-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エチルヘキシルアクリレートなどがあげられ、より優れた溶剤溶解性が得られやすいという理由からn-ブチル(メタ)アクリレートであることが好ましい。樹脂iの全繰り返し単位中における繰り返し単位i1-2の含有量は5モル%以上であることが好ましく、10モル%以上であることがより好ましく、15モル%以上であることが更に好ましい。 The resin i preferably further contains a repeating unit derived from an alkyl (meth) acrylate (hereinafter, also referred to as a repeating unit i1-2). When the resin i further has the repeating unit i1-2, the effect of improving the solvent solubility is obtained. The alkyl moiety of the alkyl (meth) acrylate preferably has 3 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 3 to 8 carbon atoms, and further preferably 3 to 6 carbon atoms. Preferable specific examples of the alkyl (meth) acrylate include n-butyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, etc., and n-butyl (meth) acrylate is preferable because it is easy to obtain more excellent solvent solubility. Butyl (meth) acrylate is preferred. The content of the repeating unit i1-2 in all the repeating units of the resin i is preferably 5 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more, further preferably 15 mol% or more.
 樹脂iは、更に、酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことも好ましい。この態様によれば、現像性を向上させる効果が得られる。樹脂iの全繰り返し単位中における酸基を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は5モル%以上であることが好ましく10モル%以上であることがより好ましく15モル%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は60モル%以下であることが好ましく、50モル%以下であることがより好ましい。 The resin i preferably further contains a repeating unit having an acid group. According to this aspect, the effect of improving the developability can be obtained. The content of the repeating unit having an acid group in all the repeating units of the resin i is preferably 5 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more, still more preferably 15 mol% or more. The upper limit is preferably 60 mol% or less, and more preferably 50 mol% or less.
 樹脂iは、更に、エチレン性不飽和結合基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことも好ましい。エチレン性不飽和結合基を有する繰り返し単位としては、後述する式(A-1-1)で表される繰り返し単位などが挙げられる。樹脂iの全繰り返し単位中におけるエチレン性不飽和結合基を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は5モル%以上であることが好ましく、10モル%以上であることがより好ましく、15モル%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は50モル%以下であることが好ましく、40モル%以下であることがより好ましい。 The resin i preferably further contains a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group. Examples of the repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group include a repeating unit represented by the formula (A-1-1) described later. The content of the repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group in all repeating units of the resin i is preferably 5 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more, and 15 mol% or more. Is more preferable. The upper limit is preferably 50 mol% or less, and more preferably 40 mol% or less.
 本発明の着色組成物は、分散剤としての樹脂を含有することができる。分散剤としては、酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)、塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)が挙げられる。ここで、酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)とは、酸基の量が塩基性基の量よりも多い樹脂を表す。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)としては、酸基の量と塩基性基の量の合計量を100モル%としたときに、酸基の量が70モル%以上を占める樹脂が好ましく、実質的に酸基のみからなる樹脂がより好ましい。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)が有する酸基は、カルボキシル基が好ましい。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)の酸価は、10~105mgKOH/gが好ましい。また、塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)とは、塩基性基の量が酸基の量よりも多い樹脂を表す。塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)としては、酸基の量と塩基性基の量の合計量を100モル%としたときに、塩基性基の量が50モル%を超える樹脂が好ましい。塩基性分散剤が有する塩基性基は、アミノ基が好ましい。 The coloring composition of the present invention may contain a resin as a dispersant. Examples of the dispersant include an acidic dispersant (acidic resin) and a basic dispersant (basic resin). Here, the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of acid groups is larger than the amount of basic groups. The acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a resin in which the amount of acid groups accounts for 70 mol% or more, when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is 100 mol%, A resin consisting only of acid groups is more preferable. The acid group contained in the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a carboxyl group. The acid value of the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably 10 to 105 mgKOH / g. Further, the basic dispersant (basic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of basic groups is larger than the amount of acid groups. The basic dispersant (basic resin) is preferably a resin in which the amount of basic groups exceeds 50 mol% when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is 100 mol%. The basic group contained in the basic dispersant is preferably an amino group.
 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましい。分散剤として用いる樹脂が酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことにより、フォトリソグラフィ法によりパターン形成する際、現像残渣の発生をより抑制できる。 The resin used as the dispersant preferably contains a repeating unit having an acid group. When the resin used as the dispersant contains a repeating unit having an acid group, generation of a development residue can be further suppressed when forming a pattern by the photolithography method.
 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、グラフト樹脂であることも好ましい。グラフト樹脂の詳細は、特開2012-255128号公報の段落番号0025~0094の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a graft resin. Details of the graft resin can be referred to the descriptions in paragraphs 0025 to 0094 of JP-A-2012-255128, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、主鎖及び側鎖の少なくとも一方に窒素原子を含むポリイミン系分散剤であることも好ましい。ポリイミン系分散剤としては、pKa14以下の官能基を有する部分構造を有する主鎖と、原子数40~10000の側鎖とを有し、かつ主鎖及び側鎖の少なくとも一方に塩基性窒素原子を有する樹脂が好ましい。塩基性窒素原子は、塩基性を呈する窒素原子であれば特に制限はない。ポリイミン系分散剤については、特開2012-255128号公報の段落番号0102~0166の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 It is also preferable that the resin used as the dispersant is a polyimine dispersant containing a nitrogen atom in at least one of the main chain and the side chain. The polyimine-based dispersant has a main chain having a partial structure having a functional group of pKa14 or less and a side chain having 40 to 10,000 atoms, and at least one of the main chain and the side chain has a basic nitrogen atom. The resin having is preferable. The basic nitrogen atom is not particularly limited as long as it is a basic nitrogen atom. Regarding the polyimine dispersant, the description in paragraph numbers 0102 to 0166 of JP 2012-255128 A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、コア部に複数個のポリマー鎖が結合した構造の樹脂であることも好ましい。このような樹脂としては、例えばデンドリマー(星型ポリマーを含む)が挙げられる。また、デンドリマーの具体例としては、特開2013-043962号公報の段落番号0196~0209に記載された高分子化合物C-1~C-31などが挙げられる。 It is also preferable that the resin used as the dispersant has a structure in which a plurality of polymer chains are bonded to the core part. Examples of such resins include dendrimers (including star polymers). In addition, specific examples of the dendrimer include polymer compounds C-1 to C-31 described in paragraph numbers 0196 to 0209 of JP-A-2013-043962.
 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、エチレン性不飽和結合基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることも好ましい。エチレン性不飽和結合基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂の全繰り返し単位中10モル%以上であることが好ましく、10~80モル%であることがより好ましく、20~70モル%であることが更に好ましい。 The resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group in its side chain. The content of the repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group in its side chain is preferably 10 mol% or more, more preferably 10 to 80 mol%, and more preferably 20 to 70 mol, based on all repeating units of the resin. % Is more preferable.
 分散剤は、市販品としても入手可能であり、そのような具体例としては、ビックケミー社製のDisperbykシリーズ(例えば、Disperbyk-111、2001など)、日本ルーブリゾール(株)製のソルスパースシリーズ(例えば、ソルスパース20000、76500など)、味の素ファインテクノ(株)製のアジスパーシリーズ等が挙げられる。また、特開2012-137564号公報の段落番号0129に記載された製品、特開2017-194662号公報の段落番号0235に記載された製品を分散剤として用いることもできる。 The dispersant is also available as a commercially available product, and specific examples thereof include Disperbyk series manufactured by Big Chemie (for example, Disperbyk-111, 2001) and Sols Perth series manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd. ( For example, Sols Perth 20000, 76500, etc.), Ajinomoto Fine Techno Co., Ltd. Azisper series, etc. are mentioned. The product described in paragraph No. 0129 of JP2012-137564A and the product described in paragraph No. 0235 of JP2017-194662A can be used as a dispersant.
 本発明で用いられる樹脂は、エチレン性不飽和結合基を有する樹脂(以下、重合性樹脂ともいう)を含むことが好ましい。この態様によれば、経時での膜収縮をより効果的に抑制できる。 The resin used in the present invention preferably contains a resin having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group (hereinafter, also referred to as a polymerizable resin). According to this aspect, it is possible to more effectively suppress the film shrinkage over time.
 重合性樹脂のエチレン性不飽和結合基価(以下、C=C価ともいう)は、0.05~5.0mmol/gであることが好ましい。上限は、4.0mmol/g以下であることがより好ましく、3.0mmol/g以下であることが更に好ましく、2.0mmol/g以下であることがより一層好ましく、1.0mmol/g以下であることが特に好ましい。下限は、0.1mmol/g以上であることが好ましく、0.2mmol/g以上であることがより好ましい。重合性樹脂のC=C価は、重合性樹脂の固形分1gあたりのC=C基のモル量を表した数値である。重合性樹脂のC=C価は、アルカリ処理によって重合性樹脂からC=C基部位の低分子成分(a)を取り出し、その含有量を高速液体クロマトグラフィー(HPLC)により測定し、下記式から算出することができる。また、重合性樹脂からC=C基部位をアルカリ処理で抽出することができない場合においては、NMR法(核磁気共鳴)にて測定した値を用いる。
 重合性樹脂のC=C価[mmol/g]=(低分子成分(a)の含有量[ppm]/低分子成分(a)の分子量[g/mol])/(重合性樹脂の秤量値[g]×(重合性樹脂の固形分濃度[質量%]/100)×10)
The ethylenically unsaturated bond group value (hereinafter, also referred to as C = C value) of the polymerizable resin is preferably 0.05 to 5.0 mmol / g. The upper limit is more preferably 4.0 mmol / g or less, further preferably 3.0 mmol / g or less, even more preferably 2.0 mmol / g or less, and 1.0 mmol / g or less. It is particularly preferable that The lower limit is preferably 0.1 mmol / g or more, more preferably 0.2 mmol / g or more. The C = C value of the polymerizable resin is a numerical value representing the molar amount of C = C groups per 1 g of the solid content of the polymerizable resin. The C = C value of the polymerizable resin is obtained by extracting the low molecular weight component (a) at the C = C group site from the polymerizable resin by alkali treatment and measuring the content by high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC). It can be calculated. When the C = C group site cannot be extracted from the polymerizable resin by alkali treatment, the value measured by the NMR method (nuclear magnetic resonance) is used.
C = C value of polymerizable resin [mmol / g] = (content of low molecular component (a) [ppm] / molecular weight of low molecular component (a) [g / mol]) / (measured value of polymerizable resin) [G] x (solid content concentration of polymerizable resin [mass%] / 100) x 10)
 重合性樹脂は、エチレン性不飽和結合基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましく、下記式(A-1-1)で表される繰り返し単位を含むことがより好ましい。また、重合性樹脂において、エチレン性不飽和結合基を有する繰り返し単位は、重合性樹脂の全繰り返し単位中10モル%以上含有することが好ましく、10~80モル%含有することがより好ましく、20~70モル%含有することが更に好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
The polymerizable resin preferably contains a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group in its side chain, and more preferably contains a repeating unit represented by the following formula (A-1-1). Further, in the polymerizable resin, the repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group is preferably contained in an amount of 10 mol% or more, more preferably 10 to 80 mol%, based on the total repeating units of the polymerizable resin, 20 It is more preferable that the content is up to 70 mol%.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 式(A-1-1)において、Xは繰り返し単位の主鎖を表し、Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、Yはエチレン性不飽和結合基を表す。 In formula (A-1-1), X 1 represents a main chain of a repeating unit, L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and Y 1 represents an ethylenically unsaturated bond group.
 式(A-1-1)において、Xが表す繰り返し単位の主鎖としては、特に限定はない。公知の重合可能なモノマーから形成される連結基であれば特に制限ない。例えば、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基、ポリアルキレンイミン系連結基、ポリエステル系連結基、ポリウレタン系連結基、ポリウレア系連結基、ポリアミド系連結基、ポリエーテル系連結基、ポリスチレン系連結基などが挙げられ、原料素材の入手性や製造適性の観点からポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基、ポリアルキレンイミン系連結基が好ましく、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基がより好ましい。 In formula (A-1-1), the main chain of the repeating unit represented by X 1 is not particularly limited. There is no particular limitation as long as it is a linking group formed of a known polymerizable monomer. For example, poly (meth) acrylic linking group, polyalkyleneimine linking group, polyester linking group, polyurethane linking group, polyurea linking group, polyamide linking group, polyether linking group, polystyrene linking group, etc. The poly (meth) acrylic linking group and the polyalkyleneimine linking group are preferable, and the poly (meth) acrylic linking group is more preferable, from the viewpoints of availability and production suitability of the raw material.
 式(A-1-1)において、Lが表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のアルキレン基)、アルキレンオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のアルキレンオキシ基)、オキシアルキレンカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のオキシアルキレンカルボニル基)、アリーレン基(好ましくは炭素数6~20のアリーレン基)、-NH-、-SO-、-SO-、-CO-、-O-、-COO-、-OCO-、-S-およびこれらの2以上を組み合わせてなる基が挙げられる。アルキレン基、アルキレンオキシ基におけるアルキレン基、オキシアルキレンカルボニル基におけるアルキレン基は、直鎖状、分岐状、及び、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖状または分岐状が好ましい。また、アルキレン基、アルキレンオキシ基におけるアルキレン基、オキシアルキレンカルボニル基におけるアルキレン基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基、アルコキシ基などが挙げられ、製造適性の観点からヒドロキシ基が好ましい。 In the formula (A-1-1), the divalent linking group represented by L 1 is an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an alkyleneoxy group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms). An oxy group), an oxyalkylene carbonyl group (preferably an oxyalkylene carbonyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), —NH—, —SO—, —SO 2 — , —CO—, —O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —S— and groups formed by combining two or more of these. The alkylene group, the alkylene group in the alkyleneoxy group, and the alkylene group in the oxyalkylenecarbonyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and are preferably linear or branched. Further, the alkylene group, the alkylene group in the alkyleneoxy group, and the alkylene group in the oxyalkylenecarbonyl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and an alkoxy group, and a hydroxy group is preferable from the viewpoint of production suitability.
 式(A-1-1)において、Yが表すエチレン性不飽和結合基としては、ビニル基、アリル基、メタリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基およびスチレン基が挙げられ、(メタ)アクリロイル基、スチレン基が好ましく、(メタ)アクリロイル基がより好ましく、アクリロイル基が特に好ましい。 In the formula (A-1-1), examples of the ethylenically unsaturated bond group represented by Y 1 include a vinyl group, an allyl group, a methallyl group, a (meth) acryloyl group and a styrene group, and a (meth) acryloyl group, A styrene group is preferable, a (meth) acryloyl group is more preferable, and an acryloyl group is particularly preferable.
 式(A-1-1)で表される繰り返し単位の具体例としては、下記式(A-1-1a)で表される繰り返し単位、下記式(A-1-1b)で表される繰り返し単位などが挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by the formula (A-1-1) include repeating units represented by the following formula (A-1-1a) and repeating units represented by the following formula (A-1-1b). Units are included.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 式(A-1-1a)において、Ra1~Ra3は、それぞれ独立して水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、Q1aは、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-CONH-またはフェニレン基を表し、Lは、単結合または2価の連結基を表し、Yはエチレン性不飽和結合基を表す。Ra1~Ra3が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~3がより好ましく、1が更に好ましい。Q1aは、-COO-または-CONH-であることが好ましく、-COO-であることがより好ましい。 In formula (A-1-1a), R a1 to R a3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and Q 1a represents —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —CONH— or phenylene. Represents a group, L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and Y 1 represents an ethylenically unsaturated bond group. The alkyl group represented by R a1 to R a3 preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 3, and still more preferably 1. Q 1a is preferably —COO— or —CONH—, and more preferably —COO—.
 式(A-1-1b)において、Ra10およびRa11は、それぞれ独立して水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、m1は1~5の整数を表し、Lは、単結合または2価の連結基を表し、Yはエチレン性不飽和結合基を表す。Ra10およびRa11が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。 In formula (A-1-1b), R a10 and R a11 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, m1 represents an integer of 1 to 5, and L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linkage. Represents a group, and Y 1 represents an ethylenically unsaturated bond group. The alkyl group represented by R a10 and R a11 preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
 重合性樹脂は、更にグラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましい。重合性樹脂がグラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位を含むことにより、グラフト鎖による立体障害によって上述した化合物(1)や化合物(2)の凝集などをより効果的に抑制できる。また、硬化膜の形成時においては、重合性樹脂が化合物(1)や化合物(2)の近傍で重合して膜中に化合物(1)や化合物(2)をしっかりと保持させることもでき、加熱によるこれらの化合物の熱拡散をより効果的に抑制して、耐熱性に優れた硬化膜を形成することもできる。重合性樹脂は、グラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位を、重合性樹脂の全繰り返し単位中1.0~60モル%含有することが好ましく、1.5~50モル%含有することがより好ましい。グラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位を含む重合性樹脂は分散剤として好ましく用いられる。 The polymerizable resin preferably further contains a repeating unit having a graft chain. When the polymerizable resin contains a repeating unit having a graft chain, it is possible to more effectively suppress aggregation of the compound (1) or the compound (2) due to steric hindrance due to the graft chain. Further, at the time of forming the cured film, the polymerizable resin may be polymerized in the vicinity of the compound (1) or the compound (2) to firmly hold the compound (1) or the compound (2) in the film, It is also possible to more effectively suppress thermal diffusion of these compounds due to heating and form a cured film having excellent heat resistance. The polymerizable resin preferably contains a repeating unit having a graft chain in an amount of 1.0 to 60 mol%, more preferably 1.5 to 50 mol%, based on all repeating units of the polymerizable resin. A polymerizable resin containing a repeating unit having a graft chain is preferably used as a dispersant.
 本発明において、グラフト鎖とは、繰り返し単位の主鎖から枝分かれして伸びるポリマー鎖のことを意味する。グラフト鎖の長さについては特に制限されないが、グラフト鎖が長くなると立体反発効果が高くなり、化合物(1)や化合物(2)などの分散性を高めることができる。グラフト鎖としては、水素原子を除いた原子数が40~10000であることが好ましく、水素原子を除いた原子数が50~2000であることがより好ましく、水素原子を除いた原子数が60~500であることが更に好ましい。 In the present invention, the graft chain means a polymer chain branched and extended from the main chain of the repeating unit. The length of the graft chain is not particularly limited, but the longer the graft chain, the higher the steric repulsion effect, and the higher the dispersibility of the compound (1) or the compound (2). The graft chain preferably has 40 to 10000 atoms excluding hydrogen atoms, more preferably 50 to 2000 atoms excluding hydrogen atoms, and has 60 to 60 atoms excluding hydrogen atoms. It is more preferably 500.
 グラフト鎖は、ポリエステル繰り返し単位、ポリエーテル繰り返し単位、ポリ(メタ)アクリル繰り返し単位、ポリウレタン繰り返し単位、ポリウレア繰り返し単位およびポリアミド繰り返し単位から選ばれる少なくとも1種の構造の繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましく、ポリエステル繰り返し単位、ポリエーテル繰り返し単位およびポリ(メタ)アクリル繰り返し単位から選ばれる少なくとも1種の構造の繰り返し単位を含むことがより好ましく、ポリエステル繰り返し単位を含むことが更に好ましい。ポリエステル繰り返し単位としては、下記の式(G-1)、式(G-4)または式(G-5)で表される構造の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。また、ポリエーテル繰り返し単位としては、下記の式(G-2)で表される構造の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。また、ポリ(メタ)アクリル繰り返し単位としては、下記の式(G-3)で表される構造の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
 上記式において、RG1およびRG2は、それぞれアルキレン基を表す。RG1およびRG2で表されるアルキレン基としては特に制限されないが、炭素数1~20の直鎖状又は分岐状のアルキレン基が好ましく、炭素数2~16の直鎖状又は分岐状のアルキレン基がより好ましく、炭素数3~12の直鎖状又は分岐状のアルキレン基が更に好ましい。
 上記式において、RG3は、水素原子またはメチル基を表す。
 上記式において、QG1は、-O-または-NH-を表し、LG1は、単結合または2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のアルキレン基)、アルキレンオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のアルキレンオキシ基)、オキシアルキレンカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のオキシアルキレンカルボニル基)、アリーレン基(好ましくは炭素数6~20のアリーレン基)、-NH-、-SO-、-SO-、-CO-、-O-、-COO-、OCO-、-S-およびこれらの2以上を組み合わせてなる基が挙げられる。
 RG4は、水素原子または置換基を表す。置換基としては、アルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基、アルキルチオエーテル基、アリールチオエーテル基、ヘテロアリールチオエーテル基等が挙げられる。
The graft chain preferably contains a repeating unit having at least one structure selected from polyester repeating units, polyether repeating units, poly (meth) acrylic repeating units, polyurethane repeating units, polyurea repeating units and polyamide repeating units. It is more preferable to include a repeating unit having at least one structure selected from a repeating unit, a polyether repeating unit and a poly (meth) acrylic repeating unit, and it is further preferable to include a polyester repeating unit. Examples of the polyester repeating unit include a repeating unit having a structure represented by the following formula (G-1), formula (G-4) or formula (G-5). Further, examples of the polyether repeating unit include a repeating unit having a structure represented by the following formula (G-2). Examples of the poly (meth) acrylic repeating unit include a repeating unit having a structure represented by the following formula (G-3).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
In the above formula, R G1 and R G2 each represent an alkylene group. The alkylene group represented by R G1 and R G2 is not particularly limited, but a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, and a linear or branched alkylene group having 2 to 16 carbon atoms. A group is more preferable, and a linear or branched alkylene group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms is further preferable.
In the above formula, R G3 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
In the above formula, Q G1 represents —O— or —NH—, and L G1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. The divalent linking group includes an alkylene group (preferably having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an alkyleneoxy group (preferably having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an oxyalkylenecarbonyl group (preferably having 1 carbon atom). To 12 oxyalkylenecarbonyl groups), arylene groups (preferably arylene groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), —NH—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —O—, —COO—, OCO. —, —S—, and groups formed by combining two or more of these.
R G4 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group and a heteroarylthioether group.
 グラフト鎖の末端構造としては、特に限定されない。水素原子であってもよく、置換基であってもよい。置換基としては、アルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基、アルキルチオエーテル基、アリールチオエーテル基、ヘテロアリールチオエーテル基等が挙げられる。なかでも、顔料などの分散性向上の観点から、立体反発効果を有する基が好ましく、炭素数5~24のアルキル基又はアルコキシ基が好ましい。アルキル基およびアルコキシ基は、直鎖状、分岐状、及び、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖状または分岐状が好ましい。 The terminal structure of the graft chain is not particularly limited. It may be a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group and a heteroarylthioether group. Among them, a group having a steric repulsion effect is preferable, and an alkyl group or an alkoxy group having 5 to 24 carbon atoms is preferable, from the viewpoint of improving dispersibility of the pigment and the like. The alkyl group and the alkoxy group may be linear, branched or cyclic, with linear or branched being preferred.
 本発明において、グラフト鎖としては、下記式(G-1a)、式(G-2a)、式(G-3a)、式(G-4a)または式(G-5a)で表される構造であることが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
In the present invention, the graft chain has a structure represented by the following formula (G-1a), formula (G-2a), formula (G-3a), formula (G-4a) or formula (G-5a). Preferably there is.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
 上記式において、RG1およびRG2は、それぞれアルキレン基を表し、RG3は、水素原子またはメチル基を表し、QG1は、-O-または-NH-を表し、LG1は、単結合または2価の連結基を表し、RG4は、水素原子または置換基を表し、W100は水素原子または置換基を表す。n1~n5は、それぞれ独立して2以上の整数を表す。RG1~RG4、QG1、LG1については、式(G-1)~(G-5)で説明したRG1~RG4、QG1、LG1と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 In the above formula, R G1 and R G2 each represent an alkylene group, R G3 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, Q G1 represents —O— or —NH—, and L G1 represents a single bond or It represents a divalent linking group, R G4 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and W 100 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. n1 to n5 each independently represent an integer of 2 or more. For R G1 ~ R G4, Q G1 , L G1 , Formula (G1) ~ (G-5 ) has the same meaning as R G1 ~ R G4, Q G1 , L G1 described in, the preferred range is also the same is there.
 式(G-1a)~(G-5a)において、W100は置換基であることが好ましい。置換基としては、アルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基、アルキルチオエーテル基、アリールチオエーテル基、ヘテロアリールチオエーテル基等が挙げられる。なかでも、顔料などの分散性向上の観点から、立体反発効果を有する基が好ましく、炭素数5~24のアルキル基又はアルコキシ基が好ましい。アルキル基およびアルコキシ基は、直鎖状、分岐状、及び、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖状または分岐状が好ましい。 In formulas (G-1a) to (G-5a), W 100 is preferably a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group and a heteroarylthioether group. Among them, a group having a steric repulsion effect is preferable, and an alkyl group or an alkoxy group having 5 to 24 carbon atoms is preferable, from the viewpoint of improving dispersibility of the pigment and the like. The alkyl group and the alkoxy group may be linear, branched or cyclic, with linear or branched being preferred.
 式(G-1a)~(G-5a)において、n1~n5は、それぞれ2~100の整数が好ましく、2~80の整数がより好ましく、8~60の整数が更に好ましい。 In formulas (G-1a) to (G-5a), n1 to n5 are each preferably an integer of 2 to 100, more preferably an integer of 2 to 80, even more preferably an integer of 8 to 60.
 式(G-1a)において、n1が2以上の場合における各繰り返し単位中のRG1同士は、同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。また、RG1が異なる繰り返し単位を2種以上含む場合においては、各繰り返し単位の配列は特に限定は無く、ランダム、交互、及び、ブロックのいずれであってもよい。式(G-2a)~式(G-5a)においても同様である。 In the formula (G-1a), R G1s in each repeating unit when n1 is 2 or more may be the same or different. Moreover, when R G1 contains two or more kinds of repeating units having different R G1 , the arrangement of each repeating unit is not particularly limited, and may be random, alternating, or block. The same applies to the formulas (G-2a) to (G-5a).
 グラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位としては、下記式(A-1-2)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Examples of the repeating unit having a graft chain include a repeating unit represented by the following formula (A-1-2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 式(A-1-2)において、Xは繰り返し単位の主鎖を表し、Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、Wはグラフト鎖を表す。 In formula (A-1-2), X 2 represents a main chain of a repeating unit, L 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and W 1 represents a graft chain.
 式(A-1-2)におけるXが表す繰り返し単位の主鎖としては、式(A-1-1)のXで説明した構造が挙げられ、好ましい範囲も同様である。式(A-1-2)におけるLが表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のアルキレン基)、アリーレン基(好ましくは炭素数6~20のアリーレン基)、-NH-、-SO-、-SO-、-CO-、-O-、-COO-、OCO-、-S-およびこれらの2以上を組み合わせてなる基が挙げられる。式(A-1-2)におけるWが表すグラフト鎖としては、上述したグラフト鎖が挙げられる。 Examples of the main chain of the repeating unit represented by X 2 in formula (A-1-2) include the structures described for X 1 in formula (A-1-1), and the preferred ranges are also the same. The divalent linking group represented by L 2 in formula (A-1-2) includes an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms) and an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms). , —NH—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —O—, —COO—, OCO—, —S— and groups formed by combining two or more of these. Examples of the graft chain represented by W 1 in the formula (A-1-2) include the above-mentioned graft chains.
 式(A-1-2)で表される繰り返し単位の具体例としては、下記式(A-1-2a)で表される繰り返し単位、下記式(A-1-2b)で表される繰り返し単位などが挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by the formula (A-1-2) include repeating units represented by the following formula (A-1-2a) and repeating units represented by the following formula (A-1-2b). Units are included.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
 式(A-1-2a)において、Rb1~Rb3は、それぞれ独立して水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、Qb1は、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-CONH-またはフェニレン基を表し、Lは、単結合または2価の連結基を表し、Wはグラフト鎖を表す。Rb1~Rb3が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~3がより好ましく、1が更に好ましい。Qb1は、-COO-または-CONH-であることが好ましく、-COO-であることがより好ましい。 In the formula (A-1-2a), R b1 to R b3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and Q b1 represents —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —CONH— or phenylene. Represents a group, L 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and W 1 represents a graft chain. The alkyl group represented by R b1 to R b3 preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1. Q b1 is preferably —COO— or —CONH—, and more preferably —COO—.
 式(A-1-2b)において、Rb10およびRb11は、それぞれ独立して水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、m2は1~5の整数を表し、Lは、単結合または2価の連結基を表し、Wはグラフト鎖を表す。Rb10およびRb11が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。 In formula (A-1-2b), R b10 and R b11 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, m2 represents an integer of 1 to 5, and L 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linkage. Represents a group, and W 1 represents a graft chain. The alkyl group represented by R b10 and R b11 preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
 重合性樹脂がグラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位を含む場合、グラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、1000以上であることが好ましく、1000~10000であることがより好ましく、1000~7500であることが更に好ましい。なお、本発明において、グラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位の重量平均分子量は、同繰り返し単位の重合に用いた原料モノマーの重量平均分子量から算出した値である。例えば、グラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位は、マクロモノマーを重合することで形成できる。ここで、マクロモノマーとは、ポリマー末端に重合性基が導入された高分子化合物を意味する。マクロモノマーを用いてグラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位を形成した場合においては、マクロモノマーの重量平均分子量がグラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位に該当する。 When the polymerizable resin contains a repeating unit having a graft chain, the repeating unit having a graft chain has a weight average molecular weight (Mw) of preferably 1000 or more, more preferably 1000 to 10000, and more preferably 1000 to 7500. Is more preferable. In the present invention, the weight average molecular weight of the repeating unit having a graft chain is a value calculated from the weight average molecular weight of the raw material monomer used for the polymerization of the repeating unit. For example, the repeating unit having a graft chain can be formed by polymerizing a macromonomer. Here, the macromonomer means a polymer compound having a polymerizable group introduced at the polymer end. When a repeating unit having a graft chain is formed using a macromonomer, the weight average molecular weight of the macromonomer corresponds to the repeating unit having a graft chain.
 重合性樹脂は、更に酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことも好ましい。重合性樹脂が更に酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことで、化合物(1)や化合物(2)などの分散性をより向上できる。更には、現像性を向上させることもできる。酸基としては、カルボキシル基、スルホ基、リン酸基が挙げられる。 The polymerizable resin preferably further contains a repeating unit having an acid group. When the polymerizable resin further contains a repeating unit having an acid group, the dispersibility of the compound (1) or the compound (2) can be further improved. Furthermore, the developability can be improved. Examples of the acid group include a carboxyl group, a sulfo group and a phosphoric acid group.
 酸基を有する繰り返し単位としては、下記式(A-1-3)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Examples of the repeating unit having an acid group include a repeating unit represented by the following formula (A-1-3).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 式(A-1-3)において、Xは繰り返し単位の主鎖を表し、Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、Aは酸基を表す。式(A-1-3)におけるXが表す繰り返し単位の主鎖としては、式(A-1-1)のXで説明した構造が挙げられ、好ましい範囲も同様である。式(A-1-3)におけるLが表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のアルキレン基)、アルケニレン基(好ましくは炭素数2~12のアルケニレン基)、アルキレンオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のアルキレンオキシ基)、オキシアルキレンカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のオキシアルキレンカルボニル基)、アリーレン基(好ましくは炭素数6~20のアリーレン基)、-NH-、-SO-、-SO-、-CO-、-O-、-COO-、OCO-、-S-およびこれらの2以上を組み合わせてなる基が挙げられる。アルキレン基、アルキレンオキシ基におけるアルキレン基、オキシアルキレンカルボニル基におけるアルキレン基は、直鎖状、分岐状、及び、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖状または分岐状が好ましい。また、アルキレン基、アルキレンオキシ基におけるアルキレン基、オキシアルキレンカルボニル基におけるアルキレン基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。式(A-1-3)におけるAが表す酸基としては、カルボキシル基、スルホ基、リン酸基が挙げられる。 In formula (A-1-3), X 3 represents a main chain of a repeating unit, L 3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and A 1 represents an acid group. The main chain of the repeating unit represented by X 3 in formula (A-1-3) includes the structure described for X 1 in formula (A-1-1), and the preferred range is also the same. The divalent linking group represented by L 3 in formula (A-1-3) includes an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms) and an alkenylene group (preferably an alkenylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms). An alkyleneoxy group (preferably an alkyleneoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an oxyalkylenecarbonyl group (preferably an oxyalkylenecarbonyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms) ), —NH—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —O—, —COO—, OCO—, —S— and groups formed by combining two or more of these. The alkylene group, the alkylene group in the alkyleneoxy group, and the alkylene group in the oxyalkylenecarbonyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and are preferably linear or branched. Further, the alkylene group, the alkylene group in the alkyleneoxy group, and the alkylene group in the oxyalkylenecarbonyl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. A hydroxy group etc. are mentioned as a substituent. Examples of the acid group represented by A 1 in the formula (A-1-3) include a carboxyl group, a sulfo group and a phosphoric acid group.
 式(A-1-3)で表される繰り返し単位の具体例としては、下記式(A-1-3a)で表される繰り返し単位、下記式(A-1-3b)で表される繰り返し単位などが挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by the formula (A-1-3) include a repeating unit represented by the following formula (A-1-3a) and a repeating unit represented by the following formula (A-1-3b). Units are included.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
 式(A-1-3a)において、Rc1~Rc3は、それぞれ独立して水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、Qc1は、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-CONH-またはフェニレン基を表し、Lは、単結合または2価の連結基を表し、Aは酸基を表す。Rc1~Rc3が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~3がより好ましく、1が更に好ましい。Qc1は、-COO-または-CONH-であることが好ましく、-COO-であることがより好ましい。 In the formula (A-1-3a), R c1 to R c3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and Q c1 is —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —CONH— or phenylene. Represents a group, L 3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and A 1 represents an acid group. The alkyl group represented by R c1 to R c3 preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and further preferably 1 carbon atoms. Q c1 is preferably —COO— or —CONH—, and more preferably —COO—.
 式(A-1-3b)において、Rc10およびRc11は、それぞれ独立して水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、m3は1~5の整数を表し、Lは、単結合または2価の連結基を表し、Aは酸基を表す。Rc10およびRc11が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。 In the formula (A-1-3b), R c10 and R c11 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, m3 represents an integer of 1 to 5, and L 3 represents a single bond or a divalent linkage. Represents a group, and A 1 represents an acid group. The alkyl group represented by R c10 and R c11 preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
 重合性樹脂が、酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含む場合、酸基を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、重合性樹脂の全繰り返し単位中80モル%以下であることが好ましく、10~80モル%がより好ましい。重合性樹脂が、酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含む場合、重合性樹脂の酸価としては、20~150mgKOH/gであることが好ましい。上限は、100mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、30mgKOH/g以上であることが好ましく、35mgKOH/g以上であることがより好ましい。重合性樹脂の酸価が上記範囲であれば、特に優れた分散性が得られやすい。さらには、優れた現像性が得られやすい。 When the polymerizable resin contains a repeating unit having an acid group, the content of the repeating unit having an acid group is preferably 80 mol% or less in all repeating units of the polymerizable resin, and 10 to 80 mol% is preferable. More preferable. When the polymerizable resin contains a repeating unit having an acid group, the acid value of the polymerizable resin is preferably 20 to 150 mgKOH / g. The upper limit is more preferably 100 mgKOH / g or less. The lower limit is preferably 30 mgKOH / g or more, and more preferably 35 mgKOH / g or more. When the acid value of the polymerizable resin is within the above range, particularly excellent dispersibility is likely to be obtained. Furthermore, excellent developability is easily obtained.
 重合性樹脂は、式(b-10)で表される繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることも好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
 式(b-10)中、Ar10は芳香族カルボキシル基を含む基を表し、L11は、-COO-または-CONH-を表し、L12は3価の連結基を表し、P10は(メタ)アクリロイル基を有するポリマー鎖を表す。
The polymerizable resin is also preferably a resin containing a repeating unit represented by the formula (b-10).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
In formula (b-10), Ar 10 represents a group containing an aromatic carboxyl group, L 11 represents —COO— or —CONH—, L 12 represents a trivalent linking group, and P 10 represents ( It represents a polymer chain having a (meth) acryloyl group.
 式(b-10)においてAr10が表す芳香族カルボキシル基を含む基としては、芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物から由来する構造、芳香族テトラカルボン酸無水物から由来する構造などが挙げられる。芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物および芳香族テトラカルボン酸無水物としては、下記構造の化合物が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Examples of the group containing an aromatic carboxyl group represented by Ar 10 in the formula (b-10) include a structure derived from an aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride and a structure derived from an aromatic tetracarboxylic acid anhydride. Examples of aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydrides and aromatic tetracarboxylic acid anhydrides include compounds having the following structures.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
 上記式中、Qは、単結合、-O-、-CO-、-COOCHCHOCO-、-SO-、-C(CF-、下記式(Q-1)で表される基または下記式(Q-2)で表される基を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
In the above formula, Q 1 represents a single bond, —O—, —CO—, —COOCH 2 CH 2 OCO—, —SO 2 —, —C (CF 3 ) 2 —, or a formula (Q-1) shown below. Or a group represented by the following formula (Q-2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
 芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物の具体例としては、ベンゼントリカルボン酸無水物(1,2,3-ベンゼントリカルボン酸無水物、トリメリット酸無水物[1,2,4-ベンゼントリカルボン酸無水物]等)、ナフタレントリカルボン酸無水物(1,2,4-ナフタレントリカルボン酸無水物、1,4,5-ナフタレントリカルボン酸無水物、2,3,6-ナフタレントリカルボン酸無水物、1,2,8-ナフタレントリカルボン酸無水物等)、3,4,4’-ベンゾフェノントリカルボン酸無水物、3,4,4’-ビフェニルエーテルトリカルボン酸無水物、3,4,4’-ビフェニルトリカルボン酸無水物、2,3,2’-ビフェニルトリカルボン酸無水物、3,4,4’-ビフェニルメタントリカルボン酸無水物、又は3,4,4’-ビフェニルスルホントリカルボン酸無水物が挙げられる。芳香族テトラカルボン酸無水物の具体例としては、ピロメリット酸二無水物、エチレングリコールジ無水トリメリット酸エステル、プロピレングリコールジ無水トリメリット酸エステル、ブチレングリコールジ無水トリメリット酸エステル、3,3’,4,4’-ベンゾフェノンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-ビフェニルスルホンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,4,5,8-ナフタレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、2,3,6,7-ナフタレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-ビフェニルエーテルテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-ジメチルジフェニルシランテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-テトラフェニルシランテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,2,3,4-フランテトラカルボン酸二無水物、4,4’-ビス(3,4-ジカルボキシフェノキシ)ジフェニルスルフィド二無水物、4,4’-ビス(3,4-ジカルボキシフェノキシ)ジフェニルスルホン二無水物、4,4’-ビス(3,4-ジカルボキシフェノキシ)ジフェニルプロパン二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-パーフルオロイソプロピリデンジフタル酸二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-ビフェニルテトラカルボン酸二無水物、ビス(フタル酸)フェニルホスフィンオキサイド二無水物、p-フェニレン-ビス(トリフェニルフタル酸)二無水物、m-フェニレン-ビス(トリフェニルフタル酸)二無水物、ビス(トリフェニルフタル酸)-4,4’-ジフェニルエーテル二無水物、ビス(トリフェニルフタル酸)-4,4’-ジフェニルメタン二無水物、9,9-ビス(3,4-ジカルボキシフェニル)フルオレン二無水物、9,9-ビス[4-(3,4-ジカルボキシフェノキシ)フェニル]フルオレン二無水物、3,4-ジカルボキシ-1,2,3,4-テトラヒドロ-1-ナフタレンコハク酸二無水物、又は3,4-ジカルボキシ-1,2,3,4-テトラヒドロ-6-メチル-1-ナフタレンコハク酸二無水物等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride include benzenetricarboxylic acid anhydride (1,2,3-benzenetricarboxylic acid anhydride, trimellitic acid anhydride [1,2,4-benzenetricarboxylic acid anhydride], etc.) , Naphthalene tricarboxylic acid anhydride (1,2,4-naphthalene tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 1,4,5-naphthalene tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 2,3,6-naphthalene tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 1,2,8-naphthalene Tricarboxylic acid anhydride, etc.), 3,4,4'-benzophenone tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 3,4,4'-biphenyl ether tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 3,4,4'-biphenyl tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 2,3 , 2'-biphenyl tricarboxylic acid anhydride, 3,4,4'-biphenylmethane tricarboxylic acid anhydride, or 3,4,4'- Phenyl sulfonic tricarboxylic acid anhydrides. Specific examples of the aromatic tetracarboxylic acid anhydrides include pyromellitic dianhydride, ethylene glycol ditrimellitic anhydride ester, propylene glycol ditrimellitic anhydride ester, butylene glycol ditrimellitic anhydride ester, and 3,3. ', 4,4'-benzophenone tetracarboxylic acid dianhydride, 3,3', 4,4'-biphenyl sulfone tetracarboxylic acid dianhydride, 1,4,5,8-naphthalene tetracarboxylic acid dianhydride, 2,3,6,7-naphthalene tetracarboxylic acid dianhydride, 3,3 ', 4,4'-biphenyl ether tetracarboxylic acid dianhydride, 3,3', 4,4'-dimethyldiphenylsilane tetracarboxylic acid Acid dianhydride, 3,3 ', 4,4'-tetraphenylsilane tetracarboxylic acid dianhydride, 1,2,3,4-furan Tracarboxylic acid dianhydride, 4,4′-bis (3,4-dicarboxyphenoxy) diphenyl sulfide dianhydride, 4,4′-bis (3,4-dicarboxyphenoxy) diphenylsulfone dianhydride, 4 , 4'-bis (3,4-dicarboxyphenoxy) diphenylpropane dianhydride, 3,3 ', 4,4'-perfluoroisopropylidene diphthalic dianhydride, 3,3', 4,4 ' -Biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, bis (phthalic acid) phenylphosphine oxide dianhydride, p-phenylene-bis (triphenylphthalic acid) dianhydride, m-phenylene-bis (triphenylphthalic acid) dianhydride , Bis (triphenylphthalic acid) -4,4'-diphenylether dianhydride, bis (triphenylphthalic acid) -4,4'-diphenylmethane Anhydride, 9,9-bis (3,4-dicarboxyphenyl) fluorene dianhydride, 9,9-bis [4- (3,4-dicarboxyphenoxy) phenyl] fluorene dianhydride, 3,4- Dicarboxy-1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-1-naphthalene succinic acid dianhydride or 3,4-dicarboxy-1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-6-methyl-1-naphthalene succinic acid dianhydride Anhydrous etc. are mentioned.
 Ar10が表す芳香族カルボキシル基を含む基の具体例としては、式(Ar-1)で表される基、式(Ar-2)で表される基、式(Ar-3)で表される基などが挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Specific examples of the group containing an aromatic carboxyl group represented by Ar 10 include a group represented by the formula (Ar-1), a group represented by the formula (Ar-2), and a group represented by the formula (Ar-3). Group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
 式(Ar-1)中、n1は1~4の整数を表し、1~2の整数であることが好ましく、2であることがより好ましい。
 式(Ar-2)中、n2は1~8の整数を表し、1~4の整数であることが好ましく、1~2であることがより好ましく、2であることが更に好ましい。
 式(Ar-3)中、n3およびn4はそれぞれ独立して0~4の整数を表し、0~2の整数であることが好ましく、1~2であることがより好ましく、1であることが更に好ましい。ただし、n3およびn4の少なくとも一方は1以上の整数である。
 式(Ar-3)中、Qは、単結合、-O-、-CO-、-COOCHCHOCO-、-SO-、-C(CF-、上記式(Q-1)で表される基または上記式(Q-2)で表される基を表す。
In formula (Ar-1), n1 represents an integer of 1 to 4, preferably an integer of 1 to 2, and more preferably 2.
In the formula (Ar-2), n2 represents an integer of 1 to 8, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, more preferably 1 to 2, and even more preferably 2.
In formula (Ar-3), n3 and n4 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 1 to 2, and most preferably 1. More preferable. However, at least one of n3 and n4 is an integer of 1 or more.
In formula (Ar-3), Q 1 represents a single bond, —O—, —CO—, —COOCH 2 CH 2 OCO—, —SO 2 —, —C (CF 3 ) 2 —, or the above formula (Q— It represents a group represented by 1) or a group represented by the above formula (Q-2).
 式(b-10)においてL11は、-COO-または-CONH-を表し、-COO-を表すことが好ましい。 In formula (b-10), L 11 represents —COO— or —CONH—, and preferably —COO—.
 式(b-10)においてL12が表す3価の連結基としては、炭化水素基、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-、-S-およびこれらの2種以上を組み合わせた基が挙げられる。炭化水素基は、脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基が挙げられる。脂肪族炭化水素基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましく、1~15が更に好ましい。脂肪族炭化水素基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。芳香族炭化水素基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。炭化水素基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。L12が表す3価の連結基は、下記式(L12-1)で表される基であることが好ましく、式(L12-2)で表される基であることがより好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Examples of the trivalent linking group represented by L 12 in the formula (b-10) include a hydrocarbon group, —O—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —NH—, —S— and 2 of these. Examples thereof include groups in which two or more species are combined. Examples of the hydrocarbon group include an aliphatic hydrocarbon group and an aromatic hydrocarbon group. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and further preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched or cyclic. The aromatic hydrocarbon group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and further preferably has 6 to 10 carbon atoms. The hydrocarbon group may have a substituent. A hydroxy group etc. are mentioned as a substituent. The trivalent linking group represented by L 12 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (L12-1), and more preferably a group represented by the formula (L12-2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
 L12aおよびL12bはそれぞれ3価の連結基を表し、XはSを表し、*1は式(b-10)のL11との結合位置を表し、*2は式(b-10)のP10との結合位置を表す。 L 12a and L 12b each represent a trivalent linking group, X 1 represents S, * 1 represents a bonding position with L 11 in formula (b-10), and * 2 represents formula (b-10). Represents the bonding position with P 10 .
 L12aおよびL12bが表す3価の連結基としては、炭化水素基;炭化水素基と、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-および-S-から選ばれる少なくとも1種とを組み合わせた基などが挙げられる。 The trivalent linking group represented by L 12a and L 12b is selected from a hydrocarbon group; a hydrocarbon group and —O—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —NH— and —S—. Examples thereof include groups in which at least one type is combined.
 式(b-10)においてP10は(メタ)アクリロイル基を有するポリマー鎖を表す。P10が表すポリマー鎖は、ポリ(メタ)アクリル繰り返し単位、ポリエーテル繰り返し単位、ポリエステル繰り返し単位およびポリオール繰り返し単位から選ばれる少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位を有することが好ましい。ポリマー鎖P10の重量平均分子量は500~20000が好ましい。下限は600以上が好ましく、1000以上がより好ましい。上限は10000以下が好ましく、5000以下がより好ましく、3000以下が更に好ましいである。P10の重量平均分子量が上記範囲であれば組成物中における顔料の分散性が良好である。この樹脂は分散剤として好ましく用いられる。 In formula (b-10), P 10 represents a polymer chain having a (meth) acryloyl group. The polymer chain represented by P 10 preferably has at least one repeating unit selected from poly (meth) acrylic repeating units, polyether repeating units, polyester repeating units and polyol repeating units. The weight average molecular weight of the polymer chain P 10 is preferably 500 to 20,000. The lower limit is preferably 600 or more, more preferably 1000 or more. The upper limit is preferably 10,000 or less, more preferably 5000 or less, still more preferably 3000 or less. When the weight average molecular weight of P 10 is in the above range, the dispersibility of the pigment in the composition is good. This resin is preferably used as a dispersant.
 式(b-10)において、P10が表すポリマー鎖は、下記式(P-1)~(P-5)で表される繰り返し単位を含むポリマー鎖であることが好ましく、(P-5)で表される繰り返し単位を含むポリマー鎖であることがより好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
 上記式において、RP1およびRP2は、それぞれアルキレン基を表す。RP1およびRP2で表されるアルキレン基としては、炭素数1~20の直鎖状又は分岐状のアルキレン基が好ましく、炭素数2~16の直鎖状又は分岐状のアルキレン基がより好ましく、炭素数3~12の直鎖状又は分岐状のアルキレン基が更に好ましい。
 上記式において、RP3は、水素原子またはメチル基を表す。
 上記式において、LP1は、単結合またはアリーレン基を表し、LP2は、単結合または2価の連結基を表す。LP1は、単結合であることが好ましい。LP2が表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のアルキレン基)、アリーレン基(好ましくは炭素数6~20のアリーレン基)、-NH-、-SO-、-SO-、-CO-、-O-、-COO-、-OCO-、-S-、-NHCO-、-CONH-、およびこれらの2以上を組み合わせてなる基が挙げられる。
 RP4は、水素原子または置換基を表す。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシル基、アルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基、アルキルチオエーテル基、アリールチオエーテル基、ヘテロアリールチオエーテル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基等が挙げられる。
In the formula (b-10), the polymer chain represented by P 10 is preferably a polymer chain containing repeating units represented by the following formulas (P-1) to (P-5), and (P-5) A polymer chain containing a repeating unit represented by is more preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
In the above formula, R P1 and R P2 each represent an alkylene group. As the alkylene group represented by R P1 and R P2 , a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, and a linear or branched alkylene group having 2 to 16 carbon atoms is more preferable. Further, a linear or branched alkylene group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable.
In the above formula, R P3 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
In the above formula, L P1 represents a single bond or an arylene group, and L P2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. L P1 is preferably a single bond. The divalent linking group represented by L P2 includes an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), —NH—, —SO—, Examples include —SO 2 —, —CO—, —O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —S—, —NHCO—, —CONH—, and groups formed by combining two or more of these.
R P4 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. As the substituent, a hydroxy group, a carboxyl group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group, a heteroarylthioether group, (meth) acryloyl Groups and the like.
 また、P10が表すポリマー鎖は、側鎖に(メタ)アクリロイル基を含む繰り返し単位を有するポリマー鎖であることがより好ましい。また、P10を構成する全繰り返し単位中における、(メタ)アクリロイル基を側鎖に含む繰り返し単位の割合は、5質量%以上であることが好ましく、10質量%以上であることがより好ましく、20質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は、100質量%とすることができ、90質量%以下であることが好ましく、60質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。 Further, the polymer chain represented by P 10 is more preferably a polymer chain having a repeating unit containing a (meth) acryloyl group in its side chain. In addition, the proportion of repeating units containing a (meth) acryloyl group in the side chain in all repeating units constituting P 10 is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more, It is more preferably 20% by mass or more. The upper limit may be 100% by mass, preferably 90% by mass or less, and more preferably 60% by mass or less.
 また、P10が表すポリマー鎖は、酸基を含む繰り返し単位を有することも好ましい。酸基としては、カルボキシル基、リン酸基、スルホ基、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。この態様によれば、組成物中における顔料の分散性をより向上できる。更には、現像性をより向上させることもできる。酸基を含む繰り返し単位の割合は、1~30質量%であることが好ましく、2~20質量%であることがより好ましく、3~10質量%であることが更に好ましい。 Further, the polymer chain represented by P 10 also preferably has a repeating unit containing an acid group. Examples of the acid group include a carboxyl group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfo group and a phenolic hydroxy group. According to this aspect, the dispersibility of the pigment in the composition can be further improved. Furthermore, the developability can be further improved. The proportion of the repeating unit containing an acid group is preferably 1 to 30% by mass, more preferably 2 to 20% by mass, and further preferably 3 to 10% by mass.
 式(b-10)で表される繰り返し単位を含む樹脂は、芳香族テトラカルボン酸無水物及び芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物から選ばれる少なくとも1種の酸無水物と、ヒドロキシ基含有化合物とを反応させることで製造することができる。芳香族テトラカルボン酸無水物及び芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物としては、上述したものが挙げられる。ヒドロキシ基含有化合物としては、分子内にヒドロキシ基を有してさえいれば、特に制限されないが、分子内に2つ以上のヒドロキシ基を有するポリオールであることが好ましい。また、ヒドロキシ基含有化合物として、分子内に2つのヒドロキシ基と1つのチオール基を有する化合物を用いることも好ましい。分子内に2つのヒドロキシ基と1つのチオール基を有する化合物としては、例えば、1-メルカプト-1,1-メタンジオール、1-メルカプト-1,1-エタンジオール、3-メルカプト-1,2-プロパンジオール(チオグリセリン)、2-メルカプト-1,2-プロパンジオール、2-メルカプト-2-メチル-1,3-プロパンジオール、2-メルカプト-2-エチル-1,3-プロパンジオール、1-メルカプト-2,2-プロパンジオール、2-メルカプトエチル-2-メチル-1,3-プロパンジオール、又は2-メルカプトエチル-2-エチル-1,3-プロパンジオール等が挙げられる。その他のヒドロキシ基含有化合物については、特開2018-101039号公報の段落番号0084~0095に記載された化合物が挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The resin containing a repeating unit represented by the formula (b-10) is obtained by reacting at least one acid anhydride selected from aromatic tetracarboxylic acid anhydrides and aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydrides with a hydroxy group-containing compound. Can be manufactured. Examples of the aromatic tetracarboxylic acid anhydride and aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride include those mentioned above. The hydroxy group-containing compound is not particularly limited as long as it has a hydroxy group in the molecule, but is preferably a polyol having two or more hydroxy groups in the molecule. It is also preferable to use a compound having two hydroxy groups and one thiol group in the molecule as the hydroxy group-containing compound. Examples of the compound having two hydroxy groups and one thiol group in the molecule include 1-mercapto-1,1-methanediol, 1-mercapto-1,1-ethanediol, 3-mercapto-1,2- Propanediol (thioglycerin), 2-mercapto-1,2-propanediol, 2-mercapto-2-methyl-1,3-propanediol, 2-mercapto-2-ethyl-1,3-propanediol, 1- Examples thereof include mercapto-2,2-propanediol, 2-mercaptoethyl-2-methyl-1,3-propanediol, 2-mercaptoethyl-2-ethyl-1,3-propanediol and the like. Examples of other hydroxy group-containing compounds include the compounds described in JP-A-2018-101039, paragraphs 0084 to 0095, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 上記酸無水物中の酸無水物基と、ヒドロキシ基含有化合物中のヒドロキシ基のモル比(酸無水物基/ヒドロキシ基)は0.5~1.5であることが好ましい。 The molar ratio of the acid anhydride group in the acid anhydride to the hydroxy group in the hydroxy group-containing compound (acid anhydride group / hydroxy group) is preferably 0.5 to 1.5.
 式(b-10)で表される繰り返し単位を含む樹脂の重量平均分子量は、2000~35000であることが好ましい。上限は25000以下であることが好ましく、20000以下であることがより好ましく、15000以下であることが更に好ましい。下限は、4000以上であることが好ましく、6000以上であることがより好ましく、7000以上であることが更に好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight of the resin containing the repeating unit represented by the formula (b-10) is preferably 2000 to 35,000. The upper limit is preferably 25,000 or less, more preferably 20,000 or less, and further preferably 15,000 or less. The lower limit is preferably 4000 or more, more preferably 6000 or more, and further preferably 7000 or more.
 式(b-10)で表される繰り返し単位を含む樹脂の酸価は5~200mgKOH/gが好ましい。上限は150mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましく、100mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましく、80mgKOH/g以下であることが更に好ましい。下限は10mgKOH/g以上であることが好ましく、15mgKOH/g以上であることがより好ましく、20mgKOH/g以上であることが更に好ましい。 The acid value of the resin containing the repeating unit represented by the formula (b-10) is preferably 5 to 200 mgKOH / g. The upper limit is preferably 150 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 100 mgKOH / g or less, and further preferably 80 mgKOH / g or less. The lower limit is preferably 10 mgKOH / g or more, more preferably 15 mgKOH / g or more, and further preferably 20 mgKOH / g or more.
 重合性樹脂は、下記式(OP1)で表される化合物を用いることも好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
 式中、Rpは数平均分子量400~30000であり、エチレン性不飽和結合基を有するポリエーテル残基および/またはポリエステル残基を表し、yは1~2の数を表す。
As the polymerizable resin, it is also preferable to use a compound represented by the following formula (OP1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
In the formula, Rp 4 has a number average molecular weight of 400 to 30000, represents a polyether residue and / or a polyester residue having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group, and y represents a number of 1 to 2.
 Rpの数平均分子量は、より好ましくは400~10000であり、更に好ましくは400~3000である。Rpの数平均分子量が上記範囲であれば顔料の分散性が良好であり、このような樹脂は分散剤として好ましく用いられる。 The number average molecular weight of Rp 4 is more preferably 400 to 10000, further preferably 400 to 3000. When the number average molecular weight of Rp 4 is in the above range, the dispersibility of the pigment is good, and such a resin is preferably used as a dispersant.
 Rpが表すエチレン性不飽和結合基を有するポリエーテル残基および/またはポリエステル残基としては、スチレン基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、シアノアクリロイル基、ビニルエーテル基等を有するポリエーテル残基および/またはポリエステル残基が挙げられる。 Examples of the polyether residue and / or polyester residue having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group represented by Rp 4 include a polyether residue having a styrene group, a (meth) acryloyl group, a cyanoacryloyl group, a vinyl ether group and / or the like. Examples include polyester residues.
 Rpは、下記式(Rp-1)で表される基であることが好ましい。
 -Rp12-O-Rp13-(O-Rp14
 式中、Rp12はアルキレン基を表し、Rp13は3価以上の多価アルコール残基を表し、Rp14は(メタ)アクリロイル基またはシアノアクリロイル基を表し、sは2以上を表す。
Rp 4 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (Rp-1).
-Rp 12 -O-Rp 13 - ( O-Rp 14) S
In the formula, Rp 12 represents an alkylene group, Rp 13 represents a trivalent or higher polyhydric alcohol residue, Rp 14 represents a (meth) acryloyl group or a cyanoacryloyl group, and s represents 2 or more.
 Rp12は炭素数8以下のアルキレン基が好ましい。また、顔料分散性の観点からsは2以上が好ましい。この場合、Rp14は互いに異なる基を用いても良い。sは2~5が更に好ましく、2が特に好ましい。 Rp 12 is preferably an alkylene group having 8 or less carbon atoms. Further, s is preferably 2 or more from the viewpoint of pigment dispersibility. In this case, Rp 14 may use different groups from each other. s is more preferably 2 to 5, and particularly preferably 2.
 Rp13で用いられる3価以上の多価アルコールとしてはグリセリン、プロピルアルコール、ペンタエリスリトール、ジペンタエリスリトール等が挙げられる。特に3~6価のものが好ましい。 Examples of the trihydric or higher polyhydric alcohol used for Rp 13 include glycerin, propyl alcohol, pentaerythritol, and dipentaerythritol. Particularly, trivalent to hexavalent ones are preferable.
 式(OP1)で表される化合物は、Rpが単一種のリン酸エステルでも良いし、異なるRpからなるリン酸エステルを複数種用いても良い。また、y=1の化合物を単独でも良いし、y=1の化合物とy=2の化合物との混合物でもよい。式(OP1)で表される化合物において、y=1の化合物とy=2の化合物の存在比が100:0~100:30であると、顔料分散性が良好になり好ましい。また、式(OP1)で表される化合物のRpが、数平均分子量400~10000(より好ましくは400~3000)のポリカプロラクトン残基であると、顔料分散性が良好になり好ましい。 Compounds of formula (OP1) is to Rp 4 may be a single species of phosphoric acid esters may be used more phosphoric acid esters of different Rp 4. Further, the compound of y = 1 may be used alone, or a mixture of the compound of y = 1 and the compound of y = 2 may be used. In the compound represented by the formula (OP1), when the abundance ratio of the compound of y = 1 and the compound of y = 2 is 100: 0 to 100: 30, the pigment dispersibility becomes good, which is preferable. Further, when Rp 4 of the compound represented by the formula (OP1) is a polycaprolactone residue having a number average molecular weight of 400 to 10000 (more preferably 400 to 3000), the pigment dispersibility becomes good, which is preferable.
 着色組成物の全固形分中における樹脂の含有量は、25~60質量%であることが好ましい。上限は55質量%以下であることが好ましく、50質量%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は30質量%以上であることが好ましく、35質量%以上であることがより好ましい。 The content of the resin in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 25 to 60% by mass. The upper limit is preferably 55% by mass or less, and more preferably 50% by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 30% by mass or more, and more preferably 35% by mass or more.
 また、本発明では、本発明の着色組成物に含まれる樹脂の全量中におけるエチレン性不飽和結合基を有する樹脂の含有量は、50~100質量%であることが好ましく、60~100質量%であることがより好ましく、70~100質量%であることが更に好ましい。 Further, in the present invention, the content of the resin having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group in the total amount of the resin contained in the coloring composition of the present invention is preferably 50 to 100% by mass, and 60 to 100% by mass. Is more preferable, and 70 to 100% by mass is further preferable.
 また、本発明では、エチレン性不飽和結合基を有する樹脂と、エチレン性不飽和結合基を有さない樹脂とを併用することも好ましい。この態様によれば、色ムラをより効果に抑制することができる。この場合、エチレン性不飽和結合基を有する樹脂と、エチレン性不飽和結合基を有さない樹脂との質量比は、エチレン性不飽和結合基を有する樹脂:エチレン性不飽和結合基を有さない樹脂=1:0.001~0.800が好ましく、1:0.002~0.700がより好ましく、1:0.003~0.600が更に好ましい。 In the present invention, it is also preferable to use a resin having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group and a resin having no ethylenically unsaturated bond group together. According to this aspect, color unevenness can be suppressed more effectively. In this case, the mass ratio of the resin having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group and the resin having no ethylenically unsaturated bond group is a resin having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group: a resin having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group. No resin = 1: 0.001 to 0.800 is preferable, 1: 0.002 to 0.700 is more preferable, and 1: 0.003 to 0.600 is further preferable.
<<重合性モノマー>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、エチレン性不飽和結合基を有する重合性モノマー(以下、重合性モノマーという)を含有する。エチレン性不飽和結合基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基などが挙げられる。重合性モノマーはラジカルにより重合可能な化合物(ラジカル重合性モノマー)であることが好ましい。
<< polymerizable monomer >>
The colored composition of the present invention contains a polymerizable monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group (hereinafter referred to as a polymerizable monomer). Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated bond group include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group and a (meth) acryloyl group. The polymerizable monomer is preferably a compound that can be polymerized by radicals (radical polymerizable monomer).
 重合性モノマーは、エチレン性不飽和結合基を3個以上含む化合物であることが好ましい。エチレン性不飽和結合基の上限は、15個以下であることが好ましく、10個以下であることがより好ましく、6個以下であることが更に好ましい。また、重合性モノマーは、3官能以上の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることが好ましく、3~15官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることがより好ましく、3~10官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることが更に好ましく、3~6官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることが特に好ましい。 The polymerizable monomer is preferably a compound containing three or more ethylenically unsaturated bond groups. The upper limit of the ethylenically unsaturated bond group is preferably 15 or less, more preferably 10 or less, and further preferably 6 or less. The polymerizable monomer is preferably a tri- or higher functional (meth) acrylate compound, more preferably a 3- to 15-functional (meth) acrylate compound, and a 3- to 10-functional (meth) acrylate compound. It is more preferable that the (meth) acrylate compound having a functionality of 3 to 6 is used.
 重合性モノマーの分子量は、100~2000が好ましい。上限は、1500以下が好ましく、1000以下がより好ましく、450以下が更に好ましく、400以下が特に好ましい。下限は、150以上が好ましい。 The molecular weight of the polymerizable monomer is preferably 100 to 2000. The upper limit is preferably 1500 or less, more preferably 1000 or less, further preferably 450 or less, and particularly preferably 400 or less. The lower limit is preferably 150 or more.
 重合性モノマーのエチレン性不飽和結合基価(以下、C=C価という)は、組成物の経時安定性、および得られる膜の耐色抜け性などの観点から2~14mmol/gであることが好ましい。下限は、3mmol/g以上であることが好ましく、4mmol/g以上であることがより好ましく、5mmol/g以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は12mmol/g以下であることが好ましく、10mmol/g以下であることがより好ましく、8mmol/g以下であることが更に好ましい。重合性モノマーのC=C価は、重合性モノマーの1分子中に含まれるエチレン性不飽和結合基の数を重合性モノマーの分子量で割ることで算出した。 The ethylenically unsaturated bond group value of the polymerizable monomer (hereinafter referred to as C = C value) is 2 to 14 mmol / g from the viewpoint of stability of the composition over time, color fastness of the obtained film, and the like. Is preferred. The lower limit is preferably 3 mmol / g or more, more preferably 4 mmol / g or more, and further preferably 5 mmol / g or more. The upper limit is preferably 12 mmol / g or less, more preferably 10 mmol / g or less, and further preferably 8 mmol / g or less. The C = C value of the polymerizable monomer was calculated by dividing the number of ethylenically unsaturated bond groups contained in one molecule of the polymerizable monomer by the molecular weight of the polymerizable monomer.
 本発明で用いられる重合性モノマーは、エチレン性不飽和結合基を3個以上含む分子量450以下の化合物であることも好ましく、エチレン性不飽和結合基を3個含む分子量450以下の化合物であることがより好ましく、分子量450以下の3官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることが更に好ましい。この態様によれば、得られる膜の耐溶剤性をより向上させることができる。このような効果が得られる詳細な理由は明らかではないが、露光により非常に密度の高い網目構造を形成することができたためであると推測される。エチレン性不飽和結合基を3個含む分子量450以下の重合性モノマーとしては、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。 The polymerizable monomer used in the present invention is also preferably a compound having 3 or more ethylenically unsaturated bond groups and having a molecular weight of 450 or less, and a compound having 3 ethylenically unsaturated bond groups and having a molecular weight of 450 or less. Is more preferable, and a trifunctional (meth) acrylate compound having a molecular weight of 450 or less is further preferable. According to this aspect, the solvent resistance of the obtained film can be further improved. Although the detailed reason why such an effect is obtained is not clear, it is presumed that it is because a highly dense network structure could be formed by exposure. Examples of the polymerizable monomer having three ethylenically unsaturated bond groups and having a molecular weight of 450 or less include trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate.
 本発明で用いられる重合性モノマーは、イソシアヌレート骨格を有する化合物であることも好ましい。イソシアヌレート骨格を有する重合性モノマーの具体例としては、イソシアヌル酸トリス(2-アクリロイルオキシエチル)、εカプロラクトン変性トリス-(2-アクリロキシエチル)イソシアヌレートなどが挙げられる。市販品としては、ファンクリルFA-731A(日立化成(株)製))、NKエステルA9300、A9300-1CL、A9300-3CL(新中村化学工業(株)製、アロニックスM-315(東亞合成(株)製)等が挙げられる。 The polymerizable monomer used in the present invention is also preferably a compound having an isocyanurate skeleton. Specific examples of the polymerizable monomer having an isocyanurate skeleton include tris (2-acryloyloxyethyl) isocyanurate and ε-caprolactone-modified tris- (2-acryloxyethyl) isocyanurate. Commercially available products include Fancryl FA-731A (manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.), NK ester A9300, A9300-1CL, A9300-3CL (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), Aronix M-315 (Toagosei Co., Ltd.). ) And the like.
 本発明では、重合性モノマーとして、ジペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-330;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-320;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-310;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD DPHA;日本化薬(株)製、NKエステルA-DPH-12E;新中村化学工業(株)製)、およびこれらの(メタ)アクリロイル基がエチレングリコールおよび/またはプロピレングリコール残基を介して結合している構造の化合物(例えば、サートマー社から市販されている、SR454、SR499)などを用いることもできる。また、重合性モノマーとして、アロニックス M-402(東亞合成(株)製、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレートとジペンタエリスリトールペンタアクリレートの混合物)を用いることも好ましい。 In the present invention, as the polymerizable monomer, dipentaerythritol triacrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D-330; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D-320; Japanized) Yakuhin Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D-310; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (commercially available KAYARAD DPHA; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., NK Ester A-DPH-12E; Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., and these (meth) acryloyl groups bound to each other via ethylene glycol and / or propylene glycol residues. A compound with a structure such as a sartomer Commercially available from, may SR454, SR499) be used. It is also preferable to use Aronix M-402 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd., a mixture of dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate and dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate) as the polymerizable monomer.
 本発明では重合性モノマーとして、酸基を有する重合性モノマーを用いることも好ましい。酸基を有する重合性モノマーを用いることで、現像時に未露光部の着色組成物層が除去されやすく、現像残渣の発生を抑制できる。酸基としては、カルボキシル基、スルホ基、リン酸基等が挙げられ、カルボキシル基が好ましい。酸基を有する重合性モノマーとしては、コハク酸変性ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレートなどが挙げられる。酸基を有する重合性モノマーの市販品としては、アロニックスM-510、M-520、アロニックスTO-2349(東亞合成(株)製)等が挙げられる。酸基を有する重合性モノマーの好ましい酸価としては、0.1~40mgKOH/gであり、より好ましくは5~30mgKOH/gである。重合性モノマーの酸価が0.1mgKOH/g以上であれば、現像液に対する溶解性が良好であり、40mgKOH/g以下であれば、製造や取扱い上、有利である。 In the present invention, it is also preferable to use a polymerizable monomer having an acid group as the polymerizable monomer. By using the polymerizable monomer having an acid group, the coloring composition layer in the unexposed area can be easily removed during development, and the development residue can be suppressed. Examples of the acid group include a carboxyl group, a sulfo group and a phosphoric acid group, and a carboxyl group is preferable. Examples of the polymerizable monomer having an acid group include succinic acid-modified dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate. Examples of commercially available polymerizable monomers having an acid group include Aronix M-510, M-520, Aronix TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.) and the like. The acid value of the polymerizable monomer having an acid group is preferably 0.1 to 40 mgKOH / g, more preferably 5 to 30 mgKOH / g. When the acid value of the polymerizable monomer is 0.1 mgKOH / g or more, the solubility in the developing solution is good, and when it is 40 mgKOH / g or less, it is advantageous in production and handling.
 本発明では重合性モノマーとして、カプロラクトン構造を有する化合物を用いることも好ましい。カプロラクトン構造を有する重合性モノマーは、例えば、日本化薬(株)からKAYARAD DPCAシリーズとして市販されており、DPCA-20、DPCA-30、DPCA-60、DPCA-120等が挙げられる。 In the present invention, it is also preferable to use a compound having a caprolactone structure as the polymerizable monomer. The polymerizable monomer having a caprolactone structure is commercially available from Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. as KAYARAD DPCA series, and examples thereof include DPCA-20, DPCA-30, DPCA-60, and DPCA-120.
 重合性モノマーは、特開2017-048367号公報、特許第6057891号公報、特許第6031807号公報に記載されている化合物、特開2017-194662号公報に記載されている化合物、8UH-1006、8UH-1012(以上、大成ファインケミカル(株)製)、ライトアクリレートPOB-A0(共栄社化学(株)製)などを用いることも好ましい。 The polymerizable monomer is a compound described in JP-A-2017-048367, JP-A-6057891, JP-A-6031807, a compound described in JP-A-2017-194662, 8UH-1006, 8UH. It is also preferable to use -1012 (all manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemicals Co., Ltd.) and light acrylate POB-A0 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.).
 本発明で用いられる重合性モノマーは、コハク酸変性ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレートおよびジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレートから選ばれる少なくとも1種を含むものであることが好ましい。この態様によれば、より優れたフォトリソグラフィ性が得られやすい。 The polymerizable monomer used in the present invention contains at least one selected from succinic acid-modified dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate and dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate. preferable. According to this aspect, more excellent photolithographic property can be easily obtained.
 着色組成物の全固形分中における重合性モノマーの含有量は0.1~6.0質量%である。下限は、0.5質量%以上が好ましく、1.0質量%以上がより好ましく、1.5質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は、5.5質量%以下が好ましく、5.0質量%以下がより好ましく、4.5質量%以下が更に好ましい。 The content of the polymerizable monomer in the total solid content of the coloring composition is 0.1 to 6.0% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1.0% by mass or more, and further preferably 1.5% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 5.5% by mass or less, more preferably 5.0% by mass or less, and further preferably 4.5% by mass or less.
 また、着色組成物の全固形分中における樹脂と重合性モノマーとの合計の含有量は、25.5~65.5質量%であることが好ましい。上限は60.0質量%以下であることが好ましく、54.5質量%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は31.0質量%以上であることが好ましく、36.5質量%以上であることがより好ましい。 Further, the total content of the resin and the polymerizable monomer in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 25.5 to 65.5 mass%. The upper limit is preferably 60.0 mass% or less, more preferably 54.5 mass% or less. The lower limit is preferably 31.0 mass% or more, and more preferably 36.5 mass% or more.
 また、着色組成物の全固形分中における光重合開始剤と重合性モノマーとの合計の含有量は、1.4~12.5質量%であることが好ましい。上限は11.0質量%以下であることが好ましく、9.5質量%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は2.2質量%以上であることが好ましく、3.0質量%以上であることがより好ましい。 Further, the total content of the photopolymerization initiator and the polymerizable monomer in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1.4 to 12.5% by mass. The upper limit is preferably 11.0% by mass or less, and more preferably 9.5% by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 2.2% by mass or more, and more preferably 3.0% by mass or more.
 また、着色組成物に含まれる重合性モノマーの質量Mと、着色組成物に含まれる樹脂の質量Bとの比(M/B)は、0.03~0.15であることが好ましい。前述の比の値の下限は、0.035以上が好ましく、0.040以上がより好ましく、0.045以上が更に好ましい。上限は0.13以下が好ましく、0.11以下がより好ましく、0.9以下が更に好ましい。前述の比が0.03以上であればフォトリソグラフィ法でのパターン形成性が良好であり、0.15以下であればフォトリソグラフィ法でのパターン形成時における残渣の発生をより効果的に抑制できる。 Further, the ratio (M 1 / B 1 ) of the mass M 1 of the polymerizable monomer contained in the coloring composition to the mass B 1 of the resin contained in the coloring composition is 0.03 to 0.15. Is preferred. The lower limit of the ratio value is preferably 0.035 or more, more preferably 0.040 or more, and further preferably 0.045 or more. The upper limit is preferably 0.13 or less, more preferably 0.11 or less, and further preferably 0.9 or less. If the above-mentioned ratio is 0.03 or more, the pattern formability by the photolithography method is good, and if it is 0.15 or less, the generation of residues during the pattern formation by the photolithography method can be suppressed more effectively. .
 また、着色組成物に含まれる重合性モノマーの質量Mと、着色組成物に含まれる光重合開始剤の質量Iとの比(M/I)は、0.013~12.000であることが好ましい。前述の比の値の下限は、0.071以上が好ましく、0.167以上がより好ましく、0.300以上が更に好ましい。上限は6.111以下が好ましく、4.167以下がより好ましく、3.000以下が更に好ましい。前述の比が0.013以上であれば線幅感度が良好であり、12.000以下であればフォトリソグラフィ法でのパターン形成性が良好である。 Further, the ratio (M 1 / I 1 ) of the mass M 1 of the polymerizable monomer contained in the coloring composition and the mass I 1 of the photopolymerization initiator contained in the coloring composition is 0.013 to 12,000. Is preferred. The lower limit of the ratio value is preferably 0.071 or more, more preferably 0.167 or more, still more preferably 0.300 or more. The upper limit is preferably 6.111 or less, more preferably 4.167 or less, still more preferably 3,000 or less. If the above-mentioned ratio is 0.013 or more, the line width sensitivity is good, and if it is 12.000 or less, the pattern formability by the photolithography method is good.
 本発明の着色組成物において、重合性モノマーは1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。また、重合性モノマーを2種以上用いる場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 In the colored composition of the present invention, the polymerizable monomer may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Moreover, when two or more polymerizable monomers are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof be within the above range.
<<光重合開始剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は光重合開始剤を含む。光重合開始剤としては、特に制限はなく、公知の光重合開始剤の中から適宜選択することができる。例えば、紫外線領域から可視領域の光線に対して感光性を有する化合物が好ましい。光重合開始剤は、光ラジカル重合開始剤であることが好ましい。
<< photopolymerization initiator >>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a photopolymerization initiator. The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, compounds having photosensitivity to light rays in the ultraviolet region to the visible region are preferable. The photopolymerization initiator is preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator.
 光重合開始剤としては、ハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体(例えば、トリアジン骨格を有する化合物、オキサジアゾール骨格を有する化合物など)、アシルホスフィン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール化合物、オキシム化合物、有機過酸化物、チオ化合物、ケトン化合物、芳香族オニウム塩、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、フェニルグリオキシレート化合物などが挙げられる。光重合開始剤は、露光感度の観点から、オキシム化合物、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、および、アシルホスフィン化合物から選ばれる化合物であることがより好ましく、オキシム化合物であることが更に好ましい。光重合開始剤については、特開2014-130173号公報の段落0065~0111、特許第6301489号公報の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thiols. Examples thereof include compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, α-hydroxyketone compounds, α-aminoketone compounds and phenylglyoxylate compounds. From the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, the photopolymerization initiator is more preferably a compound selected from an oxime compound, an α-hydroxyketone compound, an α-aminoketone compound, and an acylphosphine compound, and further preferably an oxime compound. . Regarding the photopolymerization initiator, the descriptions in paragraphs 0065 to 0111 and JP 6301489 of JP-A-2014-130173 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
 α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物の市販品としては、IRGACURE-184、DAROCUR-1173、IRGACURE-500、IRGACURE-2959、IRGACURE-127(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。α-アミノケトン化合物の市販品としては、IRGACURE-907、IRGACURE-369、IRGACURE-379、及び、IRGACURE-379EG(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。アシルホスフィン化合物の市販品としては、IRGACURE-819、DAROCUR-TPO(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of commercially available α-hydroxyketone compounds include IRGACURE-184, DAROCUR-1173, IRGACURE-500, IRGACURE-2959, and IRGACURE-127 (all manufactured by BASF). Commercially available α-aminoketone compounds include IRGACURE-907, IRGACURE-369, IRGACURE-379, and IRGACURE-379EG (all manufactured by BASF). Examples of commercially available acylphosphine compounds include IRGACURE-819 and DAROCUR-TPO (above, manufactured by BASF).
 オキシム化合物としては、特開2001-233842号公報に記載の化合物、特開2000-080068号公報に記載の化合物、特開2006-342166号公報に記載の化合物、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年、pp.1653-1660)に記載の化合物、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年、pp.156-162)に記載の化合物、Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology(1995年、pp.202-232)に記載の化合物、特開2000-066385号公報に記載の化合物、特表2004-534797号公報に記載の化合物、特開2006-342166号公報に記載の化合物、特開2017-019766号公報に記載の化合物、特許第6065596号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2015/152153号に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/051680号に記載の化合物、特開2017-198865号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/164127号の段落番号0025~0038に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。オキシム化合物の具体例としては、3-ベンゾイルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-アセトキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-プロピオニルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、2-アセトキシイミノペンタン-3-オン、2-アセトキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、2-ベンゾイルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、3-(4-トルエンスルホニルオキシ)イミノブタン-2-オン、及び2-エトキシカルボニルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オンなどが挙げられる。市販品としては、IRGACURE-OXE01、IRGACURE-OXE02、IRGACURE-OXE03、IRGACURE-OXE04(以上、BASF社製)、TR-PBG-304(常州強力電子新材料有限公司製)、アデカオプトマーN-1919((株)ADEKA製、特開2012-014052号公報に記載の光重合開始剤2)が挙げられる。また、オキシム化合物としては、着色性が無い化合物や、透明性が高く変色し難い化合物を用いることも好ましい。市販品としては、アデカアークルズNCI-730、NCI-831、NCI-930(以上、(株)ADEKA製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the oxime compound include the compounds described in JP 2001-233842 A, the compounds described in JP 2000-080068 A, the compounds described in JP 2006-342166 A, the compounds described in J. C. S. Perkin II (1979, pp. 1653-1660), the compound described in J. C. S. Compounds described in Perkin II (1979, pp.156-162), Compounds described in Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995, pp.202-232), compounds described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-066385, Compounds described in JP-A-2004-534797, JP-A-2006-342166, JP-A-2017-0197766, JP-A-6065596, and WO 2015 / 152153, the compound described in WO2017 / 051680, the compound described in JP-A-2017-198865, and the paragraphs 0025 to 0038 of WO2017 / 164127. Such compounds, and the like. Specific examples of the oxime compound include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentan-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3- (4-toluenesulfonyloxy) iminobutan-2-one, and 2-ethoxycarbonyloxy Examples thereof include imino-1-phenylpropan-1-one. Commercially available products include IRGACURE-OXE01, IRGACURE-OXE02, IRGACURE-OXE03, IRGACURE-OXE04 (all manufactured by BASF), TR-PBG-304 (manufactured by Changzhou Tengden Electronic New Materials Co., Ltd.), and ADEKA OPTOMER N-1919. (Photopolymerization initiator 2 described in JP 2012-014052, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) can be used. As the oxime compound, it is also preferable to use a compound having no coloring property or a compound having high transparency and being resistant to discoloration. Examples of commercially available products include ADEKA ARKUL'S NCI-730, NCI-831, NCI-930 (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation).
 本発明において、光重合開始剤として、フルオレン環を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。フルオレン環を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2014-137466号公報に記載の化合物が挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 In the present invention, an oxime compound having a fluorene ring can be used as the photopolymerization initiator. Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorene ring include the compounds described in JP-A-2014-137466. This content is incorporated herein.
 本発明において、光重合開始剤として、フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2010-262028号公報に記載の化合物、特表2014-500852号公報に記載の化合物24、36~40、特開2013-164471号公報に記載の化合物(C-3)などが挙げられる。これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 In the present invention, an oxime compound having a fluorine atom can be used as the photopolymerization initiator. Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorine atom are described in JP 2010-262028 A, compounds 24, 36 to 40 described in JP-A-2014-500852, and JP 2013-164471 A. Compound (C-3) and the like. These contents are incorporated herein.
 本発明において、光重合開始剤として、ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物を用いることができる。ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物は、二量体とすることも好ましい。ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2013-114249号公報の段落番号0031~0047、特開2014-137466号公報の段落番号0008~0012、0070~0079に記載されている化合物、特許4223071号公報の段落番号0007~0025に記載されている化合物、アデカアークルズNCI-831((株)ADEKA製)が挙げられる。 In the present invention, an oxime compound having a nitro group can be used as the photopolymerization initiator. The oxime compound having a nitro group is also preferably dimerized. Specific examples of the oxime compound having a nitro group include compounds described in paragraphs 0031 to 0047 of JP2013-114249A, paragraphs 0008 to 0012 and 0070 to 0079 of JP2014-137466A, The compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0007 to 0025 of Japanese Patent No. 4223071 are ADEKA ARCRUZ NCI-831 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation).
 本発明において、光重合開始剤として、ベンゾフラン骨格を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。具体例としては、国際公開第2015/036910号に記載されるOE-01~OE-75が挙げられる。 In the present invention, an oxime compound having a benzofuran skeleton can be used as the photopolymerization initiator. Specific examples thereof include OE-01 to OE-75 described in WO 2015/036910.
 本発明において好ましく使用されるオキシム化合物の具体例を以下に示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。 Specific examples of the oxime compound preferably used in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
 本発明は、光重合開始剤として、2官能あるいは3官能以上の光ラジカル重合開始剤を用いてもよい。そのような光ラジカル重合開始剤を用いることにより、光ラジカル重合開始剤の1分子から2つ以上のラジカルが発生するため、良好な感度が得られる。また、非対称構造の化合物を用いた場合においては、結晶性が低下して溶剤などへの溶解性が向上して、経時で析出しにくくなり、着色組成物の経時安定性を向上させることができる。2官能あるいは3官能以上の光ラジカル重合開始剤の具体例としては、特表2010-527339号公報、特表2011-524436号公報、国際公開第2015/004565号、特表2016-532675号公報の段落番号0412~0417、国際公開第2017/033680号の段落番号0039~0055に記載されているオキシム化合物の2量体、特表2013-522445号公報に記載されている化合物(E)および化合物(G)、国際公開第2016/034963号に記載されているCmpd1~7、特表2017-523465号公報の段落番号0007に記載されているオキシムエステル類光開始剤、特開2017-167399号公報の段落番号0020~0033に記載されている光開始剤、特開2017-151342号公報の段落番号0017~0026に記載されている光重合開始剤(A)などが挙げられる。 In the present invention, a bifunctional or trifunctional or higher functional photoradical polymerization initiator may be used as the photopolymerization initiator. By using such a photo-radical polymerization initiator, two or more radicals are generated from one molecule of the photo-radical polymerization initiator, so that good sensitivity can be obtained. Further, when a compound having an asymmetric structure is used, the crystallinity is lowered, the solubility in a solvent or the like is improved, it becomes difficult to deposit over time, and the stability over time of the coloring composition can be improved. . Specific examples of the bifunctional or trifunctional or more photoradical polymerization initiators include those disclosed in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2010-527339, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2011-524436, International Publication No. 2015/004565, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-532675. Dimers of oxime compounds described in paragraphs Nos. 0421 to 0417 and International Publication No. 2017/033680, paragraphs 0039 to 0055, compounds (E) and compounds described in JP-A No. 2013-522445. G), Cmpd 1 to 7 described in International Publication No. 2016/034963, and oxime ester photoinitiator described in paragraph No. 0007 of JP-A-2017-523465, JP-A-2017-167399. The photoinitiator described in paragraphs 0020 to 0033, JP-A-20 Photopolymerization initiators described in paragraphs 0017 to 0026 of JP-7-151342 (A), and the like.
 本発明では、光重合開始剤として、メタノール中での波長365nmの吸光係数が1.0×10mL/gcm以上の光重合開始剤1と、メタノール中での波長365nmの吸光係数が1.0×10mL/gcm以下で、かつ、波長254nmの吸光係数が1.0×10mL/gcm以上の光重合開始剤2と、を併用することも好ましい。この態様によれば、露光によって着色組成物を十分に硬化させやすく、より優れたフォトリソグラフィ性が得られやすい。光重合開始剤1および光重合開始剤2としては、上述した化合物のなかから上記の吸光係数を有する化合物を選択して用いることが好ましい。 In the present invention, as the photopolymerization initiator, the photopolymerization initiator 1 having an absorption coefficient at a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol of 1.0 × 10 4 mL / gcm or more, and the absorption coefficient at a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol of 1. It is also preferable to use together with the photopolymerization initiator 2 having a light absorption coefficient of 0 × 10 2 mL / gcm or less and a wavelength of 254 nm of 1.0 × 10 3 mL / gcm or more. According to this aspect, it is easy to sufficiently cure the coloring composition by exposure, and it is easy to obtain more excellent photolithographic property. As the photopolymerization initiator 1 and the photopolymerization initiator 2, it is preferable to select and use a compound having the above extinction coefficient from the above compounds.
 なお、本発明において、光重合開始剤の上記波長における吸光係数は、以下のようにして測定した値である。すなわち、光重合開始剤をメタノールに溶解させて測定溶液を調製し、前述の測定溶液の吸光度を測定することで算出した。具体的には、前述の測定溶液を幅1cmのガラスセルに入れ、Agilent Technologies社製UV-Vis-NIRスペクトルメーター(Cary5000)を用いて吸光度を測定し、下記式に当てはめて、波長365nmおよび波長254nmにおける吸光係数(mL/gcm)を算出した。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000037
 上記式においてεは吸光係数(mL/gcm)、Aは吸光度、cは光重合開始剤の濃度(g/mL)、lは光路長(cm)を表す。
In addition, in this invention, the light absorption coefficient in the said wavelength of a photoinitiator is the value measured as follows. That is, it was calculated by dissolving the photopolymerization initiator in methanol to prepare a measurement solution and measuring the absorbance of the above-mentioned measurement solution. Specifically, the above-mentioned measurement solution was placed in a glass cell having a width of 1 cm, and the absorbance was measured using a UV-Vis-NIR spectrometer (Cary5000) manufactured by Agilent Technologies, and the absorbance was applied to the following formula to obtain a wavelength of 365 nm and a wavelength. The extinction coefficient (mL / gcm) at 254 nm was calculated.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000037
In the above equation, ε is the extinction coefficient (mL / gcm), A is the absorbance, c is the concentration of the photopolymerization initiator (g / mL), and 1 is the optical path length (cm).
 光重合開始剤1のメタノール中での波長365nmにおける吸光係数は、1.1×10mL/gcm以上であることが好ましく、1.2×10~1.0×10mL/gcmであることがより好ましく、1.3×10~5.0×10mL/gcmであることがより更に好ましく、1.5×10~3.0×10mL/gcmであることが特に好ましい。
 また、光重合開始剤1のメタノール中での波長254nmの光の吸光係数は、1.0×10~1.0×10mL/gcmであることが好ましく、1.5×10~9.5×10mL/gcmであることがより好ましく、3.0×10~8.0×10mL/gcmであることが更に好ましい。
The extinction coefficient of the photopolymerization initiator 1 in methanol at a wavelength of 365 nm is preferably 1.1 × 10 4 mL / gcm or more, and 1.2 × 10 4 to 1.0 × 10 5 mL / gcm. It is more preferable that it is 1.3 × 10 4 to 5.0 × 10 4 mL / gcm, and it is still more preferable that it is 1.5 × 10 4 to 3.0 × 10 4 mL / gcm. Particularly preferred.
The absorption coefficient of light having a wavelength of 254 nm in the photopolymerization initiator 1 in methanol is preferably 1.0 × 10 4 to 1.0 × 10 5 mL / gcm, and 1.5 × 10 4 to It is more preferably 9.5 × 10 4 mL / gcm, further preferably 3.0 × 10 4 to 8.0 × 10 4 mL / gcm.
 光重合開始剤1としては、オキシム化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物が好ましく、オキシム化合物およびアシルホスフィン化合物がより好ましく、オキシム化合物が更に好ましく、フッ素原子を含むオキシム化合物およびベンゾフラン骨格を有するオキシム化合物が特に好ましい。
光重合開始剤1の具体例としては、上記のオキシム化合物の具体例で示した(C-13)、(C-15)などが挙げられる。
As the photopolymerization initiator 1, an oxime compound, an α-aminoketone compound and an acylphosphine compound are preferable, an oxime compound and an acylphosphine compound are more preferable, an oxime compound is further preferable, an oxime compound containing a fluorine atom and an oxime having a benzofuran skeleton. Compounds are particularly preferred.
Specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator 1 include (C-13) and (C-15) shown in the above specific examples of the oxime compound.
 光重合開始剤2のメタノール中での波長365nmの光の吸光係数は、10~1.0×10mL/gcmであることが好ましく、20~1.0×10mL/gcmであることがより好ましい。また、光重合開始剤2のメタノール中での波長254nmの光の吸光係数は、1.0×10~1.0×10mL/gcmであることが好ましく、5.0×10~1.0×10mL/gcmであることがより好ましい。光重合開始剤2としては、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、フェニルグリオキシレート化合物が好ましく、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物およびフェニルグリオキシレート化合物がより好ましく、ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物が更に好ましい。光重合開始剤2の具体例としては、1-ヒドロキシ-シクロヘキシル-フェニル-ケトン(市販品としては、例えば、IRGACURE-184、BASF社製)、1-[4-(2-ヒドロキシエトキシ)-フェニル]-2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチル-1-プロパン-1-オン(市販品としては、例えば、IRGACURE-2959、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。 The absorption coefficient of light having a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol of the photopolymerization initiator 2 is preferably 10 to 1.0 × 10 2 mL / gcm, and 20 to 1.0 × 10 2 mL / gcm. Is more preferable. Further, the absorption coefficient of light having a wavelength of 254 nm in methanol of the photopolymerization initiator 2 is preferably 1.0 × 10 3 to 1.0 × 10 6 mL / gcm, and 5.0 × 10 3 to It is more preferably 1.0 × 10 5 mL / gcm. The photopolymerization initiator 2 is preferably an α-hydroxyketone compound, an α-aminoketone compound, an acylphosphine compound or a phenylglyoxylate compound, more preferably an α-hydroxyketone compound or a phenylglyoxylate compound, and a hydroxyalkylphenone compound. Is more preferable. Specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator 2 include 1-hydroxy-cyclohexyl-phenyl-ketone (commercially available products are, for example, IRGACURE-184, manufactured by BASF), 1- [4- (2-hydroxyethoxy) -phenyl. ] -2-Hydroxy-2-methyl-1-propan-1-one (commercially available products include, for example, IRGACURE-2959, manufactured by BASF).
 着色組成物の全固形分中における光重合開始剤の含有量は0.5~8.0質量%が好ましい。下限は、0.9質量%以上が好ましく、1.2質量%以上がより好ましく、1.5質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は、7.0質量%以下が好ましく、6.0質量%以下がより好ましく、5.0質量%以下が更に好ましい。本発明の着色組成物において、光重合開始剤は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the photopolymerization initiator in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.5 to 8.0% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 0.9% by mass or more, more preferably 1.2% by mass or more, still more preferably 1.5% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 7.0 mass% or less, more preferably 6.0 mass% or less, and further preferably 5.0 mass% or less. In the colored composition of the present invention, the photopolymerization initiator may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more kinds are used, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
<<エポキシ基を有する化合物>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、エポキシ基を有する化合物を含有することができる(以下、更にエポキシ化合物ともいう)。エポキシ化合物としては、1分子内にエポキシ基を1つ以上有する化合物が挙げられ、エポキシ基を2つ以上有する化合物が好ましい。エポキシ化合物は、エポキシ基を1分子内に1~100個有することが好ましい。エポキシ基の数の上限は、例えば、10個以下とすることもでき、5個以下とすることもできる。エポキシ基の数の下限は、2個以上が好ましい。エポキシ化合物としては、特開2013-011869号公報の段落番号0034~0036、特開2014-043556号公報の段落番号0147~0156、特開2014-089408号公報の段落番号0085~0092に記載された化合物、特開2017-179172号公報に記載された化合物を用いることもできる。これらの内容は、本明細書に組み込まれる。
<< Compound Having Epoxy Group >>
The colored composition of the present invention can contain a compound having an epoxy group (hereinafter, also referred to as an epoxy compound). Examples of the epoxy compound include compounds having one or more epoxy groups in one molecule, and compounds having two or more epoxy groups are preferable. The epoxy compound preferably has 1 to 100 epoxy groups in one molecule. The upper limit of the number of epoxy groups may be, for example, 10 or less, or 5 or less. The lower limit of the number of epoxy groups is preferably 2 or more. Epoxy compounds are described in paragraph numbers 0034 to 0036 of JP2013-011869A, paragraphs 0147 to 0156 of JP2014043556A, and paragraphs 0085 to 0092 of JP2014-0889408A. Compounds, compounds described in JP-A-2017-179172 can also be used. These contents are incorporated herein.
 エポキシ化合物は、低分子化合物(例えば、分子量2000未満、さらには、分子量1000未満)でもよいし、高分子化合物(macromolecule)(例えば、分子量1000以上、ポリマーの場合は、重量平均分子量が1000以上)のいずれでもよい。エポキシ化合物の重量平均分子量は、200~100000が好ましく、500~50000がより好ましい。重量平均分子量の上限は、10000以下が好ましく、5000以下がより好ましく、3000以下が更に好ましい。 The epoxy compound may be a low molecular weight compound (for example, a molecular weight of less than 2,000, further less than 1,000), or a macromolecular compound (for example, a molecular weight of 1,000 or more, and in the case of a polymer, a weight average molecular weight of 1,000 or more). Any of The weight average molecular weight of the epoxy compound is preferably 200 to 100,000, more preferably 500 to 50,000. The upper limit of the weight average molecular weight is preferably 10,000 or less, more preferably 5000 or less, still more preferably 3000 or less.
 エポキシ化合物の市販品としては、例えば、EHPE3150((株)ダイセル製)、EPICLON N-695(DIC(株)製)等が挙げられる。 Examples of commercially available epoxy compounds include EHPE3150 (manufactured by Daicel Corporation), EPICLON N-695 (manufactured by DIC Corporation), and the like.
 着色組成物の全固形分中におけるエポキシ化合物の含有量は、0.1~20質量%が好ましい。下限は、例えば0.5質量%以上が好ましく、1質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は、例えば、15質量%以下が好ましく、10質量%以下が更に好ましい。着色組成物に含まれるエポキシ化合物は1種のみでもよく、2種以上でもよい。2種以上の場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the epoxy compound in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass. The lower limit is, for example, preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 1% by mass or more. The upper limit is, for example, preferably 15% by mass or less, and more preferably 10% by mass or less. The epoxy compound contained in the coloring composition may be only one kind or two or more kinds. When two or more kinds are used, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
<<シランカップリング剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、シランカップリング剤を含有することができる。この態様によれば、得られる膜の支持体との密着性をより向上させることができる。本発明において、シランカップリング剤は、加水分解性基とそれ以外の官能基とを有するシラン化合物を意味する。また、加水分解性基とは、ケイ素原子に直結し、加水分解反応及び縮合反応の少なくともいずれかによってシロキサン結合を生じ得る置換基をいう。加水分解性基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基、アシルオキシ基などが挙げられ、アルコキシ基が好ましい。すなわち、シランカップリング剤は、アルコキシシリル基を有する化合物が好ましい。また、加水分解性基以外の官能基としては、例えば、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、メルカプト基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、アミノ基、ウレイド基、スルフィド基、イソシアネート基、フェニル基などが挙げられ、アミノ基、(メタ)アクリロイル基およびエポキシ基が好ましい。シランカップリング剤の具体例としては、特開2009-288703号公報の段落番号0018~0036に記載の化合物、特開2009-242604号公報の段落番号0056~0066に記載の化合物が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<< silane coupling agent >>
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain a silane coupling agent. According to this aspect, the adhesion of the obtained film to the support can be further improved. In the present invention, the silane coupling agent means a silane compound having a hydrolyzable group and a functional group other than that. Further, the hydrolyzable group means a substituent which is directly bonded to a silicon atom and can form a siloxane bond by at least one of a hydrolysis reaction and a condensation reaction. Examples of the hydrolyzable group include a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group and the like, and an alkoxy group is preferable. That is, the silane coupling agent is preferably a compound having an alkoxysilyl group. Examples of functional groups other than hydrolyzable groups include vinyl group, (meth) allyl group, (meth) acryloyl group, mercapto group, epoxy group, oxetanyl group, amino group, ureido group, sulfide group, and isocyanate group. , A phenyl group and the like, and an amino group, a (meth) acryloyl group and an epoxy group are preferable. Specific examples of the silane coupling agent include the compounds described in JP-A 2009-288703, paragraphs 0018 to 0036, and the compounds described in JP-A 2009-242604, paragraphs 0056 to 0066. Are incorporated herein by reference.
 着色組成物の全固形分中におけるシランカップリング剤の含有量は、0.1~5質量%が好ましい。上限は、3質量%以下が好ましく、2質量%以下がより好ましい。下限は、0.5質量%以上が好ましく、1質量%以上がより好ましい。シランカップリング剤は、1種のみでもよく、2種以上でもよい。2種以上の場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the silane coupling agent in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass. The upper limit is preferably 3% by mass or less, more preferably 2% by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 1% by mass or more. The silane coupling agent may be only one kind or two or more kinds. When two or more kinds are used, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<<有機溶剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、有機溶剤を含有する。有機溶剤としては、各成分の溶解性や着色組成物の塗布性を満足すれば基本的には特に制限はない。有機溶剤としては、エステル系溶剤、ケトン系溶剤、アルコール系溶剤、アミド系溶剤、エーテル系溶剤、炭化水素系溶剤などが挙げられる。これらの詳細については、国際公開第2015/166779号の段落番号0223を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、環状アルキル基が置換したエステル系溶剤、環状アルキル基が置換したケトン系溶剤を好ましく用いることもできる。有機溶剤の具体例としては、ポリエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジクロロメタン、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、酢酸シクロヘキシル、シクロペンタノン、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、3-メトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロパンアミド、3-ブトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロパンアミドなどが挙げられる。ただし有機溶剤としての芳香族炭化水素類(ベンゼン、トルエン、キシレン、エチルベンゼン等)は、環境面等の理由により低減したほうがよい場合がある(例えば、有機溶剤全量に対して、50質量ppm(parts per million)以下とすることもでき、10質量ppm以下とすることもでき、1質量ppm以下とすることもできる)。
<< organic solvent >>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains an organic solvent. The organic solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as the solubility of each component and the coating property of the coloring composition are satisfied. Examples of the organic solvent include ester solvents, ketone solvents, alcohol solvents, amide solvents, ether solvents, hydrocarbon solvents and the like. For details of these, reference can be made to paragraph No. 0223 of WO 2015/166779, the content of which is incorporated herein. Further, an ester solvent substituted with a cyclic alkyl group and a ketone solvent substituted with a cyclic alkyl group can also be preferably used. Specific examples of the organic solvent include polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, dichloromethane, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, and 2 -Heptanone, cyclohexanone, cyclohexyl acetate, cyclopentanone, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxy-N, N-dimethylpropanamide, 3-butoxy-N , N-dimethylpropanamide and the like. However, it may be better to reduce the amount of aromatic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, etc.) as the organic solvent due to environmental reasons (for example, 50 mass ppm (parts relative to the total amount of the organic solvent). per million) or less, 10 mass ppm or less, or 1 mass ppm or less).
 本発明においては、金属含有量の少ない有機溶剤を用いることが好ましく、有機溶剤の金属含有量は、例えば10質量ppb(parts per billion)以下であることが好ましい。必要に応じて質量ppt(parts per trillion)レベルの有機溶剤を用いてもよく、そのような有機溶剤は例えば東洋合成社が提供している(化学工業日報、2015年11月13日)。有機溶剤から金属等の不純物を除去する方法としては、例えば、蒸留(分子蒸留や薄膜蒸留等)やフィルタを用いたろ過を挙げることができる。ろ過に用いるフィルタのフィルタ孔径としては、10μm以下が好ましく、5μm以下がより好ましく、3μm以下が更に好ましい。フィルタの材質は、ポリテトラフロロエチレン、ポリエチレンまたはナイロンが好ましい。 In the present invention, it is preferable to use an organic solvent having a low metal content, and the metal content of the organic solvent is preferably, for example, 10 mass ppb (parts per billion) or less. If necessary, an organic solvent having a mass ppt (parts per trilion) level may be used, and such an organic solvent is provided by, for example, Toyo Gosei Co., Ltd. (Chemical Industry Daily, November 13, 2015). Examples of methods for removing impurities such as metals from the organic solvent include distillation (molecular distillation, thin film distillation, etc.) and filtration using a filter. The filter pore size of the filter used for filtration is preferably 10 μm or less, more preferably 5 μm or less, still more preferably 3 μm or less. The material of the filter is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene or nylon.
 着色組成物中における有機溶剤の含有量は、10~95質量%であることが好ましく、20~90質量%であることがより好ましく、30~90質量%であることが更に好ましい。 The content of the organic solvent in the coloring composition is preferably 10 to 95% by mass, more preferably 20 to 90% by mass, and further preferably 30 to 90% by mass.
<<硬化促進剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、重合性化合物の反応を促進させたり、硬化温度を下げる目的で、硬化促進剤を添加してもよい。硬化促進剤は、メチロール系化合物(例えば特開2015-034963号公報の段落番号0246において、架橋剤として例示されている化合物)、アミン類、ホスホニウム塩、アミジン塩、アミド化合物(以上、例えば特開2013-041165号公報の段落番号0186に記載の硬化剤)、塩基発生剤(例えば、特開2014-055114号公報に記載のイオン性化合物)、シアネート化合物(例えば、特開2012-150180号公報の段落番号0071に記載の化合物)、アルコキシシラン化合物(例えば、特開2011-253054号公報に記載のエポキシ基を有するアルコキシシラン化合物)、オニウム塩化合物(例えば、特開2015-034963号公報の段落番号0216に酸発生剤として例示されている化合物、特開2009-180949号公報に記載の化合物)などを用いることもできる。
<< Curing accelerator >>
A curing accelerator may be added to the colored composition of the present invention for the purpose of promoting the reaction of the polymerizable compound or lowering the curing temperature. The curing accelerator is a methylol compound (for example, a compound exemplified as a cross-linking agent in paragraph No. 0246 of JP-A-2005-034963), amines, phosphonium salts, amidine salts, amide compounds (above, for example, JP-A- Curing agent described in paragraph No. 0186 of 2013-041165, base generator (for example, ionic compound described in JP-A-2014-055114), cyanate compound (for example, JP-A-2012-150180) Paragraph No. 0071), an alkoxysilane compound (for example, an alkoxysilane compound having an epoxy group described in JP 2011-253054 A), an onium salt compound (for example, Paragraph Nos. JP 2005-034963 A). Compounds exemplified as acid generators in 0216 , Compounds described in JP-A-2009-180949) or the like can be used.
 本発明の着色組成物が硬化促進剤を含有する場合、硬化促進剤の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中0.3~8.9質量%が好ましく、0.8~6.4質量%がより好ましい。 When the coloring composition of the present invention contains a curing accelerator, the content of the curing accelerator is preferably 0.3 to 8.9% by mass based on the total solid content of the coloring composition, and 0.8 to 6.4. Mass% is more preferable.
<<重合禁止剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、重合禁止剤を含有することができる。重合禁止剤としては、ハイドロキノン、p-メトキシフェノール、ジ-tert-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ピロガロール、tert-ブチルカテコール、ベンゾキノン、4,4’-チオビス(3-メチル-6-tert-ブチルフェノール)、2,2’-メチレンビス(4-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、N-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシアミン塩(アンモニウム塩、第一セリウム塩等)が挙げられる。中でも、p-メトキシフェノールが好ましい。着色組成物の全固形分中における重合禁止剤の含有量は、0.0001~5質量%が好ましい。
<< polymerization inhibitor >>
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain a polymerization inhibitor. As the polymerization inhibitor, hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4′-thiobis (3-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine salt (ammonium salt, cerous salt, etc.) can be mentioned. Of these, p-methoxyphenol is preferable. The content of the polymerization inhibitor in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.0001 to 5% by mass.
<<界面活性剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、界面活性剤を含有することができる。界面活性剤としては、フッ素系界面活性剤、ノニオン系界面活性剤、カチオン系界面活性剤、アニオン系界面活性剤、シリコン系界面活性剤などの各種界面活性剤を使用することができる。界面活性剤については、国際公開第2015/166779号の段落番号0238~0245を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<< Surfactant >>
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain a surfactant. As the surfactant, various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicon-based surfactant can be used. Regarding the surfactant, paragraph numbers 0238 to 0245 of WO 2015/166779 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
 本発明において、界面活性剤はフッ素系界面活性剤であることが好ましい。着色組成物にフッ素系界面活性剤を含有させることで液特性(特に、流動性)がより向上し、省液性をより改善することができる。また、厚みムラの小さい膜を形成することもできる。 In the present invention, the surfactant is preferably a fluorinated surfactant. By including a fluorine-based surfactant in the coloring composition, liquid characteristics (particularly fluidity) can be further improved, and liquid saving can be further improved. It is also possible to form a film having a small thickness unevenness.
 フッ素系界面活性剤中のフッ素含有率は、3~40質量%が好適であり、より好ましくは5~30質量%であり、特に好ましくは7~25質量%である。フッ素含有率がこの範囲内であるフッ素系界面活性剤は、塗布膜の厚さの均一性や省液性の点で効果的であり、着色組成物中における溶解性も良好である。 The fluorine content in the fluorine-based surfactant is preferably 3 to 40% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7 to 25% by mass. A fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of the thickness of the coating film and liquid saving, and also has good solubility in the coloring composition.
 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、特開2014-041318号公報の段落番号0060~0064(対応する国際公開第2014/017669号の段落番号0060~0064)等に記載の界面活性剤、特開2011-132503号公報の段落番号0117~0132に記載の界面活性剤が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。フッ素系界面活性剤の市販品としては、例えば、メガファックF171、F172、F173、F176、F177、F141、F142、F143、F144、R30、F437、F475、F479、F482、F554、F780、EXP、MFS-330(以上、DIC(株)製)、フロラードFC430、FC431、FC171(以上、住友スリーエム(株)製)、サーフロンS-382、SC-101、SC-103、SC-104、SC-105、SC-1068、SC-381、SC-383、S-393、KH-40(以上、旭硝子(株)製)、PolyFox PF636、PF656、PF6320、PF6520、PF7002(以上、OMNOVA社製)等が挙げられる。 Examples of the fluorinated surfactant include surfactants described in paragraphs 0060 to 0064 of JP-A-04041318 (corresponding paragraphs 0060 to 0064 of WO 2014/017669) and JP-A-2011-2011. Examples thereof include the surfactants described in paragraph Nos. 0117 to 0132 of Japanese Patent No. 132503, the contents of which are incorporated herein. Examples of commercially available fluorine-based surfactants include Megafac F171, F172, F173, F176, F177, F141, F142, F143, F144, R30, F437, F475, F479, F482, F554, F780, EXP, MFS. -330 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation), Florard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, manufactured by Sumitomo 3M Limited), Surflon S-382, SC-101, SC-103, SC-104, SC-105, Examples include SC-1068, SC-381, SC-383, S-393, KH-40 (above Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.), PolyFox PF636, PF656, PF6320, PF6520, PF7002 (above OMNOVA). .
 また、フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素化アルキル基またはフッ素化アルキレンエーテル基を有するフッ素原子含有ビニルエーテル化合物と、親水性のビニルエーテル化合物との重合体を用いることも好ましい。このようなフッ素系界面活性剤は、特開2016-216602号公報の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Further, as the fluorine-based surfactant, it is also preferable to use a polymer of a fluorine atom-containing vinyl ether compound having a fluorinated alkyl group or a fluorinated alkylene ether group and a hydrophilic vinyl ether compound. Regarding such a fluorine-based surfactant, the description in JP-A-2016-216602 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
 フッ素系界面活性剤は、ブロックポリマーを用いることもできる。例えば特開2011-089090号公報に記載された化合物が挙げられる。フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素原子を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、アルキレンオキシ基(好ましくはエチレンオキシ基、プロピレンオキシ基)を2以上(好ましくは5以上)有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、を含む含フッ素高分子化合物も好ましく用いることができる。下記化合物も本発明で用いられるフッ素系界面活性剤として例示される。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
 上記の化合物の重量平均分子量は、好ましくは3000~50000であり、例えば、14000である。上記の化合物中、繰り返し単位の割合を示す%はモル%である。
A block polymer can also be used as the fluorine-based surfactant. For example, the compounds described in JP 2011-089090 A may be mentioned. The fluorine-based surfactant has a repeating unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and 2 or more (preferably 5 or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy groups and propyleneoxy groups) (meth). A fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from an acrylate compound can also be preferably used. The following compounds are also exemplified as the fluorine-based surfactant used in the present invention.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
The weight average molecular weight of the above compound is preferably 3,000 to 50,000, for example, 14,000. In the above compounds,% indicating the ratio of repeating units is mol%.
 また、フッ素系界面活性剤は、エチレン性不飽和結合基を側鎖に有する含フッ素重合体を用いることもできる。具体例としては、特開2010-164965号公報の段落番号0050~0090および段落番号0289~0295に記載された化合物、例えばDIC(株)製のメガファックRS-101、RS-102、RS-718K、RS-72-K等が挙げられる。フッ素系界面活性剤は、特開2015-117327号公報の段落番号0015~0158に記載の化合物を用いることもできる。 Also, as the fluorine-based surfactant, a fluorine-containing polymer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group in its side chain can be used. As specific examples, the compounds described in JP-A-2010-164965, paragraph numbers 0050 to 0090 and paragraph numbers 0289 to 0295, such as Megafac RS-101, RS-102, and RS-718K manufactured by DIC Corporation. , RS-72-K and the like. As the fluorine-based surfactant, the compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0015 to 0158 of JP-A-2005-117327 can be used.
 着色組成物の全固形分中における界面活性剤の含有量は、0.001質量%~5.0質量%が好ましく、0.005~3.0質量%がより好ましい。界面活性剤は、1種のみでもよく、2種以上でもよい。2種以上の場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the surfactant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005% by mass to 3.0% by mass. The surfactant may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more kinds are used, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<<紫外線吸収剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、紫外線吸収剤を含有することができる。紫外線吸収剤は、共役ジエン化合物、アミノジエン化合物、サリシレート化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物、アクリロニトリル化合物、ヒドロキシフェニルトリアジン化合物、インドール化合物、トリアジン化合物などを用いることができる。これらの詳細については、特開2012-208374号公報の段落番号0052~0072、特開2013-068814号公報の段落番号0317~0334、特開2016-162946号公報の段落番号0061~0080の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。紫外線吸収剤の市販品としては、例えば、UV-503(大東化学(株)製)などが挙げられる。また、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物としては、ミヨシ油脂製のMYUAシリーズ(化学工業日報、2016年2月1日)が挙げられる。また、紫外線吸収剤は、特許第6268967号公報の段落番号0049~0059に記載された化合物を用いることもできる。着色組成物の全固形分中における紫外線吸収剤の含有量は、0.01~10質量%が好ましく、0.01~5質量%がより好ましい。本発明において、紫外線吸収剤は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<< UV absorber >>
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain an ultraviolet absorber. As the ultraviolet absorber, a conjugated diene compound, an aminodiene compound, a salicylate compound, a benzophenone compound, a benzotriazole compound, an acrylonitrile compound, a hydroxyphenyltriazine compound, an indole compound, a triazine compound or the like can be used. For details of these, please refer to paragraphs 0052 to 0072 of JP2012-208374A, paragraphs 0317 to 0334 of JP2013-068814A, and paragraphs 0061 to 0080 of JP2016-162946A. Reference may be made to these contents, which are incorporated herein. Examples of commercially available ultraviolet absorbers include UV-503 (manufactured by Daito Chemical Co., Ltd.). Examples of the benzotriazole compound include MYUA series manufactured by Miyoshi Oil & Fats (Chemical Industry Daily, February 1, 2016). Further, as the ultraviolet absorber, compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0049 to 0059 of Japanese Patent No. 6268967 can also be used. The content of the ultraviolet absorber in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass. In the present invention, the ultraviolet absorber may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more kinds are used, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<<酸化防止剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、酸化防止剤を含有することができる。酸化防止剤としては、フェノール化合物、亜リン酸エステル化合物、チオエーテル化合物などが挙げられる。フェノール化合物としては、フェノール系酸化防止剤として知られる任意のフェノール化合物を使用することができる。好ましいフェノール化合物としては、ヒンダードフェノール化合物が挙げられる。フェノール性ヒドロキシ基に隣接する部位(オルト位)に置換基を有する化合物が好ましい。前述の置換基としては炭素数1~22の置換又は無置換のアルキル基が好ましい。また、酸化防止剤は、同一分子内にフェノール基と亜リン酸エステル基を有する化合物も好ましい。また、酸化防止剤は、リン系酸化防止剤も好適に使用することができる。
<< Antioxidant >>
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain an antioxidant. Examples of antioxidants include phenol compounds, phosphite ester compounds, and thioether compounds. As the phenol compound, any phenol compound known as a phenolic antioxidant can be used. Preferable phenol compounds include hindered phenol compounds. A compound having a substituent at the site (ortho position) adjacent to the phenolic hydroxy group is preferred. As the above-mentioned substituent, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 22 carbon atoms is preferable. The antioxidant is also preferably a compound having a phenol group and a phosphite group in the same molecule. Further, as the antioxidant, a phosphorus-based antioxidant can also be preferably used.
 着色組成物の全固形分中における酸化防止剤の含有量は、0.01~20質量%であることが好ましく、0.3~15質量%であることがより好ましい。酸化防止剤は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the antioxidant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, and more preferably 0.3 to 15% by mass. As the antioxidant, only one kind may be used, or two or more kinds may be used. When two or more kinds are used, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<<その他成分>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、必要に応じて、増感剤、硬化促進剤、フィラー、熱硬化促進剤、可塑剤及びその他の助剤類(例えば、導電性粒子、充填剤、消泡剤、難燃剤、レベリング剤、剥離促進剤、香料、表面張力調整剤、連鎖移動剤など)を含有してもよい。これらの成分を適宜含有させることにより、膜物性などの性質を調整することができる。これらの成分は、例えば、特開2012-003225号公報の段落番号0183以降(対応する米国特許出願公開第2013/0034812号明細書の段落番号0237)の記載、特開2008-250074号公報の段落番号0101~0104、0107~0109等の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、本発明の着色組成物は、必要に応じて、潜在酸化防止剤を含有してもよい。潜在酸化防止剤としては、酸化防止剤として機能する部位が保護基で保護された化合物であって、100~250℃で加熱するか、又は酸/塩基触媒存在下で80~200℃で加熱することにより保護基が脱離して酸化防止剤として機能する化合物が挙げられる。潜在酸化防止剤としては、国際公開第2014/021023号、国際公開第2017/030005号、特開2017-008219号公報に記載された化合物が挙げられる。市販品としては、アデカアークルズGPA-5001((株)ADEKA製)等が挙げられる。また、本発明の着色組成物は、耐光性改良剤を含んでもよい。
<< Other ingredients >>
The coloring composition of the present invention, if necessary, a sensitizer, a curing accelerator, a filler, a thermal curing accelerator, a plasticizer and other auxiliaries (for example, conductive particles, a filler, a defoaming agent, Flame retardant, leveling agent, peeling accelerator, perfume, surface tension adjusting agent, chain transfer agent, etc.) may be contained. Properties such as film physical properties can be adjusted by appropriately incorporating these components. These components are described, for example, in paragraph No. 0183 or later (corresponding U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2013/0034812, paragraph No. 0237) of JP 2012-003225 A, or paragraphs of JP 2008-250074 A. References such as numbers 0101 to 0104 and 0107 to 0109 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in this specification. Moreover, the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a latent antioxidant, if necessary. The latent antioxidant is a compound in which the site functioning as an antioxidant is protected by a protecting group, and the compound is heated at 100 to 250 ° C or heated at 80 to 200 ° C in the presence of an acid / base catalyst. As a result, compounds in which the protecting group is eliminated to function as an antioxidant can be mentioned. Examples of the latent antioxidant include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2014/021023, International Publication No. 2017/030005, and JP-A-2017-008219. Examples of commercially available products include ADEKA ARCRUZ GPA-5001 (manufactured by ADEKA). Further, the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a light resistance improver.
 本発明の着色組成物の含水率は、通常3質量%以下であり、0.01~1.5質量%が好ましく、0.1~1.0質量%の範囲であることがより好ましい。含水率は、カールフィッシャー法にて測定することができる。 The water content of the coloring composition of the present invention is usually 3% by mass or less, preferably 0.01 to 1.5% by mass, and more preferably 0.1 to 1.0% by mass. The water content can be measured by the Karl Fischer method.
 本発明の着色組成物は、膜面状(平坦性など)の調整、膜厚の調整などを目的として粘度を調整して用いることができる。粘度の値は必要に応じて適宜選択することができるが、例えば、25℃において0.3mPa・s~50mPa・sが好ましく、0.5mPa・s~20mPa・sがより好ましい。粘度の測定方法としては、例えば、東機産業製 粘度計 RE85L(ローター:1°34’×R24、測定範囲0.6~1200mPa・s)を使用し、25℃に温度調整を施した状態で測定することができる。 The viscosity of the colored composition of the present invention can be adjusted for the purpose of adjusting the film surface condition (flatness, etc.) and adjusting the film thickness. The value of the viscosity can be appropriately selected as necessary, but for example, at 25 ° C., 0.3 mPa · s to 50 mPa · s is preferable, and 0.5 mPa · s to 20 mPa · s is more preferable. As a method for measuring the viscosity, for example, a Toki Sangyo viscometer RE85L (rotor: 1 ° 34 ′ × R24, measuring range: 0.6 to 1200 mPa · s) is used, and the temperature is adjusted to 25 ° C. Can be measured.
 本発明の着色組成物は、カラーフィルタにおける着色画素の形成用の着色組成物として好ましく用いることができる。着色画素としては、例えば、緑色画素、青色画素などが挙げられ、緑色画素または青色画素形成用の着色組成物としてより好ましく用いることができ、緑色画素形成用の着色組成物として更に好ましく用いることができる。 The coloring composition of the present invention can be preferably used as a coloring composition for forming colored pixels in a color filter. Examples of the colored pixel include a green pixel and a blue pixel, which can be more preferably used as a coloring composition for forming a green pixel or a blue pixel, and are more preferably used as a coloring composition for forming a green pixel. it can.
 本発明の着色組成物を液晶表示装置用途のカラーフィルタとして用いる場合、カラーフィルタを備えた液晶表示素子の電圧保持率は、70%以上であることが好ましく、90%以上であることがより好ましい。高い電圧保持率を得るための公知の手段を適宜組み込むことができ、典型的な手段としては純度の高い素材の使用(例えばイオン性不純物の低減)や、組成物中の酸性官能基量の制御が挙げられる。電圧保持率は、例えば特開2011-008004号公報の段落0243、特開2012-224847号公報の段落0123~0129に記載の方法等で測定することができる。 When the colored composition of the present invention is used as a color filter for a liquid crystal display device, the voltage holding ratio of the liquid crystal display device provided with the color filter is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 90% or more. . Known means for obtaining a high voltage holding ratio can be incorporated as appropriate, and typical means include the use of highly pure materials (for example, reduction of ionic impurities) and the control of the amount of acidic functional groups in the composition. Is mentioned. The voltage holding ratio can be measured by, for example, the method described in paragraph 0243 of JP 2011-008004 A, paragraphs 0123 to 0129 of JP 2012-224847 A, or the like.
 本発明の着色組成物の収容容器としては、特に限定はなく、公知の収容容器を用いることができる。また、収容容器として、原材料や組成物中への不純物混入を抑制することを目的に、容器内壁を6種6層の樹脂で構成する多層ボトルや6種の樹脂を7層構造にしたボトルを使用することも好ましい。このような容器としては例えば特開2015-123351号公報に記載の容器が挙げられる。また、本発明の着色組成物や、イメージセンサを製造するために用いられる組成物は、容器内壁からの金属溶出を防ぎ、組成物の保存安定性を高め、成分変質を抑制する目的で、収容容器の内壁をガラス製やステンレス製などにすることも好ましい。 The container for the colored composition of the present invention is not particularly limited, and a known container can be used. In addition, as the container, for the purpose of suppressing the mixing of impurities into the raw materials and the composition, a multi-layer bottle in which the inner wall of the container is composed of 6 types of 6 layers of resin or a bottle of 6 types of resin having 7 layers structure is used. It is also preferable to use. As such a container, for example, the container described in JP-A-2015-123351 can be mentioned. Further, the coloring composition of the present invention and the composition used for producing the image sensor are contained for the purpose of preventing metal elution from the inner wall of the container, enhancing the storage stability of the composition, and suppressing the component deterioration. It is also preferable that the inner wall of the container is made of glass or stainless steel.
<着色組成物の調製方法>
 本発明の着色組成物は、前述の成分を混合して調製できる。着色組成物の調製に際しては、全成分を同時に有機溶剤に溶解および/または分散して着色組成物を調製してもよいし、必要に応じて、各成分を適宜2つ以上の溶液または分散液としておいて、使用時(塗布時)にこれらを混合して着色組成物を調製してもよい。
<Method for preparing coloring composition>
The coloring composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the above components. In the preparation of the coloring composition, all the components may be dissolved and / or dispersed in an organic solvent at the same time to prepare the coloring composition. If necessary, each component may be appropriately used in two or more solutions or dispersions. Alternatively, the coloring composition may be prepared by mixing these at the time of use (at the time of application).
 また、着色組成物の調製に際して、顔料を分散させるプロセスを含むことが好ましい。顔料を分散させるプロセスにおいて、顔料の分散に用いる機械力としては、圧縮、圧搾、衝撃、剪断、キャビテーションなどが挙げられる。これらプロセスの具体例としては、ビーズミル、サンドミル、ロールミル、ボールミル、ペイントシェーカー、マイクロフルイダイザー、高速インペラー、サンドグラインダー、フロージェットミキサー、高圧湿式微粒化、超音波分散などが挙げられる。またサンドミル(ビーズミル)における顔料の粉砕においては、径の小さいビーズを使用する、ビーズの充填率を大きくする事等により粉砕効率を高めた条件で処理することが好ましい。また、粉砕処理後にろ過、遠心分離などで粗粒子を除去することが好ましい。また、顔料を分散させるプロセスおよび分散機は、「分散技術大全、株式会社情報機構発行、2005年7月15日」や「サスペンション(固/液分散系)を中心とした分散技術と工業的応用の実際 総合資料集、経営開発センター出版部発行、1978年10月10日」、特開2015-157893号公報の段落番号0022に記載のプロセス及び分散機を好適に使用出来る。また顔料を分散させるプロセスにおいては、ソルトミリング工程にて粒子の微細化処理を行ってもよい。ソルトミリング工程に用いられる素材、機器、処理条件等は、例えば特開2015-194521号公報、特開2012-046629号公報の記載を参酌できる。 Also, it is preferable to include a process of dispersing the pigment in the preparation of the coloring composition. In the process of dispersing the pigment, the mechanical force used to disperse the pigment includes compression, squeezing, impact, shearing, cavitation and the like. Specific examples of these processes include a bead mill, a sand mill, a roll mill, a ball mill, a paint shaker, a microfluidizer, a high speed impeller, a sand grinder, a flow jet mixer, a high pressure wet atomization, and an ultrasonic dispersion. Further, in the pulverization of the pigment in the sand mill (bead mill), it is preferable to use the beads having a small diameter, and to increase the filling rate of the beads to perform the treatment under the condition that the pulverization efficiency is increased. Further, it is preferable to remove coarse particles by filtration, centrifugation, or the like after the pulverization treatment. In addition, the process and disperser for dispersing the pigments are described in "Dispersion Technology Taizen, Information Technology Co., Ltd., July 15, 2005" and "Dispersion technology centering on suspension (solid / liquid dispersion system) and industrial application. In fact, the process and disperser described in Paragraph No. 0022 of JP-A-2015-157893, "Comprehensive reference materials, published by the Management Development Center Publishing Department, October 10, 1978" can be suitably used. Further, in the process of dispersing the pigment, the particles may be refined in the salt milling step. The materials, equipment, processing conditions, etc. used in the salt milling process can be referred to, for example, the descriptions in JP-A-2015-194521 and JP-A-2012-046629.
 着色組成物の調製にあたり、異物の除去や欠陥の低減などの目的で、着色組成物をフィルタでろ過することが好ましい。フィルタとしては、従来からろ過用途等に用いられているフィルタであれば特に限定されることなく用いることができる。例えば、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン(PTFE)等のフッ素樹脂、ナイロン(例えばナイロン-6、ナイロン-6,6)等のポリアミド系樹脂、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン(PP)等のポリオレフィン樹脂(高密度、超高分子量のポリオレフィン樹脂を含む)等の素材を用いたフィルタが挙げられる。これら素材の中でもポリプロピレン(高密度ポリプロピレンを含む)およびナイロンが好ましい。 When preparing the colored composition, it is preferable to filter the colored composition with a filter for the purpose of removing foreign matters and reducing defects. The filter can be used without particular limitation as long as it is a filter that has been conventionally used for filtration and the like. For example, fluororesins such as polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), polyamide resins such as nylon (eg nylon-6, nylon-6,6), polyolefin resins such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) (high density, ultra high molecular weight). (Including the polyolefin resin), and the like. Among these materials, polypropylene (including high-density polypropylene) and nylon are preferable.
 フィルタの孔径は、0.01~7.0μmが好ましく、0.01~3.0μmがより好ましく、0.05~0.5μmが更に好ましい。フィルタの孔径が上記範囲であれば、微細な異物をより確実に除去できる。フィルタの孔径値については、フィルタメーカーの公称値を参照することができる。フィルタは、日本ポール株式会社(DFA4201NIEYなど)、アドバンテック東洋株式会社、日本インテグリス株式会社(旧日本マイクロリス株式会社)および株式会社キッツマイクロフィルタ等が提供する各種フィルタを用いることができる。 The pore size of the filter is preferably 0.01 to 7.0 μm, more preferably 0.01 to 3.0 μm, still more preferably 0.05 to 0.5 μm. If the pore size of the filter is within the above range, fine foreign matter can be removed more reliably. Regarding the pore size value of the filter, the nominal value of the filter manufacturer can be referred to. As the filter, various filters provided by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd. (DFA4201NIEY, etc.), Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Japan Entegris Co., Ltd. (formerly Japan Microlith Co., Ltd.), Kitz Micro Filter Co., Ltd., etc. can be used.
 また、フィルタとしてファイバ状のろ材を用いることも好ましい。ファイバ状のろ材としては、例えばポリプロピレンファイバ、ナイロンファイバ、グラスファイバ等が挙げられる。市販品としては、ロキテクノ社製のSBPタイプシリーズ(SBP008など)、TPRタイプシリーズ(TPR002、TPR005など)、SHPXタイプシリーズ(SHPX003など)が挙げられる。 Also, it is preferable to use a fibrous filter medium as the filter. Examples of the fibrous filter medium include polypropylene fiber, nylon fiber, glass fiber and the like. Examples of commercially available products include SBP type series (SBP008 etc.), TPR type series (TPR002, TPR005 etc.) and SHPX type series (SHPX003 etc.) manufactured by Loki Techno.
 フィルタを使用する際、異なるフィルタ(例えば、第1のフィルタと第2のフィルタなど)を組み合わせてもよい。その際、各フィルタでのろ過は、1回のみでもよいし、2回以上行ってもよい。また、上述した範囲内で異なる孔径のフィルタを組み合わせてもよい。また、第1のフィルタでのろ過は、分散液のみに対して行い、他の成分を混合した後で、第2のフィルタでろ過を行ってもよい。 When using filters, different filters (eg, first filter and second filter) may be combined. At that time, the filtration with each filter may be performed only once, or may be performed twice or more. Further, filters having different pore sizes within the above range may be combined. Further, the filtration with the first filter may be performed only on the dispersion liquid, and after the other components are mixed, the filtration with the second filter may be performed.
<膜>
 本発明の膜は、上述した本発明の着色組成物から得られる膜である。本発明の膜は、カラーフィルタの着色画素として好ましく用いることができる。着色画素としては、緑色画素、青色画素などが挙げられ、緑色画素がより好ましい。本発明の膜の膜厚は、目的に応じて適宜調整できる。例えば、膜厚は、20μm以下が好ましく、10μm以下がより好ましく、5μm以下がさらに好ましい。膜厚の下限は、0.1μm以上が好ましく、0.2μm以上がより好ましく、0.3μm以上がさらに好ましい。
<Membrane>
The film of the present invention is a film obtained from the coloring composition of the present invention described above. The film of the present invention can be preferably used as a colored pixel of a color filter. Examples of the colored pixel include a green pixel and a blue pixel, and a green pixel is more preferable. The film thickness of the film of the present invention can be appropriately adjusted according to the purpose. For example, the film thickness is preferably 20 μm or less, more preferably 10 μm or less, still more preferably 5 μm or less. The lower limit of the film thickness is preferably 0.1 μm or more, more preferably 0.2 μm or more, still more preferably 0.3 μm or more.
<カラーフィルタ>
 次に、本発明のカラーフィルタについて説明する。本発明のカラーフィルタは、上述した本発明の膜を有する。より好ましくは、カラーフィルタの画素として、本発明の膜を有する。本発明のカラーフィルタは、CCD(電荷結合素子)やCMOS(相補型金属酸化膜半導体)などの固体撮像素子や画像表示装置などに用いることができる。
<Color filter>
Next, the color filter of the present invention will be described. The color filter of the present invention has the above-mentioned film of the present invention. More preferably, the pixel of the color filter has the film of the present invention. The color filter of the present invention can be used for a solid-state imaging device such as CCD (charge coupled device) or CMOS (complementary metal oxide semiconductor), an image display device, or the like.
 本発明のカラーフィルタにおいて本発明の膜の膜厚は、目的に応じて適宜調整できる。膜厚は、20μm以下が好ましく、10μm以下がより好ましく、5μm以下がさらに好ましい。膜厚の下限は、0.1μm以上が好ましく、0.2μm以上がより好ましく、0.3μm以上が更に好ましい。 In the color filter of the present invention, the film thickness of the film of the present invention can be appropriately adjusted according to the purpose. The film thickness is preferably 20 μm or less, more preferably 10 μm or less, still more preferably 5 μm or less. The lower limit of the film thickness is preferably 0.1 μm or more, more preferably 0.2 μm or more, still more preferably 0.3 μm or more.
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、画素の幅が0.5~20.0μmであることが好ましい。下限は、1.0μm以上であることが好ましく、2.0μm以上であることがより好ましい。上限は、15.0μm以下であることが好ましく、10.0μm以下であることがより好ましい。また、画素のヤング率が0.5~20GPaであることが好ましく、2.5~15GPaがより好ましい。 The pixel width of the color filter of the present invention is preferably 0.5 to 20.0 μm. The lower limit is preferably 1.0 μm or more, and more preferably 2.0 μm or more. The upper limit is preferably 15.0 μm or less, more preferably 10.0 μm or less. The Young's modulus of the pixel is preferably 0.5 to 20 GPa, more preferably 2.5 to 15 GPa.
 本発明のカラーフィルタに含まれる各画素は高い平坦性を有することが好ましい。具体的には、画素の表面粗さRaは、100nm以下であることが好ましく、40nm以下であることがより好ましく、15nm以下であることが更に好ましい。下限は規定されないが、例えば0.1nm以上であることが好ましい。画素の表面粗さは、例えばVeeco社製のAFM(原子間力顕微鏡) Dimension3100を用いて測定することができる。また、画素上の水の接触角は適宜好ましい値に設定することができるが、典型的には、50~110°の範囲である。接触角は、例えば接触角計CV-DT・A型(協和界面科学(株)製)を用いて測定できる。また、画素の体積抵抗値は高いことが好ましい。具体的には、画素の体積抵抗値は10Ω・cm以上であることが好ましく、1011Ω・cm以上であることがより好ましい。上限は規定されないが、例えば1014Ω・cm以下であることが好ましい。画素の体積抵抗値は、例えば超高抵抗計5410(アドバンテスト社製)を用いて測定することができる。 Each pixel included in the color filter of the present invention preferably has high flatness. Specifically, the surface roughness Ra of the pixel is preferably 100 nm or less, more preferably 40 nm or less, and further preferably 15 nm or less. Although the lower limit is not specified, it is preferably 0.1 nm or more, for example. The surface roughness of a pixel can be measured using, for example, AFM (atomic force microscope) Dimension 3100 manufactured by Veeco. The contact angle of water on the pixel can be set to a suitable value as appropriate, but is typically in the range of 50 to 110 °. The contact angle can be measured using, for example, a contact angle meter CV-DT • A type (manufactured by Kyowa Interface Science Co., Ltd.). Further, it is preferable that the volume resistance value of the pixel is high. Specifically, the volume resistance value of the pixel is preferably 10 9 Ω · cm or more, and more preferably 10 11 Ω · cm or more. The upper limit is not specified, but it is preferably 10 14 Ω · cm or less, for example. The volume resistance value of the pixel can be measured using, for example, an ultra-high resistance meter 5410 (manufactured by Advantest).
 また、本発明のカラーフィルタは、本発明の膜の表面に保護層を設けてもよい。保護層を設けることで、酸素遮断化、低反射化、親疎水化、特定波長の光(紫外線、近赤外線等)の遮蔽等の種々の機能を付与することができる。保護層の厚さとしては、0.01~10μmが好ましく、0.1~5μmがさらに好ましい。保護層の形成方法としては、有機溶剤に溶解した樹脂組成物を塗布して形成する方法、化学気相蒸着法、成型した樹脂を接着材で貼りつける方法等が挙げられる。保護層を構成する成分としては、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、エン・チオール樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリアリレート樹脂、ポリスルホン樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン樹脂、ポリフェニレン樹脂、ポリアリーレンエーテルホスフィンオキシド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、ポリオレフィン樹脂、環状オレフィン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、スチレン樹脂、ポリオール樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニリデン樹脂、メラミン樹脂、ウレタン樹脂、アラミド樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、アルキド樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、変性シリコーン樹脂、フッ素樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリアクリロニトリル樹脂、セルロース樹脂、Si、C、W、Al、Mo、SiO、Siなどが挙げられ、これらの成分を二種以上含有しても良い。例えば、酸素遮断化を目的とした保護層の場合、保護層はポリオール樹脂、SiO、Siを含むことが好ましい。また、低反射化を目的とした保護層の場合、保護層は(メタ)アクリル樹脂、フッ素樹脂を含むことが好ましい。 In addition, the color filter of the present invention may be provided with a protective layer on the surface of the film of the present invention. Providing the protective layer can impart various functions such as oxygen blocking, low reflection, hydrophilicity / hydrophobicity, and blocking of light of a specific wavelength (ultraviolet rays, near infrared rays, etc.). The thickness of the protective layer is preferably 0.01 to 10 μm, more preferably 0.1 to 5 μm. Examples of the method of forming the protective layer include a method of applying a resin composition dissolved in an organic solvent to form the protective layer, a chemical vapor deposition method, and a method of attaching a molded resin with an adhesive. As a component constituting the protective layer, (meth) acrylic resin, ene / thiol resin, polycarbonate resin, polyether resin, polyarylate resin, polysulfone resin, polyethersulfone resin, polyphenylene resin, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resin, polyimide Resin, polyamide-imide resin, polyolefin resin, cyclic olefin resin, polyester resin, styrene resin, polyol resin, polyvinylidene chloride resin, melamine resin, urethane resin, aramid resin, polyamide resin, alkyd resin, epoxy resin, modified silicone resin, fluorine resins, polycarbonate resins, polyacrylonitrile resins, cellulose resins, Si, C, W, Al 2 O 3, Mo, etc. SiO 2, Si 2 N 4, and the like, two kinds of these components It may contain above. For example, in the case of a protective layer for the purpose of blocking oxygen, it is preferable that the protective layer contains a polyol resin, SiO 2 , and Si 2 N 4 . Further, in the case of the protective layer aiming at low reflection, the protective layer preferably contains a (meth) acrylic resin or a fluororesin.
 樹脂組成物を塗布して保護層を形成する場合、樹脂組成物の塗布方法としては、スピンコート法、キャスト法、スクリーン印刷法、インクジェット法等の公知の方法を用いることができる。樹脂組成物に含まれる有機溶剤は、公知の有機溶剤(例えば、プロピレングリコール1-モノメチルエーテル2-アセテート、シクロペンタノン、乳酸エチル等)を用いることが出来る。保護層を化学気相蒸着法にて形成する場合、化学気相蒸着法としては、公知の化学気相蒸着法(熱化学気相蒸着法、プラズマ化学気相蒸着法、光化学気相蒸着法)を用いることができる。 When the resin composition is applied to form the protective layer, known methods such as a spin coating method, a casting method, a screen printing method, and an inkjet method can be used as a method for applying the resin composition. As the organic solvent contained in the resin composition, a known organic solvent (eg, propylene glycol 1-monomethyl ether 2-acetate, cyclopentanone, ethyl lactate, etc.) can be used. When the protective layer is formed by the chemical vapor deposition method, known chemical vapor deposition methods (thermochemical vapor deposition method, plasma chemical vapor deposition method, photochemical vapor deposition method) are known as the chemical vapor deposition method. Can be used.
 保護層は、必要に応じて、有機・無機微粒子、特定波長の光(例えば、紫外線、近赤外線等)の吸収剤、屈折率調整剤、酸化防止剤、密着剤、界面活性剤等の添加剤を含有しても良い。有機・無機微粒子の例としては、例えば、高分子微粒子(例えば、シリコーン樹脂微粒子、ポリスチレン微粒子、メラミン樹脂微粒子)、酸化チタン、酸化亜鉛、酸化ジルコニウム、酸化インジウム、酸化アルミニウム、窒化チタン、酸窒化チタン、フッ化マグネシウム、中空シリカ、シリカ、炭酸カルシウム、硫酸バリウム等が挙げられる。特定波長の吸収剤は公知の吸収剤を用いることができる。紫外線吸収剤および近赤外線吸収剤としては、上述した素材が挙げられる。これらの添加剤の含有量は適宜調整できるが、保護層の全重量に対して0.1~70質量%が好ましく、1~60質量%がさらに好ましい。 The protective layer is an additive such as organic / inorganic fine particles, an absorber of light of a specific wavelength (for example, ultraviolet rays, near infrared rays, etc.), a refractive index adjusting agent, an antioxidant, an adhesive agent, a surfactant, etc., if necessary. May be included. Examples of organic / inorganic particles include polymer particles (eg, silicone resin particles, polystyrene particles, melamine resin particles), titanium oxide, zinc oxide, zirconium oxide, indium oxide, aluminum oxide, titanium nitride, titanium oxynitride. , Magnesium fluoride, hollow silica, silica, calcium carbonate, barium sulfate and the like. A known absorber can be used as the absorber having a specific wavelength. Examples of the ultraviolet absorber and the near infrared absorber include the materials described above. The content of these additives can be adjusted appropriately, but is preferably 0.1 to 70% by mass, more preferably 1 to 60% by mass, based on the total weight of the protective layer.
 また、保護層としては、特開2017-151176号公報の段落番号0073~0092に記載の保護層を用いることもできる。 As the protective layer, the protective layer described in paragraph Nos. 0073 to 0092 of JP-A-2017-151176 may be used.
 カラーフィルタは、隔壁により例えば格子状に仕切られた空間に、各着色画素が埋め込まれた構造を有していてもよい。この場合の隔壁は各着色画素よりも低屈折率であることが好ましい。また、US2018/0040656号公報に記載の構成で隔壁を形成しても良い。 The color filter may have a structure in which each colored pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by partition walls, for example, in a grid pattern. In this case, the partition wall preferably has a lower refractive index than each colored pixel. Further, the partition wall may be formed with the configuration described in US2018 / 0040656.
<カラーフィルタの製造方法>
 次に、本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法について説明する。本発明のカラーフィルタは、上述した本発明の着色組成物を用いて支持体上に着色組成物層を形成する工程と、フォトリソグラフィ法により着色組成物層に対してパターンを形成する工程と、を経て製造できる。
<Method of manufacturing color filter>
Next, a method for manufacturing the color filter of the present invention will be described. The color filter of the present invention comprises a step of forming a coloring composition layer on a support using the coloring composition of the present invention described above, and a step of forming a pattern on the coloring composition layer by a photolithography method, Can be manufactured through.
 フォトリソグラフィ法によるパターン形成は、本発明の着色組成物を用いて支持体上に着色組成物層を形成する工程と、着色組成物層をパターン状に露光する工程と、着色組成物層の未露光部を現像除去してパターン(画素)を形成する工程と、を含むことが好ましい。必要に応じて、着色組成物層をベークする工程(プリベーク工程)、および、現像されたパターン(画素)をベークする工程(ポストベーク工程)を設けてもよい。 Pattern formation by a photolithography method includes a step of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition of the present invention, a step of exposing the colored composition layer to a pattern, and a step of forming the colored composition layer. And a step of developing and removing the exposed portion to form a pattern (pixel). If necessary, a step of baking the colored composition layer (pre-bake step) and a step of baking the developed pattern (pixel) may be provided (post-bake step).
 着色組成物層を形成する工程では、本発明の着色組成物を用いて、支持体上に着色組成物層を形成する。支持体としては、特に限定は無く、用途に応じて適宜選択できる。例えば、ガラス基板、シリコン基板などが挙げられ、シリコン基板であることが好ましい。また、シリコン基板には、電荷結合素子(CCD)、相補型金属酸化膜半導体(CMOS)、透明導電膜などが形成されていてもよい。また、シリコン基板には、各画素を隔離するブラックマトリクスが形成されている場合もある。また、シリコン基板には、上部の層との密着性改良、物質の拡散防止或いは基板表面の平坦化のために下塗り層が設けられていてもよい。 In the step of forming a coloring composition layer, the coloring composition layer of the present invention is used to form a coloring composition layer on a support. The support is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected depending on the application. For example, a glass substrate, a silicon substrate, etc. are mentioned, and a silicon substrate is preferable. Further, a charge coupled device (CCD), a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS), a transparent conductive film and the like may be formed on the silicon substrate. In addition, a black matrix that isolates each pixel may be formed on the silicon substrate. Further, the silicon substrate may be provided with an undercoat layer for the purpose of improving the adhesion with the upper layer, preventing the diffusion of substances, or flattening the substrate surface.
 着色組成物の塗布方法としては、公知の方法を用いることができる。例えば、滴下法(ドロップキャスト);スリットコート法;スプレー法;ロールコート法;回転塗布法(スピンコーティング);流延塗布法;スリットアンドスピン法;プリウェット法(たとえば、特開2009-145395号公報に記載されている方法);インクジェット(例えばオンデマンド方式、ピエゾ方式、サーマル方式)、ノズルジェット等の吐出系印刷、フレキソ印刷、スクリーン印刷、グラビア印刷、反転オフセット印刷、メタルマスク印刷法などの各種印刷法;金型等を用いた転写法;ナノインプリント法などが挙げられる。インクジェットでの適用方法としては、特に限定されず、例えば「広がる・使えるインクジェット-特許に見る無限の可能性-、2005年2月発行、住ベテクノリサーチ」に示された方法(特に115ページ~133ページ)や、特開2003-262716号公報、特開2003-185831号公報、特開2003-261827号公報、特開2012-126830号公報、特開2006-169325号公報などに記載の方法が挙げられる。また、着色組成物の塗布方法については、国際公開第2017/030174号、国際公開第2017/018419号の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 As a method for applying the coloring composition, a known method can be used. For example, a dropping method (drop casting); a slit coating method; a spraying method; a roll coating method; a spin coating method (spin coating); a cast coating method; a slit and spin method; a pre-wet method (for example, JP 2009-145395A). Methods described in the publication); inkjet (for example, on-demand method, piezo method, thermal method), ejection-type printing such as nozzle jet, flexographic printing, screen printing, gravure printing, reverse offset printing, metal mask printing method, etc. Examples include various printing methods; transfer methods using molds and the like; nanoimprint methods and the like. The method for applying the inkjet method is not particularly limited, and for example, the method described in “Expanding and Usable Inkjet-Infinite Possibilities Seen in Patents”, issued by Sumi Betechno Research, February 2005 (especially from page 115) (See page 133), Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-262716, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-185831, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-261827, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-126830, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-169325, and the like. Can be mentioned. Regarding the method for applying the coloring composition, the descriptions in International Publication No. 2017/030174 and International Publication No. 2017/018419 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
 支持体上に形成した着色組成物層は、乾燥(プリベーク)してもよい。低温プロセスにより膜を製造する場合は、プリベークを行わなくてもよい。プリベークを行う場合、プリベーク温度は、150℃以下が好ましく、120℃以下がより好ましく、110℃以下が更に好ましい。下限は、例えば、50℃以上とすることができ、80℃以上とすることもできる。プリベーク時間は、10~3000秒が好ましく、40~2500秒がより好ましく、80~2200秒がさらに好ましい。プリベークは、ホットプレート、オーブン等で行うことができる。 The colored composition layer formed on the support may be dried (prebaked). If the film is produced by a low temperature process, prebaking may not be performed. When prebaking is performed, the prebaking temperature is preferably 150 ° C or lower, more preferably 120 ° C or lower, and further preferably 110 ° C or lower. The lower limit may be, for example, 50 ° C. or higher, and may be 80 ° C. or higher. The prebake time is preferably 10 to 3000 seconds, more preferably 40 to 2500 seconds, and even more preferably 80 to 2200 seconds. Prebaking can be performed with a hot plate, an oven, or the like.
 次に、着色組成物層をパターン状に露光する(露光工程)。例えば、着色組成物層に対し、ステッパー露光機やスキャナ露光機などを用いて、所定のマスクパターンを有するマスクを介して露光することで、パターン状に露光することができる。これにより、露光部分を硬化することができる。 Next, the colored composition layer is exposed in a pattern (exposure step). For example, the colored composition layer can be exposed in a pattern by using a stepper exposure device, a scanner exposure device, or the like through a mask having a predetermined mask pattern. Thereby, the exposed portion can be cured.
 露光に際して用いることができる放射線(光)としては、g線、i線等が挙げられる。また、波長300nm以下の光(好ましくは波長180~300nmの光)を用いることもできる。波長300nm以下の光としては、KrF線(波長248nm)、ArF線(波長193nm)などが挙げられ、KrF線(波長248nm)が好ましい。また、300nm以上の長波な光源も利用できる。 Radiation (light) that can be used at the time of exposure includes g rays, i rays, and the like. Further, light having a wavelength of 300 nm or less (preferably light having a wavelength of 180 to 300 nm) can also be used. Examples of light having a wavelength of 300 nm or less include KrF rays (wavelength 248 nm) and ArF rays (wavelength 193 nm), and KrF rays (wavelength 248 nm) are preferable. Also, a long-wavelength light source of 300 nm or more can be used.
 照射量(露光量)は、例えば、0.03~2.5J/cmが好ましく、0.05~1.0J/cmがより好ましい。露光時における酸素濃度については適宜選択することができ、大気下で行う他に、例えば酸素濃度が19体積%以下の低酸素雰囲気下(例えば、15体積%、5体積%、または、実質的に無酸素)で露光してもよく、酸素濃度が21体積%を超える高酸素雰囲気下(例えば、22体積%、30体積%、または、50体積%)で露光してもよい。また、露光照度は適宜設定することが可能であり、通常1000W/m~100000W/m(例えば、5000W/m、15000W/m、または、35000W/m)の範囲から選択することができる。酸素濃度と露光照度は適宜条件を組み合わせてよく、例えば、酸素濃度10体積%で照度10000W/m、酸素濃度35体積%で照度20000W/mなどとすることができる。 Irradiation dose (exposure dose), for example, preferably 0.03 ~ 2.5J / cm 2, more preferably 0.05 ~ 1.0J / cm 2. The oxygen concentration at the time of exposure can be appropriately selected. In addition to performing in the air, for example, in a low oxygen atmosphere having an oxygen concentration of 19% by volume or less (for example, 15% by volume, 5% by volume, or substantially The exposure may be carried out under oxygen-free conditions or under a high oxygen atmosphere in which the oxygen concentration exceeds 21% by volume (for example, 22% by volume, 30% by volume or 50% by volume). The exposure intensity is can be set appropriately, usually 1000W / m 2 ~ 100000W / m 2 ( e.g., 5000W / m 2, 15000W / m 2, or, 35000W / m 2) selected from the range of You can Oxygen concentration and exposure illuminance may appropriately combined conditions, for example, illuminance 10000 W / m 2 at an oxygen concentration of 10 vol%, oxygen concentration of 35 vol% can be such illuminance 20000W / m 2.
 次に、着色組成物層の未露光部を現像除去してパターン(画素)を形成する。着色組成物層の未露光部の現像除去は、現像液を用いて行うことができる。これにより、露光工程における未露光部の着色組成物層が現像液に溶出し、光硬化した部分だけが残る。現像液としては、下地の素子や回路などにダメージを起さない有機アルカリ現像液が望ましい。現像液の温度は、例えば、20~30℃が好ましい。現像時間は、20~180秒が好ましい。また、残渣除去性を向上するため、現像液を60秒ごとに振り切り、さらに新たに現像液を供給する工程を数回繰り返してもよい。 Next, the unexposed portion of the colored composition layer is developed and removed to form a pattern (pixel). The development removal of the unexposed part of the coloring composition layer can be performed using a developing solution. As a result, the unexposed portion of the colored composition layer in the exposure step is eluted into the developing solution, and only the photocured portion remains. As the developing solution, an organic alkaline developing solution that does not damage the underlying device or circuit is desirable. The temperature of the developer is preferably 20 to 30 ° C., for example. The development time is preferably 20 to 180 seconds. Further, in order to improve the residue removability, the process of shaking off the developing solution every 60 seconds and further supplying a new developing solution may be repeated several times.
 現像液は、アルカリ剤を純水で希釈したアルカリ性水溶液(アルカリ現像液)であることが好ましい。アルカリ剤としては、例えば、アンモニア、エチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、ジメチルエタノールアミン、ジグリコールアミン、ジエタノールアミン、ヒドロキシアミン、エチレンジアミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、エチルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ベンジルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ジメチルビス(2-ヒドロキシエチル)アンモニウムヒドロキシド、コリン、ピロール、ピペリジン、1,8-ジアザビシクロ[5.4.0]-7-ウンデセンなどの有機アルカリ性化合物や、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸水素ナトリウム、ケイ酸ナトリウム、メタケイ酸ナトリウムなどの無機アルカリ性化合物が挙げられる。アルカリ剤は、分子量が大きい化合物の方が環境面および安全面で好ましい。アルカリ性水溶液のアルカリ剤の濃度は、0.001~10質量%が好ましく、0.01~1質量%がより好ましい。また、現像液は、さらに界面活性剤を含有していてもよい。界面活性剤としては、上述した界面活性剤が挙げられ、ノニオン系界面活性剤が好ましい。現像液は、移送や保管の便宜などの観点より、一旦濃縮液として製造し、使用時に必要な濃度に希釈してもよい。希釈倍率は特に限定されないが、例えば1.5~100倍の範囲に設定することができる。また、現像後純水で洗浄(リンス)することも好ましい。また、リンスは、現像後の着色組成物層が形成された支持体を回転させつつ、現像後の着色組成物層へリンス液を供給して行うことが好ましい。また、リンス液を吐出させるノズルを支持体の中心部から支持体の周縁部に移動させて行うことも好ましい。この際、ノズルの支持体中心部から周縁部へ移動させるにあたり、ノズルの移動速度を徐々に低下させながら移動させてもよい。このようにしてリンスを行うことで、リンスの面内ばらつきを抑制できる。また、ノズルを支持体中心部から周縁部へ移動させつつ、支持体の回転速度を徐々に低下させても同様の効果が得られる。 The developer is preferably an alkaline aqueous solution (alkali developer) obtained by diluting an alkaline agent with pure water. Examples of the alkaline agent include ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, diglycolamine, diethanolamine, hydroxyamine, ethylenediamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide. Organic compounds such as, ethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, dimethylbis (2-hydroxyethyl) ammonium hydroxide, choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.4.0] -7-undecene Alkaline compounds, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, sodium silicate Um, and inorganic alkaline compound such as sodium metasilicate. As the alkaline agent, a compound having a large molecular weight is preferable in terms of environment and safety. The concentration of the alkaline agent in the alkaline aqueous solution is preferably 0.001 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 1% by mass. Further, the developing solution may further contain a surfactant. Examples of the surfactant include the above-mentioned surfactants, and nonionic surfactants are preferable. The developer may be produced once as a concentrated solution and diluted to a required concentration at the time of use, from the viewpoint of convenience of transportation and storage. Although the dilution ratio is not particularly limited, it can be set, for example, in the range of 1.5 to 100 times. Further, it is also preferable to wash (rinse) with pure water after the development. In addition, the rinsing is preferably performed by supplying a rinse liquid to the colored composition layer after development while rotating the support on which the colored composition layer after development is formed. It is also preferable that the nozzle for discharging the rinse liquid is moved from the central portion of the support to the peripheral portion of the support. At this time, when moving from the central portion of the support body of the nozzle to the peripheral edge portion, the movement speed of the nozzle may be gradually reduced. By performing the rinse in this manner, it is possible to suppress the in-plane variation of the rinse. Further, the same effect can be obtained by gradually decreasing the rotation speed of the support while moving the nozzle from the center of the support to the peripheral portion.
 現像後、乾燥を施した後に追加露光処理や加熱処理(ポストベーク)を行うことが好ましい。追加露光処理やポストベークは、硬化を完全なものとするための現像後の硬化処理である。ポストベークにおける加熱温度は、例えば100~240℃が好ましく、200~240℃がより好ましい。ポストベークは、現像後の膜を、上記条件になるようにホットプレートやコンベクションオーブン(熱風循環式乾燥機)、高周波加熱機等の加熱手段を用いて、連続式あるいはバッチ式で行うことができる。追加露光処理を行う場合、露光に用いられる光は、波長400nm以下の光であることが好ましい。また、追加露光処理は、KR1020170122130Aに記載の方法で行ってもよい。 After development, it is preferable to carry out additional exposure processing and heat processing (post-baking) after drying. The additional exposure process and the post-baking are curing processes after development to complete the curing. The heating temperature in the post-baking is preferably 100 to 240 ° C, more preferably 200 to 240 ° C. Post-baking can be performed in a continuous or batch manner by using a heating means such as a hot plate, a convection oven (hot air circulation dryer), or a high-frequency heater so that the film after development can meet the above conditions. . When the additional exposure process is performed, the light used for the exposure is preferably light having a wavelength of 400 nm or less. Further, the additional exposure process may be performed by the method described in KR1020170122130A.
<固体撮像素子>
 本発明の固体撮像素子は、上述した本発明の膜を有する。本発明の固体撮像素子の構成としては、本発明の膜を備え、固体撮像素子として機能する構成であれば特に限定はないが、例えば、以下のような構成が挙げられる。
<Solid-state image sensor>
The solid-state image sensor of the present invention has the above-mentioned film of the present invention. The configuration of the solid-state imaging device of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it includes the film of the present invention and functions as a solid-state imaging device, but examples thereof include the following configurations.
 基板上に、固体撮像素子(CCD(電荷結合素子)イメージセンサ、CMOS(相補型金属酸化膜半導体)イメージセンサ等)の受光エリアを構成する複数のフォトダイオードおよびポリシリコン等からなる転送電極を有し、フォトダイオードおよび転送電極上にフォトダイオードの受光部のみ開口した遮光膜を有し、遮光膜上に遮光膜全面およびフォトダイオード受光部を覆うように形成された窒化シリコン等からなるデバイス保護膜を有し、デバイス保護膜上に、カラーフィルタを有する構成である。更に、デバイス保護膜上であってカラーフィルタの下(基板に近い側)に集光手段(例えば、マイクロレンズ等。以下同じ)を有する構成や、カラーフィルタ上に集光手段を有する構成等であってもよい。また、カラーフィルタは、隔壁により例えば格子状に仕切られた空間に、各着色画素が埋め込まれた構造を有していてもよい。この場合の隔壁は各着色画素に対して低屈折率であることが好ましい。このような構造を有する撮像装置の例としては、特開2012-227478号公報、特開2014-179577号公報、国際公開第2018/043654号に記載の装置が挙げられる。本発明の固体撮像素子を備えた撮像装置は、デジタルカメラや、撮像機能を有する電子機器(携帯電話等)の他、車載カメラや監視カメラ用としても用いることができる。 On the substrate, there are provided a plurality of photodiodes forming a light receiving area of a solid-state image pickup device (CCD (charge coupled device) image sensor, CMOS (complementary metal oxide semiconductor) image sensor, etc.) and transfer electrodes made of polysilicon or the like. A device protection film made of silicon nitride or the like, which has a light-shielding film that is opened only on the photodiode and the light-receiving portion of the photodiode on the transfer electrode and covers the entire light-shielding film and the photodiode light-receiving portion on the light-shielding film. And has a color filter on the device protective film. Further, a structure having a condensing unit (for example, a microlens, etc., below) on the device protective film and below the color filter (the side close to the substrate), or a structure having a condensing unit on the color filter, etc. It may be. Further, the color filter may have a structure in which each colored pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by a partition wall, for example, in a grid pattern. In this case, the partition wall preferably has a low refractive index for each colored pixel. Examples of the imaging device having such a structure include the devices described in JP2012-227478A, JP2014-179577A, and International Publication No. 2018/043654. The image pickup apparatus provided with the solid-state image pickup element of the present invention can be used not only for digital cameras and electronic devices (such as mobile phones) having an image pickup function, but also for vehicle-mounted cameras and surveillance cameras.
<画像表示装置>
 本発明の画像表示装置は、上述した本発明の膜を有する。画像表示装置としては、液晶表示装置や有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置などが挙げられる。画像表示装置の定義や各画像表示装置の詳細については、例えば「電子ディスプレイデバイス(佐々木昭夫著、(株)工業調査会、1990年発行)」、「ディスプレイデバイス(伊吹順章著、産業図書(株)平成元年発行)」などに記載されている。また、液晶表示装置については、例えば「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術(内田龍男編集、(株)工業調査会、1994年発行)」に記載されている。本発明が適用できる液晶表示装置に特に制限はなく、例えば、上記の「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術」に記載されている色々な方式の液晶表示装置に適用できる。
<Image display device>
The image display device of the present invention has the above-mentioned film of the present invention. Examples of the image display device include a liquid crystal display device and an organic electroluminescence display device. For the definition of the image display device and the details of each image display device, see, for example, "Electronic Display Device (Akio Sasaki, Industrial Research Institute, 1990)", "Display Device (Junsho Ibuki, Industrial Books ( (Published in 1989) ”etc. Further, the liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, “Next-generation liquid crystal display technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Industrial Research Institute Co., Ltd., published in 1994)”. The liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied is not particularly limited, and can be applied to, for example, liquid crystal display devices of various systems described in the above-mentioned “next-generation liquid crystal display technology”.
 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明をさらに具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。従って、本発明の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されるものではない。また、以下の実施例に記載の構造式中、Meはメチル基を表す。 The present invention will be described more specifically with reference to the following examples. Materials, usage amounts, ratios, processing contents, processing procedures, and the like shown in the following examples can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. Further, in the structural formulas described in the following examples, Me represents a methyl group.
<重量平均分子量(Mw)の測定>
 測定サンプルの重量平均分子量(Mw)は、以下の条件に従って、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)によって測定した。
 カラムの種類:TOSOH TSKgel Super HZM-Hと、TOSOH TSKgel Super HZ4000と、TOSOH TSKgel Super HZ2000とを連結したカラム
 展開溶媒:テトラヒドロフラン
 カラム温度:40℃
 流量(サンプル注入量):1.0μL(サンプル濃度0.1質量%)
 装置名:東ソー(株)製 HLC-8220GPC
 検出器:RI(屈折率)検出器
 検量線ベース樹脂:ポリスチレン樹脂
<Measurement of weight average molecular weight (Mw)>
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the measurement sample was measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) according to the following conditions.
Column type: TOSOH TSKgel Super HZM-H, TOSOH TSKgel Super HZ4000, and TOSOH TSKgel Super HZ2000 are connected to each other. Developing solvent: Tetrahydrofuran Column temperature: 40 ° C
Flow rate (sample injection amount): 1.0 μL (sample concentration 0.1% by mass)
Device name: Tosoh Corp. HLC-8220GPC
Detector: RI (refractive index) detector Calibration curve Base resin: Polystyrene resin
<酸価の測定方法>
 測定サンプルをテトラヒドロフラン/水=9/1(質量比)混合溶媒に溶解し、電位差滴定装置(商品名:AT-510、京都電子工業製)を用いて、得られた溶液を、25℃にて、0.1mol/L水酸化ナトリウム水溶液で中和滴定した。滴定pH曲線の変曲点を滴定終点として、次式により酸価を算出した。
 A=56.11×Vs×0.5×f/w
 A:酸価(mgKOH/g)
 Vs:滴定に要した0.1mol/L水酸化ナトリウム水溶液の使用量(mL)
 f:0.1mol/L水酸化ナトリウム水溶液の力価
 w:測定サンプル質量(g)(固形分換算)
<Method of measuring acid value>
The measurement sample was dissolved in a mixed solvent of tetrahydrofuran / water = 9/1 (mass ratio), and the obtained solution was used at 25 ° C. using a potentiometric titrator (trade name: AT-510, manufactured by Kyoto Electronics Manufacturing Co., Ltd.). Neutralization titration with a 0.1 mol / L sodium hydroxide aqueous solution. Using the inflection point of the titration pH curve as the titration end point, the acid value was calculated by the following formula.
A = 56.11 × Vs × 0.5 × f / w
A: Acid value (mgKOH / g)
Vs: Amount of 0.1 mol / L sodium hydroxide aqueous solution used for titration (mL)
f: titer of 0.1 mol / L sodium hydroxide aqueous solution w: measured sample mass (g) (solid content conversion)
<分散液の調製>
 下記の表に記載の原料を混合したのち、ビーズミル(ジルコニアビーズ0.1mm径)を用いて3時間混合および分散した後、減圧機構付き高圧分散機NANO-3000-10(日本ビーイーイー(株)製)を用いて、2000kg/cmの圧力下で流量500g/minの条件で分散処理を行なった。この分散処理を10回繰り返して、分散液を得た。なお、下記表中、分散剤の質量部の欄に記載の数値は固形分換算の値である。また、溶剤の質量部の欄に記載の数値は、分散剤に含まれる溶剤の量を含めた値である。
<Preparation of dispersion>
After mixing the raw materials described in the table below, and mixing and dispersing for 3 hours using a bead mill (zirconia beads 0.1 mm diameter), a high pressure disperser with a pressure reducing mechanism NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) ) Was used to perform a dispersion treatment under a pressure of 2000 kg / cm 3 and a flow rate of 500 g / min. This dispersion treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain a dispersion liquid. In addition, in the following table, the numerical value described in the column of the mass part of the dispersant is a value in terms of solid content. Moreover, the numerical value described in the column of the mass part of the solvent is a value including the amount of the solvent contained in the dispersant.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000040
 上記表に記載の原料は以下の通りである。
(着色剤)
 着色剤A1 :C.I.ピグメントグリーン62(アルミニウムフタロシアニン化合物、式(1)で表される化合物である)
 着色剤A2~A4:下記構造の化合物
 着色剤A5:C.I.ピグメントグリーン63(アルミニウムフタロシアニン化合物、式(1)で表される化合物である)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
 着色剤B1:C.I.ピグメントイエロー138
 着色剤B2:C.I.ピグメントイエロー139
 着色剤B3:C.I.ピグメントイエロー150
 着色剤B4:C.I.ピグメントイエロー231
 着色剤B5~B7:下記構造の化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
 着色剤C1:C.I.ピグメントレッド254
The raw materials described in the above table are as follows.
(Colorant)
Colorant A1: C.I. I. Pigment Green 62 (aluminum phthalocyanine compound, a compound represented by the formula (1))
Colorants A2 to A4: Compounds of the following structures Colorant A5: C.I. I. Pigment Green 63 (aluminum phthalocyanine compound, which is a compound represented by the formula (1))
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
Colorant B1: C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 138
Colorant B2: C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 139
Colorant B3: C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 150
Colorant B4: C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 231
Colorants B5 to B7: compounds having the following structures
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Colorant C1: C.I. I. Pigment Red 254
 (顔料誘導体)
 誘導体N1:下記構造の化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
(Pigment derivative)
Derivative N1: compound having the following structure
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
(分散剤)
 分散剤D1:以下の方法で製造した分散剤(リン酸エステル)
 空気導入管、コンデンサー、攪拌機を備えた反応容器に、2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート300g、ε-カプロラクトンモノマー1315g、メチルハイドロキノン0.33g、モノブチルスズオキサイド0.01gを仕込み、乾燥空気を流しながら120℃に昇温し、2時間保持した。カプロラクトンモノマーの消失を確認した後、40℃以下に冷却し、オルトリン酸換算含有量118%のポリリン酸111gを混合し、徐々に昇温し、80℃で6時間、攪拌しながら加熱して、下記式のRpの数平均分子量が700で、y=1とy=2の存在比が100:12のリン酸エステル(分散剤D1)を得た。得られたリン酸エステルの酸価は100mgKOH/gであった。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
 分散剤D2:以下の方法で製造した分散剤
 ガス導入管、温度計、コンデンサー、攪拌機を備えた反応容器に、1-チオグリセロール108質量部、ピロメリット酸二無水物174質量部、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)650質量部、触媒としてモノブチルスズオキシド0.2質量部を仕込み、窒素ガスで置換した後、120℃で5時間反応させた(第一工程)。酸価の測定で95%以上の酸無水物がハーフエステル化していることを確認した。次に、第一工程で得られた化合物を固形分換算で160質量部、2-ヒドロキシプロピルメタクリレート200質量部、エチルアクリレート200質量部、t-ブチルアクリレート150質量部、2-メトキシエチルアクリレート200質量部、メチルアクリレート200質量部、メタクリル酸50質量部、PGMEA663質量部を仕込み、反応容器内を80℃に加熱して、2,2’-アゾビス(2,4-ジメチルバレロニトリル)1.2質量部を添加し、12時間反応した(第二工程)。固形分測定により95%が反応したことを確認した。最後に、第二工程で得られた化合物の50%PGMEA溶液を500質量部、2-メタクリロイルオキシエチルイソシアネート(MOI)27.0質量部、ヒドロキノン0.1質量部を仕込み、イソシアネート基に基づく2270cm-1のピークの消失を確認するまで反応を行った(第三工程)。ピーク消失の確認後、反応溶液を冷却し、PGMEAを加えて固形分濃度を50質量%に調整して、酸価68mgKOH/g、C=C価0.62mmol/g、重量平均分子量(Mw)13000の樹脂の樹脂溶液(分散剤D2)を得た。
 分散剤D3:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位のモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。Mw:20000、酸価:70mgKOH/g、C=C価:0.4mmol/g)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
 分散剤D4:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位のモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。Mw:20000、酸価:75mgKOH/g)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
(Dispersant)
Dispersant D1: Dispersant (phosphate ester) produced by the following method
A reaction vessel equipped with an air inlet tube, a condenser, and a stirrer was charged with 300 g of 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 1315 g of ε-caprolactone monomer, 0.33 g of methylhydroquinone, and 0.01 g of monobutyltin oxide, and heated to 120 ° C while flowing dry air. The temperature was raised and maintained for 2 hours. After confirming the disappearance of the caprolactone monomer, the mixture was cooled to 40 ° C. or lower, 111 g of polyphosphoric acid having an orthophosphoric acid content of 118% was mixed, gradually heated, and heated at 80 ° C. for 6 hours while stirring, A phosphoric acid ester (dispersant D1) having a number average molecular weight of Rp 4 of the following formula of 700 and an abundance ratio of y = 1 and y = 2 of 100: 12 was obtained. The acid value of the obtained phosphoric acid ester was 100 mgKOH / g.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
Dispersant D2: Dispersant produced by the following method In a reaction vessel equipped with a gas introduction tube, thermometer, condenser, and stirrer, 108 parts by mass of 1-thioglycerol, 174 parts by mass of pyromellitic dianhydride, propylene glycol monomethyl. 650 parts by mass of ether acetate (PGMEA) and 0.2 parts by mass of monobutyltin oxide as a catalyst were charged, and after substituting with nitrogen gas, they were reacted at 120 ° C. for 5 hours (first step). It was confirmed by measuring the acid value that 95% or more of the acid anhydride was half-esterified. Next, 160 parts by mass of the compound obtained in the first step in terms of solid content, 200 parts by mass of 2-hydroxypropyl methacrylate, 200 parts by mass of ethyl acrylate, 150 parts by mass of t-butyl acrylate, 200 parts by mass of 2-methoxyethyl acrylate. Parts, 200 parts by weight of methyl acrylate, 50 parts by weight of methacrylic acid, 663 parts by weight of PGMEA, and heated to 80 ° C. in a reaction vessel to obtain 1.2 parts by weight of 2,2′-azobis (2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile). Parts were added and reacted for 12 hours (second step). Solid content measurement confirmed that 95% had reacted. Finally, 500 parts by mass of a 50% PGMEA solution of the compound obtained in the second step, 27.0 parts by mass of 2-methacryloyloxyethyl isocyanate (MOI) and 0.1 part by mass of hydroquinone were charged, and 2270 cm based on the isocyanate group was charged. The reaction was performed until the disappearance of the -1 peak was confirmed (third step). After confirming the disappearance of the peak, the reaction solution was cooled, PGMEA was added to adjust the solid content concentration to 50 mass%, the acid value was 68 mgKOH / g, the C = C value was 0.62 mmol / g, and the weight average molecular weight (Mw). A resin solution (dispersant D2) of 13,000 resins was obtained.
Dispersant D3: Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio of repeating units, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Mw: 20000, acid value: 70 mgKOH / g, C = C value: 0.4 mmol / g)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
Dispersant D4: Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio of repeating units, the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units, Mw: 20000, acid value: 75 mgKOH / g)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
(溶剤)
 溶剤J1:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)
 溶剤J2:シクロヘキサノン
 溶剤J3:シクロヘキシルアセテート
(solvent)
Solvent J1: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA)
Solvent J2: Cyclohexanone Solvent J3: Cyclohexyl acetate
<着色組成物の調製>
 下記表に示す原料を混合し、撹拌した後、孔径0.45μmのナイロン製フィルタ(日本ポール(株)製)でろ過してG組成物1~25、P組成物1、2、R組成物1の着色組成物を調製した。なお、R組成物1は信頼性の評価用の着色組成物である。
<Preparation of coloring composition>
The raw materials shown in the following table are mixed, stirred, and then filtered through a nylon filter (manufactured by Nippon Pall Co., Ltd.) having a pore size of 0.45 μm to prepare G compositions 1 to 25, P compositions 1, 2 and R compositions. No. 1 coloring composition was prepared. The R composition 1 is a coloring composition for reliability evaluation.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000048
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000048
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000050
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000050
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000051
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000051
 上記表に記載の原料は以下の通りである。 The raw materials listed in the above table are as follows.
(分散液)
 分散液K1~K9、L1~L8、M1:上述した分散液K1~K9、L1~L8、M1
(Dispersion liquid)
Dispersions K1 to K9, L1 to L8, M1: Dispersions K1 to K9, L1 to L8, M1 described above
(樹脂)
 樹脂E1:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位のモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。Mw:10000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
 樹脂E2:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位のモル比である。Mw:14000、酸価:78mgKOH/g)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
 樹脂E3:メチルメタクリレート50質量部、n-ブチルメタクリレート50質量部、PGMEA(プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート)45.4質量部を反応容器に仕込み、雰囲気ガスを窒素ガスで置換した。反応容器内を70℃に加熱して、3-メルカプト-1,2-プロパンジオール6質量部を添加して、さらにAIBN(アゾビスイソブチロニトリル)0.12質量部を加え、12時間反応させた。固形分測定により95%が反応したことを確認した。次に、ピロメリット酸二無水物9.7質量部、PGMEA70.3質量部、触媒としてDBU(1,8-ジアザビシクロ-[5.4.0]-7-ウンデセン)0.20質量部を追加し、120℃で7時間反応させた。酸価の測定で98%以上の酸無水物がハーフエステル化していることを確認し反応を終了させて下記構造の樹脂を得た。得られた樹脂は、酸価43mgKOH/g、重量平均分子量(Mw)9000であった。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
 樹脂E4:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位のモル比である。Mw:30000、酸価:110mgKOH/g)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
 樹脂E5:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位のモル比である。Mw:11000、酸価:30mgKOH/g)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
(resin)
Resin E1: Resin having the following structure (the numbers attached to the main chain are the molar ratios of repeating units, and the numbers attached to the side chains are the number of repeating units, Mw: 10000).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
Resin E2: Resin having the following structure (the numbers attached to the main chain are molar ratios of repeating units, Mw: 14000, acid value: 78 mgKOH / g)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
Resin E3: 50 parts by mass of methyl methacrylate, 50 parts by mass of n-butyl methacrylate, and 45.4 parts by mass of PGMEA (propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate) were charged into a reaction vessel, and the atmosphere gas was replaced with nitrogen gas. The inside of the reaction vessel is heated to 70 ° C., 6 parts by mass of 3-mercapto-1,2-propanediol is added, 0.12 parts by mass of AIBN (azobisisobutyronitrile) is further added, and the reaction is performed for 12 hours. Let Solid content measurement confirmed that 95% had reacted. Next, 9.7 parts by mass of pyromellitic dianhydride, 70.3 parts by mass of PGMEA, and 0.20 parts by mass of DBU (1,8-diazabicyclo- [5.4.0] -7-undecene) as a catalyst were added. And reacted at 120 ° C. for 7 hours. The acid value was measured to confirm that 98% or more of the acid anhydride was half-esterified, and the reaction was terminated to obtain a resin having the following structure. The obtained resin had an acid value of 43 mgKOH / g and a weight average molecular weight (Mw) of 9000.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
Resin E4: Resin having the following structure (the numbers attached to the main chain are molar ratios of repeating units, Mw: 30,000, acid value: 110 mgKOH / g)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
Resin E5: Resin having the following structure (numerals attached to the main chain are molar ratios of repeating units, Mw: 11,000, acid value: 30 mgKOH / g)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
(重合性モノマー)
 重合性モノマーF1:下記構造の化合物の混合物(右側化合物を30~40モル%含有)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
 重合性モノマーF2:下記構造の化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
 重合性モノマーF3:コハク酸変性ジペンタエリスリトールペンタアクリレート
(Polymerizable monomer)
Polymerizable monomer F1: a mixture of compounds having the following structures (containing 30 to 40 mol% of the right side compound)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
Polymerizable monomer F2: compound having the following structure
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
Polymerizable monomer F3: succinic acid-modified dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate
(光重合開始剤)
 開始剤G1~G3:下記構造の化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
 開始剤G4:IRGACURE OXE01(BASF社製)
(Photopolymerization initiator)
Initiators G1 to G3: compounds having the following structures
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
Initiator G4: IRGACURE OXE01 (manufactured by BASF)
(界面活性剤)
 界面活性剤H1:BYK-379(ビックケミー社製)
(Surfactant)
Surfactant H1: BYK-379 (manufactured by BYK Chemie)
(重合禁止剤)
 重合禁止剤I1:p-メトキシフェノール
(Polymerization inhibitor)
Polymerization inhibitor I1: p-methoxyphenol
(溶剤)
 溶剤J1:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート
 溶剤J2:シクロヘキサノン
 溶剤J3:シクロヘキシルアセテート
(solvent)
Solvent J1: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate Solvent J2: Cyclohexanone Solvent J3: Cyclohexyl acetate
<色ムラの評価>
 ガラス基板上にCT-4000(富士フイルムエレクトロニクスマテリアルズ(株)製)を膜厚が0.1μmとなるようにスピンコート法で塗布し、ホットプレートを用いて220℃で1時間加熱して下地層を形成した。この下地層付きのガラス基板上に各着色組成物(G組成物またはP組成物)をスピンコート法で塗布し、その後、ホットプレートを用いて100℃で2分間加熱して、厚さ0.5μmの組成物層を得た。
 この組成物層に対して、365nmの波長の光を照射し、露光量500mJ/cmにて露光を行った。次いで、ホットプレートを用いて220℃で300秒間ポストベークを行い、膜を形成した。この膜が形成されたガラス基板(評価用基板)を用いて輝度分布を下記方法で解析し、平均からのずれが±10%以上である画素数をもとに色ムラの評価を行った。
 輝度分布の測定方法について説明する。評価用基板を光学顕微鏡の観測レンズと光源との間に設置して光を観測レンズに向けて照射し、その透過光状態をデジタルカメラが設置された光学顕微鏡MX-50(オリンパス社製)を用いて観察した。膜表面の撮影は、任意に選択した5つの領域に対して行った。撮影画像の輝度を0~255までの256階調の濃度分布として数値化して保存した。この画像から輝度分布を解析し、平均からのズレが±10%を超える画素数にて色ムラを評価した。評価基準は以下の通りである。
 5:平均からのズレが±10%を超える画素数が1000以下である。
 4:平均からのズレが±10%を超える画素数が1000を超え3000以下である。
 3:平均からのズレが±10%を超える画素数が3000を超え5000以下である。
 2:平均からのズレが±10%を超える画素数が5000を超え15000以下である。
 1:平均からのズレが±10%を超える画素数が15000を超える。
<Evaluation of color unevenness>
CT-4000 (manufactured by FUJIFILM Electronic Materials Co., Ltd.) was applied on a glass substrate by spin coating to a film thickness of 0.1 μm, and heated at 220 ° C. for 1 hour using a hot plate. The formation was formed. Each colored composition (G composition or P composition) was applied onto this glass substrate with an underlayer by a spin coating method, and then heated at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes using a hot plate to a thickness of 0. A composition layer of 5 μm was obtained.
This composition layer was irradiated with light having a wavelength of 365 nm and exposed at an exposure amount of 500 mJ / cm 2 . Then, post baking was performed at 220 ° C. for 300 seconds using a hot plate to form a film. Using a glass substrate (evaluation substrate) on which this film was formed, the luminance distribution was analyzed by the following method, and color unevenness was evaluated based on the number of pixels whose deviation from the average was ± 10% or more.
A method of measuring the brightness distribution will be described. An evaluation substrate is installed between the observation lens and the light source of the optical microscope to irradiate the observation lens with light, and the transmitted light state is measured with an optical microscope MX-50 (manufactured by Olympus). And observed. The film surface was photographed for five arbitrarily selected regions. The brightness of the photographed image was digitized and stored as a density distribution of 256 gradations from 0 to 255. The luminance distribution was analyzed from this image, and the color unevenness was evaluated by the number of pixels whose deviation from the average exceeds ± 10%. The evaluation criteria are as follows.
5: The number of pixels whose deviation from the average exceeds ± 10% is 1000 or less.
4: The number of pixels whose deviation from the average exceeds ± 10% is more than 1000 and 3000 or less.
3: The number of pixels whose deviation from the average exceeds ± 10% exceeds 3000 and is 5000 or less.
2: The number of pixels whose deviation from the average exceeds ± 10% exceeds 5000 and is 15000 or less.
1: The number of pixels whose deviation from the average exceeds ± 10% exceeds 15,000.
<フォトリソグラフィ性(密着性)の評価>
 シリコンウエハ上にCT-4000(富士フイルムエレクトロニクスマテリアルズ(株)製)を膜厚が0.1μmとなるようにスピンコート法で塗布し、ホットプレートを用いて220℃で1時間加熱して下地層を形成した。この下地層付きのシリコンウエハ上に各着色組成物(G組成物またはP組成物)をスピンコート法で塗布し、その後、ホットプレートを用いて100℃で2分間加熱して、厚さ0.5μmの組成物層を得た。
 この組成物層に対して、i線ステッパー露光装置(FPA-3000i5+、Canon(株)製)を使用し、一辺1.1μmの正方ピクセルがそれぞれ基板上の4mm×3mmの領域に配列されたマスクパターンを介し、365nmの波長の光を照射し、500mJ/cmの露光量で露光した。
 露光後の組成物層に対し、水酸化テトラメチルアンモニウムの0.3質量%水溶液を用い、23℃で60秒間パドル現像を行った。その後、スピンシャワーにて水を用いてリンスを行い、更に純水にて水洗いを行った。その後、水滴を高圧のエアーで飛ばし、シリコンウエハを自然乾燥させたのち、ホットプレートを用いて220℃で300秒間ポストベークを行い、パターンを形成した。得られたパターンについて、光学顕微鏡を用いて観察し、全パターン中密着しているパターンをカウントしてフォトリソグラフィ性を評価した。
 5:すべてのパターンが密着している。
 4:密着しているパターンが、全パターンの90%以上100%未満である。
 3:密着しているパターンが、全パターンの80%以上90%未満である。
 2:密着しているパターンが、全パターンの70%以上80%未満である。
 1:密着しているパターンが、全パターンの70%未満である。
<Evaluation of photolithography (adhesion)>
CT-4000 (manufactured by FUJIFILM Electronic Materials Co., Ltd.) was applied on a silicon wafer by a spin coating method to a film thickness of 0.1 μm, and heated at 220 ° C. for 1 hour using a hot plate. The formation was formed. Each colored composition (G composition or P composition) was applied onto this silicon wafer with an underlayer by a spin coating method, and then heated at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes using a hot plate to a thickness of 0. A composition layer of 5 μm was obtained.
Using an i-line stepper exposure device (FPA-3000i5 +, manufactured by Canon Inc.) for this composition layer, a mask in which square pixels each having a side of 1.1 μm are arranged in an area of 4 mm × 3 mm on the substrate Light having a wavelength of 365 nm was irradiated through the pattern to perform exposure with an exposure amount of 500 mJ / cm 2 .
The composition layer after exposure was subjected to paddle development at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using a 0.3% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide. After that, a spin shower was used to rinse with water, and then pure water was used for washing. After that, water droplets were blown off with high-pressure air to naturally dry the silicon wafer, and then post baking was performed at 220 ° C. for 300 seconds using a hot plate to form a pattern. The obtained pattern was observed using an optical microscope, and the closely attached patterns were counted in all the patterns to evaluate the photolithography property.
5: All patterns are in close contact.
4: 90% or more and less than 100% of all patterns are in close contact with each other.
3: 80% or more and less than 90% of all patterns are in close contact with each other.
2: The contact pattern is 70% or more and less than 80% of all patterns.
1: The pattern in close contact is less than 70% of all patterns.
<信頼性の評価>
 シリコンウエハ上にCT-4000(富士フイルムエレクトロニクスマテリアルズ(株)製)を膜厚が0.1μmとなるようにスピンコート法で塗布した。次いで、ホットプレートを用いて100℃で2分間加熱した。さらにホットプレートを用いて230℃で2分間加熱して下地層を形成した。この下地層付きのシリコンウエハ上に各着色組成物(G組成物またはP組成物)をスピンコート法で塗布し、その後、ホットプレートを用いて100℃で2分間加熱して、厚さ0.5μmの組成物層を得た。
 この組成物層に対して、i線ステッパー露光機(FPA-3000i5+、Canon(株)製)を使用し、一辺1.0μmのベイヤーパターンを有するマスクを介して、365nmの波長の光を照射し、150mJ/cmの露光量で露光した。
 露光後の組成物層に対し、水酸化テトラメチルアンモニウムの0.3質量%水溶液を用い、23℃で60秒間パドル現像を行った。その後、スピンシャワーにて水を用いてリンスを行い、更に純水にて水洗いを行った。その後、水滴を高圧のエアーで飛ばし、シリコンウエハを自然乾燥させたのち、ホットプレートを用いて220℃で300秒間ポストベークを行い、緑色画素を形成した。
 続いて、R組成物1についても同様の処理を実施し、緑色画素の抜け部に、赤色画素を形成して緑色画素と赤色画素とが隣接した構造体を形成した。
 作製した構造体を固体撮像素子に組み込み、温度85℃、湿度85%の恒温恒湿槽にて、2000時間の恒温恒湿試験を行った。恒温恒湿試験後の固体撮像素子から上記構造体を取り出して構造体の断面(20箇所)を透過型電子顕微鏡を用いて観察(倍率40000倍)し、画素間のボイド(空隙)の有無を観察して、画素間のボイド(空隙)の発生率を調べ以下の基準で信頼性を判定した。
 ボイド(空隙)の発生率は、互いに接する画素の組み合わせごとに、次の式で算出した。
 ボイド(空隙)の発生率=[観察した境界のうちボイド(空隙)が発生した境界の数]/[観察した境界の数]
 また、本実施例においては、構造体の中からランダムに20箇所の断面を選択し、1断面ごとに、連続して並ぶ10境界群において、ボイド(空隙)の有無を観察することで、計200箇所の境界を観察した。
 5:ボイド(空隙)の発生率=0
 4:0<ボイド(空隙)の発生率≦0.1
 3:0.1<ボイド(空隙)の発生率≦0.2
 2:0.2<ボイド(空隙)の発生率≦0.5
 1:0.5<ボイド(空隙)の発生率≦1.0
<Reliability evaluation>
CT-4000 (manufactured by FUJIFILM Electronic Materials Co., Ltd.) was applied onto a silicon wafer by a spin coating method so that the film thickness was 0.1 μm. Then, it heated at 100 degreeC for 2 minutes using the hot plate. Furthermore, it heated at 230 degreeC for 2 minutes using the hot plate, and formed the base layer. Each colored composition (G composition or P composition) was applied onto this silicon wafer with an underlayer by a spin coating method, and then heated at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes using a hot plate to a thickness of 0. A composition layer of 5 μm was obtained.
This composition layer was irradiated with light having a wavelength of 365 nm through an i-line stepper exposure device (FPA-3000i5 +, manufactured by Canon Inc.) through a mask having a Bayer pattern of 1.0 μm on each side. , 150 mJ / cm 2 exposure amount.
The composition layer after exposure was subjected to paddle development at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using a 0.3% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide. After that, a spin shower was used to rinse with water, and then pure water was used for washing. After that, water droplets were blown off with high-pressure air to naturally dry the silicon wafer, and then post baking was performed at 220 ° C. for 300 seconds using a hot plate to form a green pixel.
Subsequently, similar processing was performed on the R composition 1, and a red pixel was formed in a void portion of the green pixel to form a structure in which the green pixel and the red pixel were adjacent to each other.
The manufactured structure was incorporated into a solid-state image sensor, and a constant temperature and constant humidity test was performed for 2000 hours in a constant temperature and constant humidity chamber at a temperature of 85 ° C. and a humidity of 85%. The above structure is taken out from the solid-state image sensor after the constant temperature and humidity test, and the cross section (20 places) of the structure is observed using a transmission electron microscope (magnification: 40,000 times) to check for the presence of voids (voids) between pixels. Observation was performed to check the occurrence rate of voids (voids) between pixels, and the reliability was judged according to the following criteria.
The occurrence rate of voids (voids) was calculated by the following formula for each combination of pixels in contact with each other.
Occurrence rate of voids (gap) = [number of boundaries with voids (voids) among observed boundaries] / [number of boundaries observed]
In addition, in the present example, by selecting 20 cross sections at random from the structure and observing the presence or absence of voids (voids) in 10 boundary groups arranged in succession for each cross section, 200 boundaries were observed.
5: Occurrence rate of voids (voids) = 0
4: 0 <Void (Void) Occurrence Rate ≤ 0.1
3: 0.1 <occurrence rate of voids (voids) ≤ 0.2
2: 0.2 <occurrence rate of voids (voids) ≤ 0.5
1: 0.5 <occurrence rate of voids (voids) ≤ 1.0
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000060
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000060
 上記表に示すように、実施例は、色ムラおよびフォトリソグラフィ性(密着性)の評価が良好であった。更には信頼性の評価も良好であった。これに対し、比較例は、色ムラおよびフォトリソグラフィ性のいずれか一方の評価が不十分であった。なお、上記表中の重合性モノマーの含有量の数値は、着色組成物の全固形分中における重合性モノマーの含有量の値である。また、M/B比は、着色組成物に含まれる重合性モノマーの質量Mと、着色組成物に含まれる樹脂の質量Bとの比である。重合性モノマーの質量Mは、着色組成物に含まれる重合性モノマーF1~F3の合計の質量である。樹脂の質量Bは、着色組成物に含まれる分散剤D1~D4と、樹脂E1~樹脂E5の合計の質量である。 As shown in the above table, in the examples, the evaluation of color unevenness and photolithography (adhesion) was good. Furthermore, the evaluation of reliability was also good. On the other hand, in the comparative example, one of the color unevenness and the photolithographic property was insufficiently evaluated. The numerical value of the content of the polymerizable monomer in the above table is the value of the content of the polymerizable monomer in the total solid content of the coloring composition. The M / B ratio is the ratio of the mass M of the polymerizable monomer contained in the coloring composition to the mass B of the resin contained in the coloring composition. The mass M of the polymerizable monomer is the total mass of the polymerizable monomers F1 to F3 contained in the coloring composition. The mass B of the resin is the total mass of the dispersants D1 to D4 and the resins E1 to E5 contained in the coloring composition.
(実施例100)
 シリコンウエハ上に、Green組成物を製膜後の膜厚が1.0μmになるようにスピンコート法で塗布した。次いで、ホットプレートを用いて、100℃で2分間加熱した。次いで、i線ステッパー露光装置FPA-3000i5+(キヤノン(株)製)を用い、1000mJ/cmの露光量で2μm四方のドットパターンのマスクを介して露光した。次いで、水酸化テトラメチルアンモニウム(TMAH)0.3質量%水溶液を用い、23℃で60秒間パドル現像を行った。その後、スピンシャワーにてリンスを行い、更に純水にて水洗した。次いで、ホットプレートを用いて、200℃で5分間加熱することで、Green組成物をパターニングした。同様にRed組成物、Blue組成物を順次パターニングし、緑、赤及び青の着色パターン(ベイヤーパターン)を形成した。
 Green組成物としては、G組成物1の着色組成物を使用した。
 Red組成物及びBlue組成物については後述する。
 なお、ベイヤーパターンとは、米国特許第3,971,065号明細書に開示されているような、一個の赤色(Red)素子と、二個の緑色(Green)素子と、一個の青色(Blue)素子とを有する色フィルタ素子の2×2アレイを繰り返したパターンである。得られたカラーフィルタを公知の方法に従い固体撮像素子に組み込んだ。この固体撮像素子は好適な画像認識能を有していた。
(Example 100)
The Green composition was applied onto a silicon wafer by spin coating so that the film thickness after film formation was 1.0 μm. Then, using a hot plate, it heated at 100 degreeC for 2 minutes. Then, using an i-line stepper exposure device FPA-3000i5 + (manufactured by Canon Inc.), exposure was performed through a mask having a dot pattern of 2 μm square with an exposure amount of 1000 mJ / cm 2 . Next, paddle development was performed at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using a 0.3% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH). Then, it rinsed with a spin shower and further washed with pure water. Next, the Green composition was patterned by heating at 200 ° C. for 5 minutes using a hot plate. Similarly, the Red composition and the Blue composition were sequentially patterned to form green, red, and blue coloring patterns (Bayer patterns).
The coloring composition of G composition 1 was used as the Green composition.
The Red composition and the Blue composition will be described later.
The Bayer pattern is, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,971,065, one red element, two green elements, and one blue element. ) Element and a 2 × 2 array of color filter elements are repeated. The obtained color filter was incorporated into a solid-state image sensor according to a known method. This solid-state image sensor had a suitable image recognition ability.
-Red組成物-
 下記成分を混合し、撹拌した後、孔径0.45μmのナイロン製フィルタ(日本ポール(株)製)でろ過して、Red組成物を調製した。
 Red顔料分散液:51.7質量部
 樹脂101:0.6質量部
 重合性化合物102:0.6質量部
 光重合開始剤101:0.3質量部
 界面活性剤101:4.2質量部
 PGMEA:42.6質量部
-Red composition-
The following components were mixed, stirred, and then filtered through a nylon filter (manufactured by Nippon Pall Co., Ltd.) having a pore size of 0.45 μm to prepare a Red composition.
Red pigment dispersion: 51.7 parts by mass Resin 101: 0.6 parts by mass Polymerizable compound 102: 0.6 parts by mass Photopolymerization initiator 101: 0.3 parts by mass Surfactant 101: 4.2 parts by mass PGMEA : 42.6 parts by mass
-Blue組成物-
 下記成分を混合し、撹拌した後、孔径0.45μmのナイロン製フィルタ(日本ポール(株)製)でろ過して、Blue組成物を調製した。
 Blue顔料分散液:44.9質量部
 樹脂101の40質量%PGMEA溶液:2.1質量部
 重合性化合物101:1.5質量部
 重合性化合物102:0.7質量部
 光重合開始剤101:0.8質量部
 界面活性剤101:4.2質量部
 PGMEA:45.8質量部
-Blue composition-
The components below were mixed, stirred, and then filtered through a nylon filter (manufactured by Nippon Pall Co., Ltd.) having a pore size of 0.45 μm to prepare a Blue composition.
Blue pigment dispersion: 44.9 parts by mass 40% by mass PGMEA solution of resin 101: 2.1 parts by mass Polymerizable compound 101: 1.5 parts by mass Polymerizable compound 102: 0.7 parts by mass Photopolymerization initiator 101: 0.8 parts by mass Surfactant 101: 4.2 parts by mass PGMEA: 45.8 parts by mass
 Red組成物及びBlue組成物に使用した原料は、以下の通りである。 The raw materials used for the Red composition and the Blue composition are as follows.
 Red顔料分散液
 C.I.ピグメントレッド254を9.6質量部、C.I.ピグメントイエロー139を4.3質量部、分散剤(Disperbyk-161、BYKChemie社製)を6.8質量部、PGMEAを79.3質量部とからなる混合液を、ビーズミル(ジルコニアビーズ0.3mm径)により3時間混合及び分散した。その後更に、減圧機構付き高圧分散機NANO-3000-10(日本ビーイーイー(株)製)を用いて、2000kg/cmの圧力下で流量500g/minとして分散処理を行った。この分散処理を10回繰り返し、Red顔料分散液を得た。
Red pigment dispersion C.I. I. Pigment Red 254, 9.6 parts by mass, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 139 (4.3 parts by mass), a dispersant (Disperbyk-161, manufactured by BYK Chemie) 6.8 parts by mass, and PGMEA (79.3 parts by mass) were mixed with a bead mill (zirconia beads 0.3 mm diameter). ), And mixed and dispersed for 3 hours. Thereafter, a high-pressure disperser NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) equipped with a decompression mechanism was further used to perform dispersion treatment under a pressure of 2000 kg / cm 3 at a flow rate of 500 g / min. This dispersion treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain a Red pigment dispersion liquid.
 Blue顔料分散液
 C.I.ピグメントブルー15:6を9.7質量部、C.I.ピグメントバイオレット23を2.4質量部、分散剤(Disperbyk-161、BYKChemie社製)を5.5質量部、PGMEAを82.4質量部からなる混合液を、ビーズミル(ジルコニアビーズ0.3mm径)により3時間混合及び分散した。その後更に、減圧機構付き高圧分散機NANO-3000-10(日本ビーイーイー(株)製)を用いて、2000kg/cmの圧力下で流量500g/minとして分散処理を行った。この分散処理を10回繰り返し、Blue顔料分散液を得た。
Blue pigment dispersion C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6, 9.7 parts by mass, C.I. I. Pigment Violet 23 (2.4 parts by mass), Dispersant (Disperbyk-161, manufactured by BYK Chemie) 5.5 parts by mass, PGMEA (82.4 parts by mass) was mixed with a beads mill (zirconia beads 0.3 mm diameter). And mixed and dispersed for 3 hours. Thereafter, a high-pressure disperser NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) equipped with a decompression mechanism was further used to perform dispersion treatment under a pressure of 2000 kg / cm 3 at a flow rate of 500 g / min. This dispersion treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain a Blue pigment dispersion liquid.
 樹脂101:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比である。Mw=14000)の40質量%PGMEA溶液
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
 重合性化合物101:KAYARAD DPHA(日本化薬(株)製)
 重合性化合物102:下記構造の化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
 光重合開始剤101:IRGACURE OXE02(BASF製)
 界面活性剤101:下記混合物(Mw=14000)の1質量%PGMEA溶液。下記の式中、繰り返し単位の割合を示す%はモル%である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
Resin 101: 40% by mass PGMEA solution of resin having the following structure (numerals attached to the main chain are molar ratios, Mw = 14000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
Polymerizable compound 101: KAYARAD DPHA (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.)
Polymerizable compound 102: compound having the following structure
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
Photopolymerization initiator 101: IRGACURE OXE02 (manufactured by BASF)
Surfactant 101: 1% by mass PGMEA solution of the following mixture (Mw = 14000). In the following formula,% indicating the proportion of repeating units is mol%.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063

Claims (15)

  1.  着色剤と、エチレン性不飽和結合基を有する重合性モノマーと、光重合開始剤と、樹脂とを含む着色組成物であって、
     前記着色剤は、下記式(1)で表される化合物および下記式(2)で表される化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含み、
     前記着色組成物の全固形分中に前記重合性モノマーを0.1~6.0質量%含有する、着色組成物;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
     式(1)中、X~Xはそれぞれ独立して、置換基を表す;
     Zはヒドロキシ基、ハロゲン原子、-OP(=O)R、または-O-SiRを表し、R~Rはそれぞれ独立して、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、またはアリールオキシ基を表し、RとR、RとRは互いに結合して環を形成しても良い;
     m1~m4は、それぞれ独立して0~4の整数を表し、m1~m4が2以上のとき、X~Xはそれぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
     式(2)中、X~X12はそれぞれ独立して、置換基を表す;
     Lは、-O-SiR-O-、-O-SiR-O-SiR-O-、または-O-P(=O)R10-O-を表し、R~R10はそれぞれ独立して、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、またはアリールオキシ基を表す;
     m5~m12は、それぞれ独立して0~4の整数を表し、m5~m12が2以上のとき、X~X12はそれぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
    A coloring composition comprising a colorant, a polymerizable monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group, a photopolymerization initiator, and a resin,
    The colorant contains at least one selected from the compound represented by the following formula (1) and the compound represented by the following formula (2),
    A coloring composition containing 0.1 to 6.0% by mass of the polymerizable monomer in the total solid content of the coloring composition;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
    In formula (1), X 1 to X 4 each independently represent a substituent;
    Z 1 represents a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, —OP (═O) R 1 R 2 , or —O—SiR 3 R 4 R 5 , and R 1 to R 5 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, It represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, or an aryloxy group, and R 1 and R 2 , and R 3 and R 4 may combine with each other to form a ring;
    m1 to m4 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, and when m1 to m4 are 2 or more, X 1 to X 4 may be the same or different;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
    In formula (2), X 5 to X 12 each independently represent a substituent;
    L A represents -O-SiR 6 R 7 -O-, -O-SiR 6 R 7 -O-SiR 8 R 9 -O-, or -OP (= O) R 10 -O-, R 6 to R 10 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, or an aryloxy group;
    m5 to m12 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, and when m5 to m12 are 2 or more, X 5 to X 12 may be the same or different.
  2.  前記着色剤は、カラーインデックスピグメントグリーン62およびカラーインデックスピグメントグリーン63から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む、請求項1に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to claim 1, wherein the coloring agent includes at least one selected from color index pigment green 62 and color index pigment green 63.
  3.  前記着色剤は、カラーインデックスピグメントイエロー138、カラーインデックスピグメントイエロー139、カラーインデックスピグメントイエロー150及びカラーインデックスピグメントイエロー231から選択される少なくとも1種を含む、請求項1または2に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the colorant includes at least one selected from color index pigment yellow 138, color index pigment yellow 139, color index pigment yellow 150, and color index pigment yellow 231.
  4.  前記着色剤は、更に下記式(3)で表される化合物を含む、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
     式(3)中、Ry~Ry13は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、スルホ基、スルホ基の塩、カルボキシル基、カルボキシル基の塩、フタルイミドメチル基、またはスルファモイル基を表す;
     Ry~Ryのうち隣接した2つの基同士は結合して環を形成していてもよく、Ry10~Ry13のうち隣接した2つの基同士は結合して環を形成していてもよい。
    The coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the coloring agent further contains a compound represented by the following formula (3):
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
    In formula (3), Ry 1 to Ry 13 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, a sulfo group, a salt of a sulfo group, a carboxyl group, a salt of a carboxyl group, or phthalimidomethyl. Represents a group or a sulfamoyl group;
    Two adjacent groups of Ry 1 to Ry 4 may be bonded to each other to form a ring, and two adjacent groups of Ry 10 to Ry 13 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. Good.
  5.  前記着色剤中における、前記式(1)で表される化合物と前記式(2)で表される化合物との合計の含有量が30質量%以上である、請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 5. The colorant according to claim 1, wherein a total content of the compound represented by the formula (1) and the compound represented by the formula (2) is 30% by mass or more. The coloring composition according to the item.
  6.  前記樹脂は、エチレン性不飽和結合基を有する樹脂を含む、請求項1~5のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the resin contains a resin having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group.
  7.  前記樹脂は、下記式(I)で表される化合物由来の繰り返し単位を含む樹脂を含有する、請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
     式中、Xiは、OまたはNHを表し、
     Riは水素原子またはメチル基を表し、
     Liは2価の連結基を表し、
     Ri10は置換基を表し、
     mは0~2の整数を表し、
     pは0以上の整数を表す。
    The coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the resin contains a resin containing a repeating unit derived from a compound represented by the following formula (I):
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
    In the formula, Xi 1 represents O or NH,
    Ri 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group,
    Li 1 represents a divalent linking group,
    Ri 10 represents a substituent,
    m represents an integer of 0 to 2,
    p represents an integer of 0 or more.
  8.  前記式(I)で表される化合物由来の繰り返し単位を含む樹脂は、更に、アルキル(メタ)アクリレート由来の繰り返し単位を含む、請求項7に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to claim 7, wherein the resin containing a repeating unit derived from the compound represented by the formula (I) further contains a repeating unit derived from an alkyl (meth) acrylate.
  9.  前記着色組成物に含まれる重合性モノマーの質量Mと、前記着色組成物に含まれる樹脂の質量Bとの比であるM/Bが0.03~0.15である、請求項1~8のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The ratio M 1 / B 1 of the mass M 1 of the polymerizable monomer contained in the coloring composition to the mass B 1 of the resin contained in the coloring composition is 0.03 to 0.15. Item 9. The colored composition according to any one of items 1 to 8.
  10.  前記重合性モノマーは、コハク酸変性ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレートおよびジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレートから選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む、請求項1~9のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 10. The polymerizable monomer comprises at least one selected from succinic acid-modified dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate and dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate. The coloring composition according to any one of items.
  11.  請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物から得られる膜。 A film obtained from the coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 10.
  12.  請求項11に記載の膜を有するカラーフィルタ。 A color filter having the film according to claim 11.
  13.  請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物を用いて支持体上に着色組成物層を形成する工程と、フォトリソグラフィ法により前記着色組成物層に対してパターンを形成する工程と、を有するカラーフィルタの製造方法。 A step of forming a coloring composition layer on a support using the coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 10, and a step of forming a pattern on the coloring composition layer by a photolithography method. And a method for manufacturing a color filter having:
  14.  請求項11に記載の膜を有する固体撮像素子。 A solid-state image sensor having the film according to claim 11.
  15.  請求項11に記載の膜を有する画像表示装置。 An image display device having the film according to claim 11.
PCT/JP2019/039780 2018-10-19 2019-10-09 Coloring composition, film, color filter, method for manufacturing color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device WO2020080218A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020553110A JP7130055B2 (en) 2018-10-19 2019-10-09 Coloring composition, film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2018197304 2018-10-19
JP2018-197304 2018-10-19

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020080218A1 true WO2020080218A1 (en) 2020-04-23

Family

ID=70283451

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2019/039780 WO2020080218A1 (en) 2018-10-19 2019-10-09 Coloring composition, film, color filter, method for manufacturing color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (2) JP7130055B2 (en)
TW (1) TW202028374A (en)
WO (1) WO2020080218A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2020197563A (en) * 2019-05-31 2020-12-10 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Coloring composition, color filter, solid-state image sensor, and liquid crystal display device

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024190446A1 (en) * 2023-03-13 2024-09-19 富士フイルム株式会社 Resin composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000321417A (en) * 1999-05-10 2000-11-24 Jsr Corp Radiation-sensitive composition for color filter
JP2004252443A (en) * 2003-01-30 2004-09-09 Dainippon Ink & Chem Inc Cobalt phthalocyanine pigment for color filter, pigment composition, and color filter
JP2012155231A (en) * 2011-01-28 2012-08-16 Toyo Ink Sc Holdings Co Ltd Coloring composition for color filter and color filter
JP2014132296A (en) * 2013-01-07 2014-07-17 Toyo Ink Sc Holdings Co Ltd Coloring composition for color filter, and color filter
JP2015072440A (en) * 2013-09-09 2015-04-16 富士フイルム株式会社 Coloring compositions, photosensitive coloring compositions, color filters and manufacturing methods thereof, solid-state image sensors, image display devices, monomers, and polymers
JP2016200627A (en) * 2015-04-07 2016-12-01 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Coloring composition for color filter, and color filter

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP5191553B2 (en) 2011-02-17 2013-05-08 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored radiation-sensitive composition, method for producing color filter, color filter, and solid-state imaging device
KR101815879B1 (en) * 2011-06-28 2018-01-08 주식회사 이엔에프테크놀로지 Colored photosensitive resin composition for color filter
JP2015151530A (en) 2014-02-19 2015-08-24 富士フイルム株式会社 Composite and production method of the same, colored composition, cured film, color filter, production method of color filter, solid state imaging element, and image display device, as well as laminate
JP2015232641A (en) 2014-06-10 2015-12-24 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Red colored composition for organic el display device, color filter, and organic el display device
JP6794681B2 (en) 2016-07-08 2020-12-02 三菱ケミカル株式会社 Metal surface topcoat composition and resin molded product
JP6834591B2 (en) 2017-02-28 2021-02-24 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Photosensitive coloring compositions and color filters

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000321417A (en) * 1999-05-10 2000-11-24 Jsr Corp Radiation-sensitive composition for color filter
JP2004252443A (en) * 2003-01-30 2004-09-09 Dainippon Ink & Chem Inc Cobalt phthalocyanine pigment for color filter, pigment composition, and color filter
JP2012155231A (en) * 2011-01-28 2012-08-16 Toyo Ink Sc Holdings Co Ltd Coloring composition for color filter and color filter
JP2014132296A (en) * 2013-01-07 2014-07-17 Toyo Ink Sc Holdings Co Ltd Coloring composition for color filter, and color filter
JP2015072440A (en) * 2013-09-09 2015-04-16 富士フイルム株式会社 Coloring compositions, photosensitive coloring compositions, color filters and manufacturing methods thereof, solid-state image sensors, image display devices, monomers, and polymers
JP2016200627A (en) * 2015-04-07 2016-12-01 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Coloring composition for color filter, and color filter

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2020197563A (en) * 2019-05-31 2020-12-10 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Coloring composition, color filter, solid-state image sensor, and liquid crystal display device
JP7354592B2 (en) 2019-05-31 2023-10-03 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Colored compositions, color filters, solid-state imaging devices, and liquid crystal display devices

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP7130055B2 (en) 2022-09-02
TW202028374A (en) 2020-08-01
JP7344355B2 (en) 2023-09-13
JPWO2020080218A1 (en) 2021-09-30
JP2022180356A (en) 2022-12-06

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7170732B2 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP7344355B2 (en) Colored composition, film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
WO2022202204A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
WO2020040043A1 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, pattern formation method, color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
WO2020166510A1 (en) Curable composition, film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and polymer compound
JP2024052779A (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid imaging element, and image display device
WO2021166855A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, red pixel, color filter, solid-state image sensing device, image display apparatus, and kit
JP2024014989A (en) Colored photosensitive composition, cured product, color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
JP2024071438A (en) Colored composition, film, red pixel, color filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and kit
JP2024012409A (en) Colored photosensitive composition, cured product, color filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and asymmetric diketopyrrolopyrrole compound
JP7419475B2 (en) Colored photosensitive resin composition, film, color filter, method for producing color filter, structure, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP7462807B2 (en) Photosensitive coloring composition, cured film, pattern forming method, color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
WO2020022248A1 (en) Curable composition, film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid state imaging device and image display device
JP7507865B2 (en) Colored composition, cured product, color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, resin, and method for producing the same
JP7143431B2 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter, method for producing color filter, structure, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP2022119701A (en) Photosensitive composition, method for producing photosensitive composition, film, optical filter, solid state image sensor and image display device
WO2020075568A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, method for producing color filter, color filter, solid state imaging device and image display device
WO2020022247A1 (en) Curable composition, production method for curable composition, film, color filter, production method for color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
JP7414948B2 (en) Colored compositions, films, red pixels, color filters, solid-state imaging devices, image display devices and kits
JP7344379B2 (en) Resin compositions, films, optical filters, solid-state imaging devices, and image display devices
JP7143432B2 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP7302014B2 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter, solid-state imaging device and image display device
WO2020179648A1 (en) Structure production method, color filter production method, solid state imaging element production method, and image display device production method
WO2020158594A1 (en) Curable composition, film, structure, color filter, solid-state imaging element and image display device
WO2023204062A1 (en) Resin composition, method for producing resin composition, pigment derivative, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element and image display device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19874607

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020553110

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19874607

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1